Toshiba Strata DK DK14, DK40i, DK424 Digital Business Telephone System General Description

726+,%$
Telecommunication Systems Division
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
General Description
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.1
Software Release 4.1
and ACD
May 1999
Strata DK
General End User Information
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the
provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and
Regulations.
FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the
telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company—
connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
call Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division
in Irvine, CA (949) 583-3700.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
compatibility or use of the Strata DK system, the telephone company will notify you in
advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata DK system to the
telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
1. Your telephone number.
2. FCC registration number:
♦ Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system. The
appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of
the system.
♦ If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
be registered as a Key telephone system.
♦ If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
telephone system registration in some areas.
♦ If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
for assistance.
DK14 and DK40i
Key system: CJ6MLA-74479-KF-E
Hybrid: CJ6MLA-74478-MF-E
DK424
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
PBX: CJCHN-22757-PF-E
3. Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful
to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas,
but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your
line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company
to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
4. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ1CX, RJ2EX, RJ2GX,
RJ48C, RJ48X, RJ11, RJ14C, RJ21X (see Network Requirements in this
document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and tie
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
© Copyright 1999
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
DKA-GD-GNDES-VE
4010445
Version E, May 1999
Version D, August 1998
Version C, March 1998
Version B, October 1997
Version A.1, May 1997
Version A, March 1997
®
Important Notice — Music-On-Hold
Publication Information
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
UL
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Strata AirLink and Call Center Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information
Systems, Inc. Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information
Systems, Inc. Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
Contents
Introduction
Organization........................................................................................................................................... ix
Conventions............................................................................................................................................. x
Related Documents/Media ...................................................................................................................... x
Chapter 1 – Strata DK14
KSU Architecture.................................................................................................................................... 2
Digital Telephone/Central Office (CO) Line Circuits...................................................................... 2
Optional Printed Circuit Boards.............................................................................................................. 3
Central Office Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (QCDU2) .................................................... 3
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (QSTU2)................................................................................... 3
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (QRCU3)...................................................................... 3
Auto Attendant Feature Key (QKYS1) ............................................................................................ 3
Serial Interface Board (WSIU1) ....................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 4
Reserve Power .................................................................................................................................. 4
Power Failure Interface .................................................................................................................... 4
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface ..................................................................................................... 5
Paging Interface................................................................................................................................ 5
Flexible Relay Contacts.................................................................................................................... 5
Maximum Line/Station Configurations .................................................................................................. 5
Network Requirements............................................................................................................................ 5
Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6
System Technology................................................................................................................................. 7
Pulse Code Modulation .................................................................................................................... 7
Custom Electronic Circuitry............................................................................................................. 7
Stored Program Control.................................................................................................................... 7
Microprocessors................................................................................................................................ 7
Maintenance and Programming .............................................................................................................. 8
DKAdmin/DKBackup ...................................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 2 – Strata DK40i
Station and CO Lines .............................................................................................................................. 9
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................. 10
Base KSU Architecture ......................................................................................................................... 11
Digital Telephone Circuits.............................................................................................................. 11
Central Office (CO) Line Circuits (TCOU/TDDU/TBSU)............................................................ 11
ISDN BRI S/T Circuits (TBSU)..................................................................................................... 12
Caller ID (TCIU2) .......................................................................................................................... 12
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (KSTU2)................................................................................. 12
Strata DK General Description
5/99
i
Contents
Chapter 3 – Strata DK424
DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver (K5RCU and K5RCU2) ................................................... 12
Auto Attendant Feature Key (KKYS) ............................................................................................ 12
SMDR, SMDI, and Maintenance DKAdmin/Modem (TTY) Interface (TSIU)............................. 12
Power Supply.................................................................................................................................. 13
Power Failure Interface .................................................................................................................. 14
Music-on-Hold Interface ................................................................................................................ 14
Expansion KSU Architecture................................................................................................................ 14
Typical Line Configurations ................................................................................................................. 15
DK40i Line and Station Capacity................................................................................................... 15
Network Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 15
Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................................................... 16
System Technology............................................................................................................................... 17
Pulse Code Modulation .................................................................................................................. 17
Custom Electronic Circuitry........................................................................................................... 17
Stored Program Control.................................................................................................................. 17
Microprocessors.............................................................................................................................. 17
Maintenance and Programming ............................................................................................................ 17
DKAdmin/DKBackup .................................................................................................................... 17
Strata AirLink Wireless System............................................................................................................ 18
Chapter 3 – Strata DK424
Architecture........................................................................................................................................... 19
Base and Expansion Cabinets......................................................................................................... 19
Expansion and Configuration ......................................................................................................... 20
Expansion Cabinets ........................................................................................................................ 20
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) ....................................................................................................... 21
Maximum Line/Station Capacities........................................................................................................ 22
Power Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 26
Floor Mount Hardware.......................................................................................................................... 28
Functional Block Diagrams................................................................................................................... 29
System Technology............................................................................................................................... 32
Pulse Code Modulation .................................................................................................................. 32
Custom Electronic Circuitry........................................................................................................... 32
Stored Program Control.................................................................................................................. 32
Microprocessors.............................................................................................................................. 32
Maintenance and Programming ............................................................................................................ 32
DKAdmin/DKBackup .................................................................................................................... 32
Strata AirLink Wireless System............................................................................................................ 33
Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCBs
Station PCBs ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU2) ................................................................................... 35
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RDSU) ...................................................................... 35
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (RWIU) ............................................................................ 36
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU) (DK40i only) ............................................... 36
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) ................................................................................ 36
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU).................................................................. 36
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RSTU2)................................................................................. 36
ii
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Contents
Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals
Console PCBs........................................................................................................................................ 37
Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATU, DK424 only)............................................................... 37
CO Line PCBs....................................................................................................................................... 37
Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)................................................................................................... 37
Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit (RCOU) .................................................................................. 38
Ground/Loop Start Interface CO Line Interface Unit (RGLU2).................................................... 38
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit (RDDU)............................................................................... 38
Tie Line Unit (REMU) ................................................................................................................... 38
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit (RDTU2) (DK424 only)........................................................................... 38
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU) (DK424 only)............................................................ 39
ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBSU) ........................................................................ 39
ISDN U-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBUU) (DK424 only)................................................... 40
Enhanced 911 CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RCMS) (DK424 only) ............................... 40
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies ................................................................................................. 40
Option Interface PCBs .......................................................................................................................... 43
Option Interface Unit (PIOU)......................................................................................................... 43
Simplified Option Interface Unit (PIOUS)..................................................................................... 44
External Page Interface Unit (PEPU) ............................................................................................. 44
Single Serial Interface Unit (RSSU)............................................................................................... 45
Serial Interface Unit (RSIU, DK424 only)..................................................................................... 46
Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones ................................................................................................................................ 48
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones ........................................................................................... 50
Speakerphones....................................................................................................................................... 51
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................. 52
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options ..................................................................................................... 53
Digital Add-on Module (DADM)................................................................................................... 53
Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI)................................................................................................. 53
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU) .............................................................................. 53
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (DVSU).................................................................................... 54
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) ........................................................................................ 54
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) ........................................................................................ 54
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset .......................................................................................................... 55
Features........................................................................................................................................... 55
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT).......................................................................................................... 56
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT).................................................................................................... 57
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ............................................................................................... 58
Door Phone (MDFB)............................................................................................................................. 58
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit (DDCB) ....................................................................................... 59
External Speaker (HESB) ..................................................................................................................... 59
Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK Processing ..................................................................................... 59
Cabling and Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 60
Station and Peripheral Specifications.................................................................................................... 60
Chapter 6 – Features
System Features .................................................................................................................................... 61
Abandoned Call Numbers .............................................................................................................. 61
Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verified) ................................................................................. 61
Strata DK General Description
5/99
iii
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Alarm Sensor (DK40i and DK424 only)........................................................................................ 62
Alternate Answer Point .................................................................................................................. 62
Amplified Conference Interface ..................................................................................................... 62
Auto Attendant (Built-in) ............................................................................................................... 62
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (DK424 only)........................................................................ 62
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)........................................................................................ 63
Automatic Release from Hold ........................................................................................................ 64
Background Music (BGM)............................................................................................................. 64
Caller ID ......................................................................................................................................... 65
Centrex/PBX Compatible ............................................................................................................... 65
Centrex Ringing Repeat.................................................................................................................. 65
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) ......................................................................................... 66
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 67
Credit Card Calling......................................................................................................................... 67
Data Switching ............................................................................................................................... 67
Day/Night Modes ........................................................................................................................... 67
Delayed Ringing ............................................................................................................................. 67
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only)..................................... 68
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines (DK40i and DK424 only) ...................................................... 68
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)............................................................................................ 69
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing ........................................................................... 69
Door Lock Control.......................................................................................................................... 69
Door Phones (MDFB) .................................................................................................................... 69
DTMF Back Tone........................................................................................................................... 70
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible .................................................................................. 70
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 milliseconds) .................................................................................... 70
Emergency Ringdown .................................................................................................................... 70
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service ........................................................................................................ 70
External Page Zones ....................................................................................................................... 71
Flexible Button Assignment ........................................................................................................... 71
Flexible Directory Numbers ........................................................................................................... 71
Group Paging.................................................................................................................................. 71
Handsfree Directory Number Paths................................................................................................ 72
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) .................................................................. 72
Hotline Service ............................................................................................................................... 72
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ................................................................................. 73
Least Cost Routing (LCR).............................................................................................................. 75
Line Groups .................................................................................................................................... 76
Line Queuing .................................................................................................................................. 76
Live System Programming ............................................................................................................. 76
Memory Protection ......................................................................................................................... 76
Message Waiting ............................................................................................................................ 76
Multiple Directory Numbers .......................................................................................................... 76
Multiple FCC Registration ............................................................................................................. 78
Music-on-hold (MOH) ................................................................................................................... 78
Night Ringing Over External Page................................................................................................. 78
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones ...................................................................................... 78
Non-blocking Talk Paths ................................................................................................................ 78
Off-premises Station....................................................................................................................... 78
Outgoing Call Restriction............................................................................................................... 79
iv
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Pooled CO Line Button .................................................................................................................. 79
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................................................................... 79
Privacy/Non-privacy Calling.......................................................................................................... 79
Relay Service.................................................................................................................................. 79
Remote Administration/Maintenance............................................................................................. 80
Reserve Power ................................................................................................................................ 80
Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) .................................................................................. 80
Speed Dial....................................................................................................................................... 81
Station Hunting............................................................................................................................... 81
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................. 82
Station Relocation........................................................................................................................... 82
StrataControl (DK40i and DK424 only) ........................................................................................ 82
System Programming through a Station......................................................................................... 83
System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin) ................................................................ 83
T1 Interface (DK424 only) ............................................................................................................. 83
Tandem CO Line Connections ....................................................................................................... 83
Tenant Service ................................................................................................................................ 84
Tie Lines ......................................................................................................................................... 84
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial ........................................................................... 85
Traveling Class of Service.............................................................................................................. 85
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers .......................................................................... 85
Voice First or Tone Signaling ........................................................................................................ 85
Voice Mail Integration.................................................................................................................... 85
Station Features..................................................................................................................................... 90
Account Code Button ..................................................................................................................... 90
Add-on Module (DADM)............................................................................................................... 90
Alert Signal Button......................................................................................................................... 90
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)....................................................................................................... 90
Automatic Callback (ACB) ............................................................................................................ 90
Automatic Hold .............................................................................................................................. 90
Automatic Line Selection ............................................................................................................... 91
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control ........................................................................... 91
Busy Override................................................................................................................................. 91
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing.................................................................................. 91
Call Forwarding.............................................................................................................................. 91
Call Park Orbits .............................................................................................................................. 92
Call Pickup ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Call Pickup Groups......................................................................................................................... 93
Call Transfer with Camp-on ........................................................................................................... 93
Call Transfer Immediate................................................................................................................. 93
Call Transfer Music or Ringing Option..........................................................................................94
Call Transfer Recall........................................................................................................................ 94
Centrex/PBX Features .................................................................................................................... 94
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 94
Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone.................................................................. 94
Data Call Button ............................................................................................................................. 94
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons.......................................................................................... 94
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Features .......................................................................... 94
Directory Number [DN] Buttons.................................................................................................... 95
DISA Security Code Revision........................................................................................................ 95
Strata DK General Description
5/99
v
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Distinctive LED Color and Flash Indications................................................................................. 95
Distinctive Station Ringing ............................................................................................................ 95
Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................................................................................................... 95
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.................................................................................................... 95
DP/DTMF Mode Change ............................................................................................................... 95
Exclusive Hold ............................................................................................................................... 95
Executive Override ......................................................................................................................... 96
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ................................................................................................. 96
Flash Button.................................................................................................................................... 96
Handsfree Answerback................................................................................................................... 96
Hearing Aid Compatible................................................................................................................. 96
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Features ......................................................................................... 96
Microphone Cut-off Button ............................................................................................................ 96
Modem Button................................................................................................................................ 96
Modular Handset and Line Cords................................................................................................... 96
Modular Headset............................................................................................................................. 97
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) .................................................................................................... 97
On-hook Dialing ............................................................................................................................. 97
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI) ........................................................................................ 98
Pooled Line Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 98
Private CO Lines ............................................................................................................................ 98
Push-button Dialing........................................................................................................................ 98
Release Button................................................................................................................................ 98
Release/Answer Button .................................................................................................................. 98
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls..........................................................................................98
Repeat Last Number Dialed ........................................................................................................... 98
Ringing Line Preference................................................................................................................. 98
Saved Number Redial..................................................................................................................... 98
Speed Dial Buttons ......................................................................................................................... 99
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) Compatibility ......................................... 99
Timed Reminders ........................................................................................................................... 99
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision ....................................................................................... 99
User Programmable Feature Buttons..............................................................................................99
PC Attendant Console Features .......................................................................................................... 102
Answer Button.............................................................................................................................. 102
Answer Priority............................................................................................................................. 102
Answer Prompting........................................................................................................................ 102
Attendant Conference Setup......................................................................................................... 102
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching................................................................................................. 102
Auto Dialing ................................................................................................................................. 102
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display .................................................................................................. 102
Call Waiting Count....................................................................................................................... 103
Color CRT Display....................................................................................................................... 103
Dial “O” For Attendant................................................................................................................. 103
Dial Outside Number For Station User ........................................................................................ 103
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ..................................................................................................... 103
Directory Display and Dialing...................................................................................................... 103
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad ................................................................................................... 103
Emergency Calls........................................................................................................................... 103
Emergency Page ........................................................................................................................... 103
vi
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Feature On-Line Help................................................................................................................... 104
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ............................................................................................... 104
Flexible Programmable Buttons ................................................................................................... 104
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................................ 104
Hold Button .................................................................................................................................. 104
Hold Timer Display ...................................................................................................................... 104
Incoming Call Identification......................................................................................................... 104
Incoming Call Statistics................................................................................................................ 104
Interposition Call Transfer............................................................................................................ 105
Join Button.................................................................................................................................... 105
Keyboard or Mouse Operation ..................................................................................................... 105
Load Sharing................................................................................................................................. 105
Loop Hold Display ....................................................................................................................... 105
Message Center............................................................................................................................. 105
Multi-tasking ................................................................................................................................ 105
Name or Number Dialing ............................................................................................................. 106
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 106
Override ........................................................................................................................................ 106
Position Busy Mode...................................................................................................................... 106
Release Button.............................................................................................................................. 106
Speed Dial Calling........................................................................................................................ 106
Split/Switch Button....................................................................................................................... 107
Three-way Calling ........................................................................................................................ 107
Through Dialing ........................................................................................................................... 107
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail ...................................................................................................... 107
Trunk Group Busy Indication....................................................................................................... 107
Trunk Group Control .................................................................................................................... 107
Volume Control ............................................................................................................................ 107
Windows PC Operation ................................................................................................................ 107
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 109
Network Requirements........................................................................................................................ 110
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces.................................................................................... 111
Station Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 112
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 117
Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
Strata DK General Description
5/99
vii
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
viii
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Introduction
This General Description provides an overview of the Strata DK telephone systems, associated
hardware, system and station features. These systems include:
♦
Strata DK14
♦
Strata DK40i
♦
Strata DK424
Organization
This document is divided into the following major topics:
♦
Chapter 1 – Strata DK14 presents the Strata DK14 system overall and covers the basics of:
capacities, system expansion and configuration, power requirements, technology, and
maintenance.
♦
Chapter 2 – Strata DK40i presents the Strata DK40i system overall and covers the basics of
capacities, system expansion and configuration, power requirements, technology, and
maintenance.
♦
Chapter 3 – Strata DK424 presents the Strata DK424 system overall and covers the basics of
capacities, system expansion and configuration, technology, power requirements,
maintenance, and programming.
♦
Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCBs provides information about Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
that can be installed in the universal slots of the Strata DK systems.
♦
Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals describes the most recent Toshiba-proprietary stations
and peripherals, customer-supplied peripherals, as well as cabling and connectors. Includes
information on system tones and data interface specifications.
♦
Chapter 6 – Features describes the features which are available system-wide, as well as
station features and shows the types of stations on which they are available. This chapter also
describes the Strata DK PC Attendant Console features.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
ix
Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Note
Important!
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to
specific items.
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
[DN]
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or
intercom number.
[PDN]
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for
the telephone).
[SDN]
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on
another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
[]
Brackets indicate a variable button. Example: [DN] represents the actual
Directory Number, such as [301].
$ULDO#%ROG
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces
between them show a simultaneous entry.
+
Example: Delete+Enter.
Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.
Example: & + 8.
Tilde (~)
See Figure 10
Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic
version of this document (Strata DK Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Related Documents/Media
The following documents and CD-ROMS can be used to reference further information about the
Strata DK systems.
x
♦
Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshibaproprietary digital telephones, including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It also
includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console.
♦
Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used
digital telephone features.
♦
Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
Toshiba-proprietary digital single line telephones.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
♦
Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshibaproprietary electronic telephones, including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata
DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console.
♦
Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequentlyused electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system.
♦
Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial
and push-button standard telephones.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to Strata DK telephone system Strata DK telephone system and many nonToshiba systems.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features.
♦
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system.
♦
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features.
♦
System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage the
system. Contains instructions for Station Relocation, System Speed Dial, and other features
only activated by the System Administrator.
♦
PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand-alone
data interface units in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also covers
connection to a PC with a Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI).
♦
Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless
digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone.
♦
PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal
Computer Digital Key Telephone system.
♦
Strata DK Feature Description Manual describes each feature associated with the Strata
DK424, DK40i and DK14. Also provides descriptions of compatible Toshiba-proprietary
telephones and peripherals.
♦
Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing
package which allows you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK 2000series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60-button
digital DSS consoles.
♦
Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the system
and system record sheets, including ACD.
♦
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes T1/DS-1
interface installation and configuration instructions, as well as fault finding flowcharts to
troubleshoot the systems. An ACD Section provides instructions for installing ACD into the
Strata DK424.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step
hardware and software installation instructions. It includes examples of system configurations,
information on performing a site survey, and troubleshooting techniques.
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an
overall view of the system’s hardware, software, applications and features. The HMIS is a PC-
Strata DK General Description
5/99
xi
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
based solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized
hotel/motels and includes both the PC and software.
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s
many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them.
♦
Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications
for Strata DK14, DK40 and DK424 digital business telephone systems. It also includes Strata
DK424 ACD Documentation, including the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General
Description, ACD Agent Guide, ACD Supervisor’s Guide. ACD Installation and Programming
instructions are included in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual and
Programming Manual.
♦
Strata DK HMIS CD-ROM contains a copy of all HMIS documentation/bulletins and
enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications.
♦
StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software, that enables viewing,
downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC. This software also
provides a method of creating custom lists and user guides based on information from the
Strata DK system.The CD-ROM contains the StrataControl User Guide.
♦
DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote application and the DKQuote User Guide, that
shows how to use this interactive software to assist you with Strata DK Systems configuration
and pricing worksheets.
♦
DKAdmin/DKBackup CD-ROM includes the programs that let you custom program and/or
update the Strata DK14/DK40/DK424 with a user-friendly PC display. The CD-ROM also
contains the DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide, that explains how to use the DKAdmin/
DKBackup interactive software applications. The current version does not support DK40i.
The following documentation and media applies to the Strata DK424 system only.
xii
♦
Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview,
including hardware and feature information. Highlights the technology employed in operating
the ACD Strata DK424 system.
♦
ACD Agent Guide provides step-by-step procedures for using ACD agent features.
♦
ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features.
♦
Insight DK CD-ROM which includes training, all Insight DK documentation, Insight DK
software and the upgrade to Insight DK Plus, and Demo software.
♦
Insight DK Installation Guide explains how to set up the network, install the server software,
install clients and explains how the data files are organized.
♦
Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus MIS for the Supervisor of a call center. Instructions for creating and using
Real Time Displays, Reports, Alarms, and Wallboards are also included.
♦
Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and
customizing the on-screen wallboard and displays of the real time call center data.
♦
PC Attendant Console User Guide explains how to operate the PC Attendant Console.
♦
PC Attendant Console Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequentlyused PC Attendant Console features.
♦
Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer
application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status data.
♦
Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions
on using the Software MIS application.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
1
Strata DK14
This chapter provides an overview of the Strata DK14 System and its capacities.
The Strata DK14 Base Key Service Unit (KSU) is a
compact system that provides many of the features offered
by much larger systems. The Strata DK14 KSU is designed
for convenient wall-mounting and occupies very little space
(see Figure 1 and Table 1).
AC
DC
At maximum configuration, the Strata DK14 provides up to
10 station ports, that can be used for up to 8 digital
telephones (including the cordless telephone), up to four
Central Office (CO) lines can be accommodated, and two
standard telephone devices.
The Strata DK14 can be upgraded with these optional
peripherals:
♦
Music-on-hold (MOH) source
♦
Background Music (BGM) source
♦
Night bell
♦
Amplifier/speaker for external page
2186
Figure 1
Base Key Service Unit
(KSU)
Also, any two of the following optional RS-232 interfaces
can be added as needed:
Table 1
♦
Caller ID (CLID)
♦
Station Message Detail Reporting (SMDR)
♦
Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Voice Mail
♦
DKAdmin (TTY) Interface
KSU Specifications
Unit
Key Service Base Unit
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Weight
Height
Width
Depth
5.7 lbs.
(2.59 kg)
16.4 inches
(416 mm)
10.0 inches
(254 mm)
3.0 inches
(76 mm)
1
Strata DK14
KSU Architecture
KSU Architecture
The Strata DK14 KSU contains the main processor, operating software, circuitry and the following
components (see Figure 2).
WARNING
Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.
HPFB6
BATT
1 or 2
HPFB reserve
power units
DC
AC
DC
J4
SIO 2
J3
J20
J2
J21
SIO 1
WSIU1A
6-wire RJ11
Modular Jack
QRCU3A
Component Side
J1
J10
J6
J8
J7
J5
0 PAD 3
J4
J14
STU
SW101
J1
J11
STU
F.G.
CO4
QCDU2A
J1
J9
SW1
J13
J3
STU
0 PAD 3
QSTU2A
190 130
6-wire RJ11
Modular Jacks
CO1
QKYS
SW101
J6-25 Pair
Amphenol Jack
(female) for
Telephone
Tip/Ring and
Relay Contact
J1
J15
QSTS2A
QSTS1A
CO2
F.G.
CO3
PFT, RJ11
Modular
Jack
QCDU2A
J12
J2
STU
System
Frame
Ground
Bar
VR701
J22
2364
MOH
Jack
Figure 2
600
ohm
Page
MOH
Volume
Control
Not
Used
KSU Interior
Digital Telephone/Central Office (CO) Line Circuits
The main PCB (WMAU) has four integrated circuits that can connect to digital corded and/or
cordless telephones, stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DSs), and digital door phone/lock
control units (DDCB). Each of the digital telephones can support a PC Data Interface Unit (RPCIDI) or up to two Add-on Modules (DADMs). It does not support a DDSS console.
Two circuits for loop start CO lines are built into the main PCB. Each line can be programmed for
Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) or dial pulse signaling. It includes a switch to control
potential excess volume from a nearby private branch exchange (PBX) or CO. Built-in gas tubes
help protect each circuit from lightning. Each line supports Caller ID when optional equipment is
added.
2
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK14
Optional Printed Circuit Boards
Optional Printed Circuit Boards
Central Office Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (QCDU2)
The QCDU2 provides one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits. It interfaces
with digital corded and/or cordless telephones, RPCI-DIs, ADMs connected to the corded
telephones and PDIU-DSs, and door phones. The DK14 supports up to six door phones. It does not
support a DDSS console. Up to two QCDU2 PCBs can be added to the DK14. Each line supports
Caller ID when optional equipment is added.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (QSTU2)
The QSTU2 provides two standard telephone circuits for two-wire devices such as standard
telephones, Auto Attendant devices, alternate BGM source connection, voice mail machines, and
facsimile machines.
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (QRCU3)
The QRCU3 enables the Strata DK14 to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones
generated by a standard telephone or any other device connected to a QSTU3 standard telephone
circuit. It is also required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls and built-in Auto
Attendant. The QRCU3 enables busy tone detection for Automatic Busy Redial.
Auto Attendant Feature Key (QKYS1)
The QKYS1 plugs into the QRCU3 option PCB to support built-in Auto Attendant.
Serial Interface Board (WSIU1)
The WSIU1 provides two serial interface ports for up to two of the following devices:
♦
Caller ID interface box
♦
SMDR Call Accounting device
♦
SMDI Voice Mail Interface
♦
PC with DKAdmin or external modem
Strata DK General Description
5/99
3
Strata DK14
Power Supply
Power Supply
The power supply generates +5VDC and +24VDC for the entire system. Table 2 for a summary of
electrical/environmental characteristics.
Table 2
Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK14 Primary Power
115VAC ± 10VAC
50/60 Hz
DK14 - 46 watts maximum
<0.7 amps. max
Input AC
AC frequency
Power
AC input current
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification
+24VDC (+26.3~-27.8VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
QSTU2
Ring voltage
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
Reserve Power
One or two optional Reserve Power Battery and Chargers (HPFBs) can be connected to the Strata
DK14 power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure. The estimated battery
time for one or two HPFBs is shown below.
DK14 (fully-loaded
system)
Estimated Battery
Time (hours)
One HPFB
0.5~1.0
Two HPFBs
1.0~2.0
Notes
●
Reserve power time varies with system call traffic.
●
AC power must be available when HPFB is first installed.
●
HPFB recharge time is 48 hours per HPFB.
Power Failure Interface
The Strata DK14 KSU provides an interface for a dedicated backup standard telephone during an
AC input power failure. If the system AC input power fails, the backup telephone will
automatically connect to the CO1 line. This feature is independent of the HPFB.
4
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK14
Maximum Line/Station Configurations
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
Customers can connect their own MOH source to this interface. The source can also feed external
page speakers and telephone speakers with Background Music (BGM).
Paging Interface
This 600-ohm interface can support a Toshiba External Speaker (HESB) or a customer-supplied
amplifier and speaker for Paging, Night Ringing over Page, and BGM applications.
Flexible Relay Contacts
A relay contact can be programmed to either mute BGM during a page announcement over
external speakers, to operate a device—such as an answering machine or ringing bell—during the
Night Mode, or to provide on-off control for a MOH source.
Maximum Line/Station Configurations
The maximum line and station configurations for DK14 are shown in Table 3.
Table 3
CO Lines and Station Ports
CO Line Ports
Digital Ports
Standard
Telephone Ports1
Basic KSU
2
4
0 or 2
Expanded KSU
3
6
0 or 2
Expanded KSU
4
8
0 or 2
DK14 System
1. Standard telephone ports do not support MW lamps on standard telephones.
Network Requirements
Network requirements of station/line PCBs and interface cards are summarized in Table 37 on
Page 110.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
5
Strata DK14
Functional Block Diagram
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3 shows the Strata DK14 KSU PCBs and the available lines, stations and peripherals. Basic
voltage and cabling information is also included.
115 ± 10VAC (0.7 AMP)
50/60 Hz
DK14 Key Service Unit
AC Input
HPFB
QPSU8A2 Power Supply
Battery
and Charger
(first)
Battery Connector
1
1
600Ω
RCA Jacks
HPFB
AMP
Page
Output
Speaker
1
MOH/BGM Source
Battery
and Charger
(second)
QRCU3A
(optional)
DTMF/ABR
Receivers (3)
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
QKYS1A
Note One or two optional HPFB
reserve power units may be
installed.
(optional)
Auto
Attendant
Feature Key
Digital Telephone
KSU Main Circuit Board
DDCB
(standard)
4 — Digital Telephone CKTS
2 — Loop CO Line CKTS
Power Failure
Telephone 1
MDFB
Door Phones and Lock Control
Relay
Contact
PFT
1
X
Loop Start Lines
• FIC: 02LS2
• REN: 0.3 B
Line 1
RJ11C/
RJ21X
CO1
Line 2
RJ11C
Modular Jack
Night Bell, BGM Mute, or
MOH (Control Relay)
CO2
QCDU2A (first/optional)
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
2 — Digital Telephone CKTS
1 — Loop CO Line CKT
Central Office/
Centrex/PBX
Line 3
CO3, RJ11C
1
Digital Telephone
With RPCI
QCDU2A (second/optional)
2 — Digital Telephone CKTS
1 — Loop CO Line CKT
Line 4
CO4, RJ11C
Stand-alone
Data Interface
DIU
QSTU2A (optional)
Shared
Printer
2 — Standard
Telephone CKTS
Standard Telephone
POWER
Caller ID Interface
1
Box (TC-1041)
RJ14C
1
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
TOSHIBA
1
1
FAX
117 VAC
WSIU (optional)
DK Admin, SMDR, SMDI
or CLID Interface CKT
25-pair Amphenol Connector
1
3-pair Modular Interface
RS-232 Port 1
RS-232 Port 2
SMDR
Printer
TOSHIBA
2419
1. Customer-supplied equipment
Figure 3
6
Functional Block Diagram
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK14
System Technology
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology makes the Strata DK14 circuit designs simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimizes system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. The Strata DK14 System
operating software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and
custom programming is stored on Random Access Memory (RAM). A lithium battery with a life
span of at least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of
8 MHz. In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10
MHz. This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system wide.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
7
Strata DK14
Maintenance and Programming
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system outof-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary LCD telephone or with a
DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
Off-site programming with DKAdmin, which can help cut costs and save time, is available
through a customer-provided modem connected to the maintenance port.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin Release 4.0 software enables customer data (configuration, station, and system
options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can be added
to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but cannot edit
customer databases.
8
Strata DK General Description
5/99
2
Strata DK40i
This chapter provides an overview of the Strata DK40i System and its capacities.
The Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) is a compact system that provides many of the
features offered by much larger systems. The KSU is designed for convenient wall-mounting and
occupies very little space (see Figure 4 and Table 4.)
Station and CO Lines
The DK40i Base KSU comes equipped with eight digital telephone station circuits. One of three
optional PCBs can be added to provide either four loop start or DID lines, or two ISDN BRI S/T
circuits. An optional TCIU2 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) can be added to the Base KSU loop start
line PCB to provide Caller ID interface. An optional KSTU2 PCB can be added to provide four
standard telephone circuits (ports).
Note
An optional Expansion KSU can be added to the DK40i to increase the system capacity to
28 station ports and 12 CO lines (see Figure 5). A maximum of 28 station ports and 12 CO
line interfaces are allowed in the system (Base KSU plus Expansion KSU). Base capacity
is 12 station ports and 4 CO line interfaces.
AC
AC
DC
DC
POWER
POWER
4247
1711
Figure 4
Base Key Service Unit (KSU)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Figure 5
KSU with Expansion Unit
9
Strata DK40i
Peripherals
Table 4
KSU and Expansion Unit Specifications
Unit
Weight
Height
Width
Depth
Key Service Base Unit
8.4 lbs.
(3.8 kg)
18.0 inches
(457 mm)
12.2 inches
(310 mm)
3.4 inches
(86 mm)
18.0 inches
(457 mm)
7.8 inches
(198 mm)
3.4 inches
(86 mm)
Expansion Unit
1 lb. empty
(0.45 kg)
4.3 lbs. full
(2.4 kg)
Peripherals
The DK40i Base KSU can support a number of peripherals, which are not considered as stations or
lines and do not affect the maximum station and line capacities. The DK40i Base KSU comes
standard with built-in interfaces for connecting the following dealer-supplied equipment: an
amplifier and speaker for paging and night ringing, Music-on-Hold (MOH) source, reserve power
batteries, and emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences when using
loop start lines in the base cabinet.
A relay contact is also provided to control one of the following peripherals: MOH source, night
bell, or page amplifier mute control.
An optional KSTU2 PCB provides an alternate background music source interface. The music
plays through Toshiba telephone speakers, as opposed to the external page speakers.
The optional TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports to connect two of three options: a
DKAdmin PC (or external modem for remote maintenance); or VM SMDI; or an SMDR port to
connect a call accounting device or printer. An Expansion Unit RS-232 interface PCB is required
if all three features are needed.
10
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
Base KSU Architecture
1
PN2
2
The Strata DK40i Base KSU contains the main processor, operating software, circuitry and the
following components (see Figure 6).
TPSU16A
DC
DC POWER
1
AC
-
MADE IN
-24 Volt Circuit
Breakers
WARNING
BATT
2
+
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
MODEL
INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ
OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A
V. 1A 1996-05 00001
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Reserve Power
Battery Jack
Hazardous voltage inside!
If servicing required
remove A. C. plug.
Connect Expansion
Unit TB1 TO FG2
IMPORTANT: DKSUE16A is incompatible with this unit
DKSUET16A or DKSUE40A is required for expansion
FG2
Important Notice
Expansion KSU
Cable Receptacle
OFF
ON
TMAU2A
Battery Jumper
Base Telephone
Tip/Ring and
Relay Contact
Music-on-Hold
Input
4238
Music-on-Hold
Sensitivity Adjustment
Figure 6
Base KSU Interior
Digital Telephone Circuits
The main circuit board (TMAU2) in the Strata DK40i Base KSU has eight integrated circuits that
can connect to Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones (including the cordless telephone), Standalone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DSs), Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Units (DDCB), and
Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS).
Furthermore, each of the digital telephones can support a PC Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) or up
to two Add-on Modules (DADMs).
Central Office (CO) Line Circuits (TCOU/TDDU/TBSU)
A TCOU PCB can be installed in the Base KSU to provide four circuits for loop start CO lines. Or,
a TDDU PCB can be installed to provide four circuits for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines. Or,
the TBSU can be installed to provide two circuits for BRI lines or stations (see TBSU below).
The CO line interface and DID interface unit can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling
and each line has a switch to control potential excess volume that could be created by a nearby
PBX or CO. Built-in gas tubes help protect each TDDU and TCOU line from lightning. An
optional RDDU (for DID lines) installed in the Expansion Unit requires an external secondary
protector. DID lines require the optional K5RCU2 tone receiver.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
11
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
ISDN BRI S/T Circuits (TBSU)
The TBSU PCB provides two Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for DK40i. The TBSU can only
be installed in the DK40i Base KSU.
The TBSU contains two circuits, each of which reduces the system capacity by two station ports or
two CO lines. If the BRI circuit is configured a station circuit, the circuit assumes two station
ports. If the BRI circuit is configured as a line circuit, the circuit assumes two CO lines. BRI lines
can be used for voice and data calls.
The TBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the PSTN BRI lines using a
dealer-supplied UL-listed Network Terminator unit (NT1). In Canada, the NT-1 must be CSA
certified. On the station side, they can connect to S-type ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or
Terminal Adapters (TA).
Caller ID (TCIU2)
An optional Caller ID PCB (TCIU2) can be added to the four-circuit loop start CO line PCB
(TCOU) to provide four Caller ID circuits. Local telephone companies do not provide Caller ID on
DID lines; so the TCIU2 PCB cannot be added to the four-circuit DID PCB (TDDU). Caller ID
can also be added with the RCIU2 and KCDU2. See “Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)” on Page
41 and “Caller ID” on Page 65 for more information.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (KSTU2)
The optional KSTU2 provides four circuits that can interface with DTMF for rotary dial standard
telephones and other single-line devices, including: Strata AirLink Wireless Base Station Interface
Adapters (BSIAs) and handsets, fax/modems (14.4 bps max.), Voice Mail and Auto Attendant
devices, off-premises stations, alternate BGM source and dictation equipment. These devices may
require that the optional tone receiver (K5RCU or K5RCU2) be installed in the DK40i Base KSU
to interpret the DTMF signals the above devices may transmit.
The KSTU2 does not support message waiting lamps on standard telephones. The RSTU2 must be
installed in the Expansion Unit to support message waiting lamps.
DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver (K5RCU and K5RCU2)
Station users in systems that have the optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 installed can access Automatic
Busy Redial (ABR) and communicate with devices, such as standard telephones or voice mail
machines that require DTMF signaling.
This unit is also required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and built-in or external Auto
Attendant operation, as well as for DID and Tie lines. Each K5RCU or K5RCU2 PCB contains
five shared receivers.
Auto Attendant Feature Key (KKYS)
The system can be upgraded with an optional built-in Auto Attendant (AA). The KKYS installs
onto the K5RCU PCB in the Base KSU.
SMDR, SMDI, and Maintenance DKAdmin/Modem (TTY) Interface (TSIU)
The TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports (modular jacks) that allow the DK40i system
to connect to an SMDR Call Accounting device, a DKAdmin PC or external modem for system
maintenance/administration, or an SMDI interface for Voice Mail. It does not have a built-in
modem capability.
12
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
Only one TSIU can be installed per DK40i system. When the TSIU PCB is installed, the PIOU can
still be installed for zone paging, control relays, and an SMDR RS-232 interface, built-in (IMDU)
maintenance modem, or an SMDI or maintenance interface.
Power Supply
The power supply generates +5VDC and -24VDC for the entire system, even in its expanded
configuration. (See Table 5 for a summary of electrical/environmental characteristics.)
Table 5
Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK40i Primary Power
115VAC ± 10VAC
50/60 Hz
75 watts maximum
1.8A maximum
Input AC
AC frequency
Power
AC input current
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification
-24VDC (-25.94~-28.66VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion KSU only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5
±0.5VDC
KSTU2
Ring voltage
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring voltage
80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability
one ringer per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 (only) Message Waiting voltage
-90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU2 or RDSU modem interface data rate
14,400 bps maximum
The power supply provides a built-in charger for the batteries (see Table 6). Two customersupplied 12-volt batteries can be connected to the power supply to maintain fully functioning
operation during a power failure.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
13
Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU Architecture
Table 6
Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates
Description
Approximate (-24V) current drain (DC amps.)
Estimated battery operation time (in hours)
DK40i Base KSU
DK40i Expansion KSU
No KSTU2
KSTU2
1 PCB
2 PCBs
3 PCBs
4 PCBs
1.0
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
2.8
75.0
58.0
41.0
31.0
25.0
20.0
Reserve power time estimates assume the following:
• Batteries are fully charged at start of operation and two batteries are connected in a series (12 VDC, rated 80 amp/hours each).
• Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and
manufacturer. These figures should be used as an estimate.
• AC power must be available when first installing reserve power batteries.
Power Failure Interface
The Base KSU provides an interface for a dedicated backup standard telephone during an AC
input power failure. If the system AC input power fails, the backup telephone automatically
connects to the CO1 line. The backup telephone is disabled when the system operates during
normal power conditions.
This feature is independent of Battery Backup and is available when loop start lines are installed in
the Base KSU. A power failure telephone cannot be installed for DID lines.
Music-on-Hold Interface
Customers can connect their own MOH source to this interface. The source can also feed external
page speakers and telephone speakers with BGM.
♦
Paging Interface – This 600-ohm interface supports a Toshiba External Speaker (HESB) or a
customer-supplied amplifier and speaker for Paging, Night Ringing over Page, and BGM.
♦
Flexible Relay Contacts – A relay contact can be programmed to either mute BGM during a
page announcement over external speakers, to operate a device: i.e., an answering machine or
ringing bell during the Night Mode, or to provide on-off control for a MOH source.
Expansion KSU Architecture
Strata DK40i
Base KSU
The optional Expansion KSU, which attaches
easily to the side of the Base KSU, offers four
universal slots that can host a variety of line and
telephone PCBs (see Figure 7). See Chapter 4 –
Universal Slot PCBs for descriptions of PCBs.
Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU
Expansion
PCB Slots
Side
Cover
Expansion Cover
4243
Figure 7
14
Expansion KSU Interior
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK40i
Typical Line Configurations
Typical Line Configurations
This section shows the maximum basic and CO configurations that are possible with the DK40i.
There is a variety of configuration combinations of digital and standard telephones with CO lines,
including loop start, ground start, Tie, and DID lines. Any loop or ground start CO line can be
equipped with Caller ID.
DK40i Line and Station Capacity
The following table shows maximum capacity for a DK40i system (see Table 7). See the Strata
DK Installation and Maintenance Manual, Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for details.
Table 7
Maximum CO Lines/Ports and BRI Line and Station Circuits
Maximum
Allowed
Hardware
CO Lines
12
Station Ports
28
BRI Line Circuits
6
BRI Station Circuits
10
Attaining maximum system capacities depends on power consumption of a particular
configuration. Power factor calculations in accordance with the Strata DK I&M Manual will
determine if the maximum capacities in these tables can be reached.
Stations can be a combination of ISDN TE-1 and TA S-type devices and digital, electronic or
standard telephones. CO line combinations include ground or loop start, DID, Tie or ISDN BRI.
Each BRI line circuit uses up two CO lines at system capacity. All other line circuits use up one
CO line of system capacity.
Each BRI station circuit uses up to two station ports of system capacity. All other station circuits
use up one station port of system capacity.
Table 8
Typical Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits
BRI Station
B channels
Other Station
Circuits
BRI Line
Circuits
BRI Line
B channels
Other Line
Circuits
10
20
8
6
12
0
8
16
12
4
8
4
6
12
16
4
8
4
4
8
20
6
12
0
4
8
20
4
8
4
2
4
24
2
4
8
0
0
28
0
0
12
Network Requirements
See Table 37 on Page 110 for network requirements of station and line PCBs and interface cards.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
15
Strata DK40i
Functional Block Diagram
Functional Block Diagram
See Figure 8 shows the Strata DK40i Base and Expansion KSU PCBs and the available lines,
stations and peripherals. Basic voltage and cabling information is also included.
DK40i Base Key
Service Unit
Speaker
Amp
RCA Jacks
TBSU
S
MOH/BGM Source
TA or TE-1 BRI (S/T)
SMDI or DKAdmin PC
TSIU
SMDI or SMDR Call
Accounting Device
TPSU16A
Charger
AC
INPUT
115 ± 10VAC (15 AMP)
50/60 Hz
_
_
12 Volt
Battery
+
_
12 Volt
Battery
+
PBTC
Cable
Auto
Attendant
Key
KKYS1 (AA)
Optional Customer-supplied Batteries
Power Failure
Telephone (PFT)
BATT
DID or CO1
MDFB
Door Phones
and Lock Control
DID or CO3
TCOU
or
TDDU
DID or CO4
NT1
NT1
T
T
Night Bell, BGM Mute
or MOH (Control Relay)
E911
TCIU2
BRI U
DDCB
Modular Connectors
DID or CO2
BRI U
Digital Telephone and DSS Console
Optional
DTMF/ABR
RCVRS (5)
K5RCU
TCOU Line Only
Loop Start, DID, Tie
or ISDN BRI Lines
(see Note below)
+
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
TMAU2
Common
Control
and
Digital
TelePhone
Ckts (8)
Interface
Optional
Standard
Telephone
Ckts (4)
KSTU2
Base Station 1 Handsets
Strata AirLink Base Station
Interface Adapter (BSIA)
Base Station 2
Alternated BGM Source
25-Pair
Amphenol
Connector
DK40 Expansion Key
Service Unit
RCOU (4)
Tie, DID, and
CO Lines
Station PCBs
Digital Telephone with
Integrated Data Interface
Digital
RCOS (4)
RDDU (4)
PDKU2 (8)
REMU (4)
RGLU (4)
Electronic
RCIU2 (4)
PEKU (8)
Stand-alone
Data Interface
6 max.
BRI U
NT1
T
RCIS (4)
KCDU2 (2/4)
RBSU (2 BRI)
Printer
DIU
POWER
Central Office/
Centrex/PBX
AA Digital
Announcer
Voice Mail
or
TBSU
Line PCBs
Interface Box
Standard Telephone
READY
CONNECT
Electronic Telephone
Electronic/
Standard
MDFB
DDCB
PESU (4/2)
Door Phones And Lock Control
DKAdmin PC (TTY Port)
Door Lock or BGM
Mute Control Relay
Night Bell or MOH
(Control Relays)
Peripheral
Interface
PCB
RSSU
TTY
Port only
Alarm Relay Sensor
PIOUS
or PIOU
SMDR Printer (SMDR Port)
IMDU
(Modem)
Standard
Telephone
Standard Telephone
PSTU or
RSTU2 (8)
Fax
Digital/
Standard
Modem
Personal Computer
RDSU
(4/2+2)
25-pair Amphenol Connector
Page Zone 1
•
•
•
Page Zone 4
PIOU Page Zone
Relay Control
Note
External Protectors (not shown) must be used
with each RDDU DID or Tie line. TDDU DID
lines have built-in protectors.
Figure 8
16
Stratagy
DK
Digital/
Standard
Digital
Wireless
Telephone
Strata AirLink Wireless
Base Stations (4)
RWIU (16)
Handsets
RBSU/
RBSS
RJ45 Modular S
TA or TE-1 BRI (S/T)
4227
Functional Block Diagram
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK40i
System Technology
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology enables the Strata DK40i circuit designs to be simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimize system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. Strata DK40i system
operating software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and
custom programming is stored on Random Access Memory (RAM). A lithium battery with a life
span of at least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of 8 MHz.
In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10 MHz.
This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system-wide.
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system outof-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) telephone or with a DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
Off-site programming with DKAdmin, which can help cut costs and save time, is available
through a customer-provided modem connected to the maintenance port. DK40i (only) provides
an optional built-in modem for remote administration and maintenance.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin software Release 4.0 enables DK40i customer data (configuration, station, and
system options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can
be added to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but cannot edit
customer databases.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
17
Strata DK40i
Strata AirLink Wireless System
Strata AirLink Wireless System
The Strata AirLink™ Wireless Telephone system that is configured to standard ports of the Strata
DK and many non-Toshiba telephone systems has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to quickly diagnose error messages, alarms, and traffic conditions by viewing a PC
monitor before troubleshooting the hardware.
The Status Window, displayed by the Strata AirLink Manager software, is an active window in
which viewing reports, querying the software, and rebooting the Base Station Interface Adapter
(BSIA) is possible. Some of the available reports are:
♦
Base Station channels status
♦
Line status
♦
Call status
♦
Critical alarms
The software also creates log files and sends error messages to the PC monitor to assist the
technician in making corrections. The log files are easily opened in any text editor for viewing and
have information about the BSIA boot software, Base Station upgrades, software queries, errors,
and alarms.
RWIU Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to Strata DK telephone systems
using its own proprietary RWIU PCB also has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to:
♦
Set system IDs and enter handset IDs
♦
Set the time and date, and change passwords
♦
Enable UTAM
♦
Change communication ports
♦
Check the software version of the RWIU and Base Stations
♦
View log messages
♦
Reset and upgrade Base Stations and the RWIU
♦
Change Base Station numbers
LEDs and BER Testing
There are several LEDs on each Base Station, BSIA, and the RWIU that indicate normal, boot up,
and alarm conditions. Signal fading and attenuation can be checked using the resident Bit Error
Rate (BER) test in each handset for additional troubleshooting and maintenance routines.
18
Strata DK General Description
5/99
3
Strata DK424
This chapter presents the Strata DK424, a private
telephone system tailor-made for small- to
medium-sized business applications. It employs
state-of-the-art technology to provide users with
an efficient, easy-to-use, feature-rich telephone
system.
A modular design and a choice of four common
control units enables the system to fit a variety of
customer needs and capacities.
The system line and station capacity can be
increased by adding additional cabinets (see
Figure 9 and Table 9) which have universal slots
capable of interfacing with almost any of the line,
station, and option interface PCBs available with
the system.
Strata DK424 easily connects to outside public
telephone lines (CO lines). All of the telephones
(stations) tied to the system can have direct access
to each other as well as to the public network.
Architecture
1952
Base and Expansion Cabinets
Figure 9
Base/Expansion Cabinets
The Base Cabinet and optional Expansion
Cabinets are the building blocks of the system.
Each system has a Base Cabinet, and can have from one to six Expansion Cabinets. All lines,
stations, and options are tied together through the cabinets.
Table 9
Cabinet Specifications
Cabinet
Weight
Height
Width
Depth
Base Cabinet (DKSUB424)
30.0 pounds
(13.6 kg)
11.8 inches
(300 mm)
23.6 inches
(600 mm)
9.8 inches
(249 mm)
Expansion Cabinet
(DKSUE424)
28.4 pounds
(12.9 kg)
10.0 inches
(254 mm)
23.6 inches
(600 mm)
9.8 inches
(249 mm)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
19
Strata DK424
Architecture
Expansion and Configuration
System station and CO line capacity is increased with the addition of cabinets and CO line and/or
station PCBs. Tables 11~15 show the number of stations and lines allowed when additional
cabinets and PCBs are used.
Base Cabinet
The Base Cabinet reserves two slots specifically for the system common control unit, labeled
“R11” and “RCTU.” The Base Cabinet also has six universal slots, labeled “S11 ~ S16,” which can
accommodate any station, line or option PCB (see Figure 10).
DC OUT
R11
PCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
-24V
1
POWER
2
+5V
3
-5V
DKSUB
DKSUE
+
BATT
ON
OFF
R11
RCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
FG
AC IN
2520
Figure 10
Base Cabinet Interior
Common Control Units
The system operates with one of four common control units (RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D,
or RCTUE/F). These common control units (sometimes called the “RCTU processors”) can only
be installed in the Base Cabinet.
♦
The RCTUA unit consists of a single PCB.
♦
The RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F common control units consist of two PCBs.
The RCTI also has a MOH/BGM source interface, and connectors to mount optional DTMF
receiver PCBs needed for DISA, Tie/DID/Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)/
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) lines, voice mail, AA announcement devices, DTMF
standard telephones, and other peripherals. The RCTU provides an interface for connecting an
optional feature key (RKYS).
The common control unit contains the system's main 16 or 32-bit, 68000-type microprocessor and
microprocessor bus, battery-protected memory circuits, time switch logic, ABR tone detectors,
and system tones. (See Figure 12 on Page 29 for more information.)
Expansion Cabinets
The Expansion Cabinets have eight universal slots, “S_1” ~ “S_8.” Each of the universal slots can
interface with station, line, or option PCBs. Slots “S_1” ~ “S_6” are available with the RCTUA,
RCTUBA/BB, or RCTUC/D. Slots “S_7” and “S_8” are only available with the RCTUE/F
processor. See Figure 11 for slot numbers. The number of expansion cabinets varies according to
processor capacity (see Tables 16~19.
20
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Architecture
DC OUT
CABINET NO.
2
3
4
5
6
7
S_1
S_2
S_2
S_3
S_4
S_5
S_6
S_7
S_8
-24V
1
POWER
2
+5V
3
-5V
DKSUB
DKSUE
+
BATT
ON
OFF
S_1
S_2
S_3
S_4
S_5
S_6
S_7
S_8
FG
AC IN
2521
Figure 11
Expansion Cabinet Interior
Cabinet PCB Subassemblies
Subassemblies can be added within the Strata DK cabinets to provide additional features or to
increase line capacity. Also see “Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies” on Page 40.
DTMF Receiver Subassembly (RRCS)
The RRCS translates DTMF tones from DID/Tie/ANI/DNIS/DISA lines, built-in AA, DTMF
standard telephones, and other peripheral devices to data signals for the system.
The RRCS can be attached to the common control unit and is available with either 4, 8, or 12
(RRCS-4, -8 or -12) shared receiver circuits. See Table 32 on Page 88 for more information.
RKYS Feature Key Upgrades
The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Software
Management Information System (SMIS) for ACD, and for Insight DK with the following feature
keys that attach to the common control unit. See Table 10 for a list of features provided by RKYS
feature keys.
Table 10
RKYS Features
Feature(s) Provided
Built-in Auto Attendant
RKYS1 RKYS2 RKYS3
X
ACD
ACD with MIS data information
Common Control Unit
X
X
Applies to all RCTUs
X
X
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
X
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
PCBs are installed in the cabinets to provide interface for stations, lines, and peripherals. Each
PCB measures 7.5 x 5.5 inches (190 x 140 mm) and mounts in the slot with a 44-pin backplane
connector. PCB external connections to station equipment are made to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) using industry-standard connectors. For more details, see Chapter 5 – Stations and
Peripherals.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
21
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
A summary of the maximum number of lines and stations by processor is shown in Tables 11~19.
Attaining maximum system capacities depends on power consumption of a particular
configuration. Power factor calculations in accordance with the Strata DK I&M Manual will
determine if the maximum capacities in these tables can be reached.
Configurations for a fully expanded system can range from 84 lines/336 stations to a squared
system of 200 outside lines/224 stations.
See Table 11 for the station and line capacities for eight-port RCOU/RCOS CO line PCBs, with
one slot reserved for an optional interface PCB. There is a trade-off between stations and lines.
Every group of eight stations installed decreases the CO line capacity of the system by eight, and
vice versa.
The following table assumes one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB.
Table 11
Configuration for Eight-Circuit CO Line PCBs (RCOU/RCOS) Without Caller ID
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
22
CO
Lines
Stations
16
24
2 Cabinets
RCTUB or
RCTUBA/BB
CO
Lines
Stations
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
40
40
48
48
56
56
64
64
72
72
80
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
64
64
72
72
80
80
88
88
96
96
104
104
112
112
4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
88
88
96
96
104
104
112
112
120
120
128
128
136
136
144
144
152
152
160
5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
120
116
112
108
104
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
112
112
120
120
128
128
136
136
144
144
152
152
160
160
168
168
176
176
184
184
192
192
200
CO
Lines
Stations
144
140
136
132
128
124
120
116
112
108
104
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
136
136
144
144
152
152
160
160
168
168
176
176
184
184
192
192
200
200
208
208
216
216
224
224
232
232
240
7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
CO
Lines
Stations
200
196
192
188
184
180
176
172
168
164
160
156
152
148
144
140
136
132
128
124
120
116
112
108
104
100
96
92
88
84
224
224
232
232
240
240
248
248
256
256
264
264
272
272
280
280
288
288
296
296
304
304
312
312
320
320
328
328
336
336
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Tables 12~15 assume one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB.
Table 12
Configuration for Four Circuit DID or Tie Line PCBs
2 Cabinets
RCTUB or
RCTUBA/BB
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
CO
Lines
Stations
8
4
24
32
Table 13
CO
Lines
Stations
24
20
16
12
8
4
40
48
56
65
72
80
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
36
32
28
24
20
16
12
10
64
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
48
44
40
36
30
28
24
20
16
12
88
96
104
112
120
128
136
144
152
160
5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
112
120
128
136
144
152
160
168
176
184
192
200
6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
CO
Lines
Stations
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
48
36
32
28
24
20
136
144
152
160
168
176
184
192
200
208
216
224
232
240
7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
CO
Lines
Stations
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
224
232
240
248
256
264
272
280
288
296
304
312
320
328
336
Eight Circuit (RCOU/RCOS) CO Loop Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Capacities
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
8
24
24
16
8
40
56
72
40
32
24
16
56
72
88
104
56
48
40
32
24
72
88
104
120
136
72
64
56
48
40
32
88
104
120
136
152
168
88
80
72
64
56
48
40
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
136
128
120
112
104
96
88
80
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
264
Strata DK General Description
5/99
23
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Table 14
Four Circuit (RGLU) CO Ground Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Combined Capacities
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
8
16
20
16
8
24
40
64
32
28
24
16
12
40
48
64
88
96
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
48
64
72
88
96
112
120
136
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
64
72
88
96
112
120
136
144
160
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
72
88
96
112
120
136
144
160
168
184
192
104
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
112
120
136
144
160
168
184
192
208
216
232
240
256
Table 15
Digital, Tie, DID, Ground/Loop Start Digital T1 and ISDN PRI Lines Maximum Combined Capacities
2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D
7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
48
40
24
16
56
64
72
80
72
64
48
40
24
16
88
96
104
112
120
128
112
96
88
72
64
48
40
24
16
112
120
128
136
144
152
160
168
176
120
112
96
88
72
64
48
40
24
152
160
168
176
184
192
200
208
216
144
120
112
96
88
72
64
48
—
144
168
176
192
200
216
224
240
—
1921
184
168
160
144
136
120
112
96
240
248
264
272
288
296
312
320
336
Notes
●
●
T1 lines can be in increments of 8, 16 and/or 24.
PRI channels can be in increments of 23B+1D or 47B + 1D. Each B channel represents a PRI CO line
1. The maximum number of PRI lines for 2 cabinets is 47, 3~6 cabinets is 141 and 7 cabinets is 188.
24
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Tables 16~19 show system maximum capacity examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U) circuits.
Table 16
Table 17
RCTUA Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits1
BRI Station
B channels1
Other Station
Circuits3
BRI Line
Circuits4
BRI Line
B channels4
Other Line
Circuits5
82
162
16
0
0
0
6
12
16
2
4
0
5
10
16
3
6
0
4
8
16
42
82
0
4
8
16
2
4
4
3
6
16
1
2
8
2
4
24
2
4
8
1
2
28
1
2
12
RCTUBA/BB Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits1
BRI Station
B channels1
Other
Station
Circuits3
BRI Line
Circuits4
BRI Line
B channels4
Other Line
Circuits5
162
322
32
82
162
0
12
24
40
8
16
8
10
20
40
8
16
12
8
16
48
8
16
16
8
16
48
6
12
20
8
16
56
4
8
24
8
16
56
2
4
28
6
12
56
6
12
24
6
12
56
4
8
28
6
12
64
2
4
32
4
8
64
4
8
32
4
8
64
2
4
32
2
4
72
2
4
40
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the
system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to two
TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit.).
Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity.
3. Other stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard
telephones and devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/
RBUS PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI
line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO lines (B channels) for incoming/outgoing calls.
5. Other lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
25
Strata DK424
Power Requirements
Table 18
Table 19
RCTUC/D Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits1
BRI Station
B channels1
Other Station
Circuits3
BRI Line
Circuits4
BRI Line
B channels4
Other
Line Circuits5
402
802
144
82
162
48
30
60
164
8
16
68
20
40
184
8
16
88
16
32
192
8
16
96
12
24
200
8
16
104
8
16
208
8
16
112
8
16
216
4
8
120
8
16
216
2
4
124
4
8
228
2
4
132
RCTUE/F Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits1
BRI Station
B channels1
Other Station
Circuits3
BRI Line
Circuits4
BRI Line
B channels4
Other Line
Circuits5
642
1282
192
82
162
56
50
100
216
8
16
84
40
80
240
8
16
104
30
60
256
8
16
124
20
40
280
8
16
144
16
32
288
8
16
152
8
16
304
8
16
168
8
16
312
4
8
176
8
16
312
2
4
180
4
8
320
4
8
184
4
8
320
2
4
188
2
4
328
2
4
192
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system
capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to two TE-1 and TA
devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit.). Each BRI-U circuit
supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity
3. Conventional stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard
telephones and devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS
PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T
or U) provides two BRI CO lines (channels) for incoming/outgoing calls
5. Conventional lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
Power Requirements
Each Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that generates ±5VDC and -24VDC
which furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the
cabinet. A fully loaded Strata DK424 requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC
(105VAC ~ 125VAC), 17.5 amps., 50/60 Hz. (see Table 20).
26
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Power Requirements
Table 20
DK424 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK424 Primary Power
Input AC
AC amps for seven-cabinet system
AC frequency
Watts per cabinet (continuous)
Watts for six cabinet system (continuous)
115VAC ± 10VAC
20 amp circuit
50/60 Hz
180
845
DK424 Maximum Peak AC Input Current
1 cabinet – 2.5 amps
2 cabinets –5.0 amps
3 cabinets – 7.5 amps
4 cabinets – 10.0 amps
5 cabinets – 11.5 amps
6 cabinets – 15.0 amps
7 cabinets – 17.5 amps
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification
-24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion Cabinet only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5
±0.5VDC
PESU (Circuits 1 and 2)
Ring voltage
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring voltage
80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability
1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 Message Waiting voltage
-90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU2 or PESU modem interface data rate
14,400 bps maximum
BTU Rating
PDKU (5)
RCOU/RCOS (1)
RCTUB (1)
DKTs (40)
190 BTUs (56 watt hours) per cabinet
Traffic Rating Characteristics
9 CCS per station system-wide
36 CCS per ACD/SMIS station
Note
There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK Call Center
Solutions General Description for details.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
27
Strata DK424
Floor Mount Hardware
Two or four customer-supplied 12-volt reserve batteries can be connected to the system to
maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Table 21). The batteries are kept in a highlycharged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating
normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected, and when normal AC power is available,
batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure.
Table 21
Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates (in hours)
Number of Cabinets
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2 batteries
16.0
8.0
5.0
3.7
3.09
2.5
2.1
4 batteries
32.0
16.0
10.0
7.5
6.0
5.0
4.2
Discharge Current
3.5A
6.7A
9.9A
13.1A
16.3A
19.5A
22.7A
Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting
commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata DK424 system. Table 22 describes which
assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards.
Floor Mount Hardware
The lightweight and compact design enables easy wall or floor mounting. The RFIF hardware kit
is needed for floor mounting (see Table 22). If floor mounting three or more cabinets, AC and
reserve power must be connected to the RCCB conduit connection box option by a licensed
electrician. Wall mounting the system does not require special hardware.
Table 22
Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies
Assembly
28
Function
RBTC1A-2M
Reserve Power Cable – Two cables are required for up to six cabinet systems and three are
required for seven cabinet reserve power installations (for current carrying capacity) when
connecting reserve (battery) power to three or more cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also
required for connecting battery terminals—see “RBDB2” below. A licensed electrician must install
this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code compliance.
PBTC-3M
Reserve Power Cable – Connects cabinet Power Supply to battery terminals. If reserve power is
connected to one or two cabinets (wall or table mount), one cable is required for each cabinet. A
licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code
compliance.
RBDB2
Battery Distribution Box – Distributes reserve power when three or more cabinets require
reserve power (floor or wall mount). Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2
distribution box to connect up to six DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box. An
RC7C1A-1.7M is also required for a seventh cabinet.
RC7C1A-1.7M
Cabinet 7 Cable Kit – Provides long data cable to connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the
DK424 Base Cabinet. Provides a long battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to
the sixth Expansion Cabinet power supply. Data and battery cables used for seven cabinet
installations only.
RFIF
Floor Mount Fixture Kit – Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on
floor; supports up to seven cabinets. Three pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF.
Wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes (not
required for wall-mounted cabinets).
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies (continued)
Table 22
Assembly
Function
Conduit Connection Box – This box is required for AC and battery power connection to three or
more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on a table or any number of
cabinets on a wall.) A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local
electrical code compliance.
RCCB1,
RCCB2
RCCB1 supports up to six floor-mounted cabinets.
RCCB2 supports up to seven floor-mounted cabinets.
RPSB1
Three-outlet AC Power Strip – One RPSB1 required when installing three or four cabinets (wall
or floor mount). Two RPSB1s are required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or floor
mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations.
RPSB2
Three-outlet AC Power Strip – Used with a high current carrying capacity cord for application
where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets.
Toshiba highly recommends using the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to accommodate
further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems.
RWBF
Wall bracket pair – Required for floor mounted seven cabinet systems. Secures the seventh
cabinet to the wall for safety (not required for wall-mounted cabinets – see RFIF).
Functional Block Diagrams
The Functional Block Diagrams shows the PCBs and interface connectors used for connecting the
stations and peripherals (see Figures 12~14).
DKAdmin PC 1
HMIS
Programmable Serial Port
Modular Jacks or Remote Modem
RSIU Serial Interface PCB (1 Port)
RSIS/RMDS
Serial/Modem (2400 bps)
Interface PCBs ( 1~3 Ports)
SMDI
Voice Mail
SMDR 1
Call Accounting
Device or Printer
Amplified Page Output (3 Watts)
RSSU/PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU
Single Serial Port (N/A PEPU)
SMDR Port (N/A RSSU/PEPU)
IMDU
1200 bps Modem
(N/A RSSU)
1
25-pair
or
Terminal Strip
Music Source: External Zone Page 1
RCTU
Main Control PCB
Background Music
Door Lock or BGM Mute Control Relay 1
Night Bell or MOH (Control Relay)
Twisted
Pair
1
CBRUK
ABR Tone
Detector
(Standard)
(68000 or 68020)
External Zone Page Relays (4 Zones) 1
MOH/BGM
Volume
Control
RKYS
Option Key
AA/ACD/MIS
System
Tones
Switch
Conf
Switch
External Page Amplifier (600Ω Output) 1
Music Source: Background Music
and/or Music-on-hold
RPSU
1
Twisted Pair
RAM
PCM
Switch
MOH/BGM
RCA Jack
Alarm Relay Sensor 1
Flash
or
ROM
MicroProcessor
Cabinet
Power Supply
Battery Charger
Data and Speech Highway
Insight DK,
Call Center
Viewer &
ACD/MIS PC 1
RRCS
(Optional)
DTMF
Receiver
(4~24 ckts.)
12V
Battery
12V
Battery
(2 or 4 Batteries)
Main Distribution
Frame (MDF)
1. Customer-supplied equipment.
4248
Figure 12
KSU Processor and Optional Interface PCBs
Strata DK General Description
5/99
29
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
Network Demarcation Point
RCIU2
4 Caller ID Circuits
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
RCIS 4 Caller ID Circuits
RCOU
4 Loop Start Co Lines (Analog)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Central Office
Centrex
PBX
Common Carrier
Other Telephone System
E911 Public Safety Answer
Point (PSAP)
RCOS (Optional PCB on RCOU Only):
4 Loop Start CO Lines (Analog)
RGLU2
4 Loop or Ground Start CO Lines (Analog)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
MDF 1
RDDU
4 DID CO Lines (Analog)
Secondary Protectors
Data and Speech Highway
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
REMU
2
4 E&M Tie Lines (Analog)
(REMU, Four 8-Wire Modular Jacks)
25-pair Amphenol
TOSHIBA NDTU Cable
DB15
RDTU2
• 2T1 / DS1(24 Channels / Lines)
• Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie, DID
• Digital Voice Lines
Channel
Service
2
Unit (CSU)
PLL Synchronization Circuits
RMCU
Trunk Circuits for E911
CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks)
CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks)
Toshiba RPRI-CBL-KIT
Channel
Service
2
Unit (CSU)
4
U
2 Trunk Circuits
RCMS
2 Trunk Circuits
RPTU
ISDN PRI (23B+1D channels)
Digital Voice/Data
RBSU
ISDN BRI (S/T)
2 Circuits (TE)
Voice/Data (2B+D)
8-wire Modular Jacks
2
NT1 per circuit
RCMS
8-wire Modular Jacks
4
T
RBUU
1. RCIU2/RCIS tip/ring cross
connected to RCOU, RCOS, or
RGLU tip/ring at MDF.
2. Customer-supplied equipment.
3. RBUU/RBUS (Release 4.2).
4. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference
model termination points.
Figure 13
30
4
U
8-wire Modular Jacks
4
U
8-wire Modular Jacks
3
ISDN BRI (U)
2 Circuits (NT-1 )
Voice/Data (2B+D)
RBUS 3 ISDN BRI (U)
2 Circuits (NT-1)
Voice/Data (2B+D)
4272
CO Line Side Functional Block Diagram
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
Cordless DKT
Digital Telephone (DKT)
and Add-on Module
PDKU2
8 Digital Telephone Circuits
Digital Telephone
with RPCI-DI
1 Pair Modular Cord
Digital Single Line
Telephone (DKT)
1
TAPI PC
RS-232 Cable
RWIU
DDCB
MDFB
32 Digital Wireless Telephone Circuits
Door Phones and
Lock Controls
Strata AirLink Wireless
Base Stations (4)
RDSU
Digital Telephone
with DSS Console
DIU-DS
4 Digital Telephone Circuits
2 Standa rd Telephone Circuits
RSTS
R48S
(Option PCB)
2 Standard
Telephone
Circuits
(Option PCB,
RDSU/RSTU2
Only) -48 Volt
Loop Supply
Mainframe Computer 1
Handsets
Modem
(Pool)
RS-232 Cables
DIU-DS
Printer (Sharing)1
Data and Speech Highway
RSTU2
8 Standard
Telephone Circuits
DIU-DS
R48S
(Option PCB,
RDSU/RSTU2
Only) -48 Volt
Loop Supply
RS-232 Cables
Modem
8 Electronic
Telephone Circuits
Base Station 2
FAX 1
EOCU
(Option PCB
to Receive
Speaker OCA)
DPFT
Power Failure
Transfer Unit
Power Failure
1
Standard Telephone (8 max.)
Digital Annuncer
for ACD and Auto Attendant
Secondary
Protector
PESU
4 Electronic Telephone Circuits
2 Standard Telephone Circuits
Standard
Telephone
2
1
HESB
Loud
Ringing Bell
EOCU
(Option PCB
to Receive
Speaker OCA)
Off-premises Station
Electronic
Telephone (EKT)
EKT with HDSS Console
(PEKU Only)
RATU
Door Phones and
Lock Controls
25-pair Amphenol Connectors and
Cables (except RBSU/RBSS)
PC Attendant
Console
3
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-NT Circuits)
1
Alternate BGM
source to stations
and Page Output
4 Attendant Console Circuits
RBSU
1
Base Station 1 Handsets
Strata AirLink Base Station
Interface Adapter (BSIA)
1-pair Modular Cords
PEKU
PC
Voice
Mail
RBSS
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-LT Circuits)
4
HDCB
MDFB
PC
4
S
COM Port
R
TA
4
S
4
3
RBUU
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-NT Circuits)
RBUS
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-LT Circuits)
U
ISDN
Telephone
(TE-1, S-Type)
PC with
Video Card
(TE-1, U-Type)
4
U
Modular Jacks
ISDN
Telephone
(TE-1, U-Type)
4250
Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
1. Customer-Supplied equipment
2. RSTU2 is required for standard telephone message waiting lamp.
3. RBUU/RBUS (Release 4.2).
4. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference model termination points.
Figure 14
Station Side Functional Block Diagram
Strata DK General Description
5/99
31
Strata DK424
System Technology
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology enables the Strata DK circuit designs to be simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimize system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. System operating software is
stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and custom programming is
stored on Random Access Memory (RAM) for Strata DK. A lithium battery with a life span of at
least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of 8 MHz.
In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10 MHz.
This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system-wide.
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system outof-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary LCD telephone or with a
DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin/DKBackup software enables customer data (configuration, station, and system
options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can be added
to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin/DKBackup functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but
cannot edit customer databases.
32
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Strata DK424
Strata AirLink Wireless System
Strata AirLink Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to standard ports of the Strata
DK and many non-Toshiba telephone systems has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to quickly diagnose error messages, alarms, and traffic conditions by viewing a PC
monitor before troubleshooting the hardware.
The Status Window, displayed by the Strata AirLink Manager software, is an active window in
which viewing reports, querying the software, and rebooting the Base Station Interface Adapter
(BSIA) is possible. Some of the available reports are:
♦
Base Station channels status
♦
Line status
♦
Call status
♦
Critical alarms
The software also creates log files and sends error messages to the PC monitor to assist the
technician in making corrections. The log files are easily opened in any text editor for viewing and
have information about the BSIA boot software, Base Station upgrades, software queries, errors,
and alarms.
RWIU Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to Strata DK telephone systems
using its own proprietary RWIU PCB also has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to:
♦
Set system IDs and enter handset IDs
♦
Set the time and date, and change passwords
♦
Enable UTAM
♦
Change communication ports
♦
Check the software version of the RWIU and Base Stations
♦
View log messages
♦
Reset and upgrade Base Stations and the RWIU
♦
Change Base Station numbers
LEDs and BER Testing
There are several LEDs on each Base Station, BSIA, and the RWIU that indicate normal, boot up,
and alarm conditions. Signal fading and attenuation can be checked using the resident Bit Error
Rate (BER) test in each handset for additional troubleshooting and maintenance routines.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
33
Strata DK424
Strata AirLink Wireless System
34
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
4
This chapter describes each of the PCBs that install into the universal slots of the Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU and the DK424 Base/Expansion Cabinets. The following paragraphs categorize
the cards according to their function.
Descriptions here apply to both DK40i and DK424 unless noted otherwise. The DK14 does not
support any universal slot PCBs.
Station PCBs
Feature subassemblies, such as the Standard Telephone Interface Subassembly (RSTS), are listed
below the associated PCB. For a list of available subassemblies, see Table 23 on Page 40.
Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU2)
The PDKU2 has eight digital telephone circuits that can support digital telephones (cordless as
well as corded), integrated PC interface data units for data calling and/or TAPI application, offhook call announce, DDSS consoles or DADMs for attendant stations that must handle a heavy
load of calls, and a DDCB for a variety of applications.
Each of these devices only requires one circuit except for the integrated PC interface unit or
DADM, which shares a circuit with the telephone to which they are connected.
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RDSU)
The RDSU in its basic configuration has two standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone
circuits (cordless as well as corded). The standard telephone circuits can support the same devices
that the RSTU2 can, with the exception of standard telephone message waiting lamps.
The digital circuits can support the same devices as the PDKU, except for the DDSS console. The
RDSU can be equipped with an RSTS subassembly to provide two more standard telephone
circuits, and an R48S subassembly to increase the standard telephone maximum loop length.
♦
DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦
DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
Standard Telephone Interface Subassembly (RSTS)
The RSTS attaches to the RDSU and adds two standard telephone circuits to the PCB. With the
RSTS installed, the RDSU provides four standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone
circuits. (RSTS does not support standard telephone message waiting.)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
35
Universal Slot PCBs
Station PCBs
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (RWIU)
The RWIU interfaces the DK40i and DK424 with the Strata AirLink Telephone wireless system.
The card functions as a protocol converter between the Base Stations and the PBX. It has four
digital circuits that connect to four Base Stations using industry standard RJ11 jacks. Roaming and
handoff functionality are present between all four Base Stations.
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU) (DK40i only)
The KCDU provides two analog loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The
CO line circuits offer all of the features that the Base TCOU and the RCOU line circuits provide.
The digital telephone circuits can support every peripheral (except for the DDSS console) that the
PDKU2 and a Base KSU digital circuit can support. Up to four KDCU PCBs can be installed in
the DK40i Expansion Unit.
Note
The RCIU2 Caller ID Interface Unit is required to add Caller ID with the KCDU PCB.
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU)
The PEKU provides eight electronic telephone circuits that can interface with electronic
telephones, an alternate BGM source, a Direct Station Selection Console (HDSS), an external
amplifier for DISA or two-CO line Conferencing.
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU)
The PESU offers two standard and four electronic telephone circuits. Its standard circuits support
the same devices as the KSTU2. Its electronic circuits interface with the same peripherals as the
PEKU, except for the HDSS console.
♦
DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦
DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade Unit (EOCU)
Electronic telephones connected to PEKU and PESU PCBs can receive speaker Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)—internal [DN] calls over their speaker while they are on another call—if the
PCBs are equipped with an EOCU. Digital telephones also support this function, but do not require
an EOCU in the KSU. Unlike digital telephones, electronic telephones cannot receive handset
OCA.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RSTU2)
The RSTU2 has eight circuits that can support single-line devices (one device per RSTU2 port).
Besides rotary and DTMF standard telephones, the RSTU2 can support the Strata AirLink
Wireless analog system, fax machines, dictation equipment, modems, a separate BGM source, offpremises stations, Toshiba Stratagy and VP voice mail systems, and digital announcement devices
for optional built-in AA or ACD.
This PCB also supports the Message Waiting feature on standard telephones that are equipped with
a 90VDC neon message waiting lamp.
The RSTU2 also provides an 80V RMS sine wave ring generator and has interface connectors for
an optional R48S subassembly that increases the maximum possible station loop length from 600
to 1200 ohms.
36
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
Console PCBs
♦
DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦
DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
48V Loop Voltage (R48S)
The optional R48S unit can be connected to the RSTU2 or RDSU, and, by creating 48V loop
voltage instead of 24V, can extend the maximum possible loop length of standard telephone
circuits (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms, allowing standard
telephones to be connected farther from the system.
By using this unit, a less expensive type of off-premises lines can be used (see Table 23 on Page
40).
Console PCBs
Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATU, DK424 only)
The RATU can support four attendant consoles. Multiple consoles enable automatic load-sharing
on a rotation basis from a central call queue, increasing call handling efficiency. The RATU PCB
in the Strata DK424 system cabinet connects to the PC Attendant Console Interface (RATI) via
two pair of wires.
RATU is only available for systems operating with RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
common control units. One RATU is available per system to support a maximum of four Attendant
Consoles per system with RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F, two with RCTUBA/BB, (any combination of
PC or conventional consoles).
CO Line PCBs
A summary of Strata DK station, CO line PCBs and feature subassemblies are listed in Table 23 on
Page 40.
Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)
The RCIU2 is required, along with an analog ground/loop start CO line PCB, to provide the Caller
ID feature. Caller ID is also known as CLID and is available at extra cost per line from the local
Telco. It is sometimes known as a CLASS feature.
Each RCIU2 circuit receives and decodes telephone number and name information sent from the
calling CO. Caller ID is available on analog loop start lines and analog ground start lines only. An
RCIU2 circuit must be available with each RGLU2, RCOU/RCOS, PCOU or KCDU2 circuit that
is to receive Caller ID. Built-in gas tubes help protect each RCIU2 circuit from lightning surges.
An RCIS subassembly PCB can be installed onto the RCIU2 to provide four additional Caller ID
circuits.
Caller ID Interface Subassembly (RCIS)
The RCIU2 comes equipped with four Caller ID circuits; an RCIS subassembly PCB can be
installed onto the RCIU2 to provide four additional Caller ID circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU2/
RCIS can provide a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. Built-in gas tubes help
protect each RCIU2/RCIS circuit from lightning surges.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
37
Universal Slot PCBs
CO Line PCBs
Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit (RCOU)
The RCOU in its basic configuration has four analog loop start CO line circuits, connecting to the
public telephone network.
Each RCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling and has a switch to control
potential excess volume that can be created by a nearby PBX or CO.
An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for four more loop start lines. Each
line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling. Built-in gas tubes help protect each
circuit from lightning.
Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly (RCOS)
The RCOS can be attached to the RCOU to provide four additional analog loop start CO line
circuits. Each RCOS line has all of the features that are available with the RCOU lines.
Ground/Loop Start Interface CO Line Interface Unit (RGLU2)
The RGLU2 provides four analog CO line circuits which can be configured individually for
ground start or loop start. Ground start should be used for applications requiring disconnect
supervision, such as AA/Voice Mail, or ACD.
The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, Hold, and CO line flash signal. Each
RGLU2 line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling and has a switch to control
potential excess volume that can be created by a nearby PBX or CO. Built-in gas tubes help protect
each circuit from lightning.
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit (RDDU)
The RDDU provides four analog DID lines, each of which is assigned a single office code along
with a block of extension numbers. Each extension number is programmed to ring a [DN] selected
in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations.
Each DID line can be set for either Wink Start or Immediate Start. DID lines can also support
DNIS and/or ANI. An optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver
PCB is required for DTMF DID operation. Rotary DID signaling ability at 20 pps is a standard
feature. An external protector is required for each line.
Tie Line Unit (REMU)
The REMU has four analog circuits for E & M Type I or Type II signaling, Immediate Start or
Wink Start Tie lines. A choice between 2- or 4-wire transmission is available as a jumper-plug
option.
Tie lines can also support DNIS and/or ANI. An optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 (DK40i) or RRCS
(DK424) tone receiver PCB is required for DTMF Tie operation. An external protector is required
for each line. REMU Tie lines are two-way and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls.
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit (RDTU2) (DK424 only)
The RDTU provides either 8, 16 or 24 digital voice channels that can be individually configured
for ground start CO line operation, loop start CO line operation, DID/DOD line operation (with
hookflash) or Tie line operation. The number and type of channels for each RDTU installed is
assigned in system programming. All RDTU line types are two-way and can be used for incoming
and outgoing calls.
Any RDTU, DID/DOD, or Tie channel can be configured in system programming to receive DNIS
and/or ANI information from long distance carriers.
38
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
CO Line PCBs
The RDTU is available for systems operating with a RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
common control unit. The RDTU normally requires the installation of a Channel Service Unit,
which is not supplied by Toshiba. RDTU T1/DS-1 digital voice channels can be configured for SF
or ESF format and either AMI or B8ZS line coding (see Table 23).
The new RDTU2, installed in a DK424 Release 4.0 system, supports the hook flash capability.
“SuperTrunk” requires hook flash operation on T1 two-way DID/DOD lines. The RDTU1 can be
upgraded to support hook flash.
In most locations within the U.S., network connection using RDTU2 requires a dealer-supplied,
UL-listed external CSU or in Canada, a CSA-certified CSU.
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU) (DK424 only)
The Primary Rate Interface Unit is a 24-channel PRI card, which provides 1 data (control) channel
and 23 bearer channels (available in Release 4.0). All B channels appear and program as CO lines
in the DK424 system and can be individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie,
etc., service operation. Network connection using the RPTU requires a dealer-supplied, UL-listed,
external CSU in most locations in the U.S. In Canada, the CSU/DSU must be CSA certified.
The RPTU is supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and RCTUE3/F4. See “ISDN
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBSU)
The Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit provides two BRI S/T circuits. Each circuit provides two
simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D
transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control) channel. The D channel carries call setup control data.
The RBSU BRI circuits can be connected to ISDN BRI network lines and/or ISDN S-type
Terminal Equipment (TE-1) or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the station side.
The RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits that are configured for the station side provide a passive bus that
enables up to two TE1 and TA devices to be connected to one BRI circuit. When multiple TE1 and
TA devices are installed on a singled RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share or contend
for that circuit’s two B channels.
A maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between all devices
connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B channels is first come,
first serve. Network connections using BRI S/T type interface also require a dealer-supplied, ULlisted, external Network Terminal (NT-1) device. In Canada, the NT-1 must be CSA certified.
Note
RBSU/RBSS will be available with DK424 and DK40i Release 4.1.
Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBSS)
The RBSS attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI S/T type circuits that can be
used for station-side connections only. An RBSU with the RBSS subassembly provides four
BRI circuits in one card slot.
RBSU/RBSS stations can be voice and/or data devices, such as ISDN telephones and Terminal
Adapters, that support the standard S-type interface. Each RBSU/RBSS circuit provides two B
channels, plus one D channel and reduces the system’s basic capacity by two station ports and
two CO lines. See “ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
Note
RBSU/RBSS will be available with DK424 and DK40i Release 4.1.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
39
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
ISDN U-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBUU) (DK424 only)
The Basic Rate Interface Unit provides two Basic Rate Interface (BRI) “U” circuits. Each circuit
provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the
2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control) channel.
Note
RBUU/RBUS will be available with Release 4.2.
Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBUS)
The RBUS attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to
connect to Network BRI lines and/or station-side connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS
subassembly provides four BRI “U” circuits in one card slot.
RBUU/RBUS stations can be voice and/or data devices, such as ISDN telephones and Terminal
Adapters, that support the standard U-type interface. Each RBUU/RBUS circuit provides two B
channels plus one D channel and reduces the basic system capacity by two CO lines and two
station ports. See “ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
Enhanced 911 CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RCMS) (DK424 only)
The RMCU/RMCS PCBs provide up to four CAMA trunk circuits. The RMCU/RMCS eliminates
the need for connection of adjunct terminal adapter equipment to E911 CAMA trunks. Available
for DK424 in Release 4.0. Also, see note below RCMS.
CAMA Trunk Subassembly (RCMS)
One RCMS subassembly attaches to the RMCU to provide two CAMA trunk circuits. A second
RCMS can be added to provide four CAMA trunk circuits. Available in a future release.
Note
The RCMS is ordered separately from the RMCU, but it must be installed on the RMCU
to provide CAMA trunk interface.
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
Table 23 provides a summary of the universal slot PCBs and available subassemblies.
Table 23
PCB
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
POTS
FX
RPTU
(DK424 only)
Tie (senderized)
1 circuit/ISDN PRI
(23 B channels/1 D channel)
Tie (cut through)
RJ48C or RJ48X
ISDN TIA-568A
OUTWATS (intra-LATA)
OUTWATS (inter-LATA)
InWATS
RBSU
attaches to
RBSU
40
RBSS
2 ISDN BRI S/T point circuits (NT
or TE). Each circuit is 2B+1D.
Network and/or station side
(Host for the RBSS)
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
2 ISDN BRI, S point circuits (2B+D Station side only
each)
1 RBSS subassembly per RBSU
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
Table 23
PCB
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
Subassembly
RBUU
attaches to
RBUU
RBUS
RDTU2
RMCU
attaches to
RMCU
RCMS
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
(DK424 only) 2 ISDN BRI, U point
circuits (2B+D each). Host for the Network and/or station side
RBUS. (Release 4.2)
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits
Network and/or station side
(2B+D each) subassembly for the
1 RBUS subassembly per RBUU.
RBUU. (Release 4.2)
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
Applies to DK424 only.
Loop start lines
1~8, 1~16, or 1~24 channels
(lines), depends on system
programming
Ground start lines
2-pair amphenol
RJ48M
Tie lines (wink or immediate)
(All PCB amphenol
DID/DOD lines (wink or immediate) connectors are female)
2 E911 CAMA circuits with the 1
RCMS or 4 with 2 RCMSs
E911 CAMA lines
2 E911 CAMA circuits
Up to 2 RCMSs per RMCU for 4
CAMA lines max.
RJ11C modular
E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
REMU
4 Tie line circuits
Type I signaling
REMU (8-wire modular jack)
Type II signaling
2- or 4-wire/type I or II
Immediate start
Wink start
KCDU
(DK40i only)
CO loop start lines
2 CO line circuits/
4 digital telephone circuits
Digital circuits same as PDKU,
except no DDSS
RJ14C modular (CO Line
circuits)
25-pair amphenol (digital
phone circuits)
4 CO line circuits (lines)
RCOU
With RCOS:
8 CO line circuits (lines)
attaches to
RCOU
Provides four additional Loop
Start CO lines.
RCOS
4 circuits
RCIU2
With RCIS: 8 circuits
CO loop start lines
RJ14C modular
1 RCOS subassembly per RCOU
Loop or Ground Start Lines with
Caller ID. Requires: RCOU, RGLU2
or PCOU
Used with RCOU/RCOS, PCOU,
and RGLU2 CO line PCBs to
provide 4 Caller ID circuits.
1 RCIS subassembly per RCIU2
RDDU
4 DID circuits
DID Lines
RGLU2
4 line circuits
attaches to
RCIU2
RCIS
PIOU,
PIOUS,
PEPU,
RSSU
attaches to
PIOU and
PIOUS
A PIOU or PIOUS can use an
IMDU
RJ14C modular
Loop or ground start lines
RJ14C modular
ACD/SMIS (DK424 only, except
RCTUA)
25-pair amphenol (PIOU or
PEPU)
SMDI for Voice Mail
Spring clip terminal (PIOUS)
SMDR printer or call accounting
machine
Two 3-pair modular (TTY/
SMDR/SMDI/SMIS)
PC or maintenance terminal (local
or remote)
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are female)
Provides remote maintenance 300
bps or 1200 bps full-duplex modem
None
for DKAdmin or DKBackup. 1 per
PIOU/PIOUS.
IMDU
Strata DK General Description
RJ14C modular
5/99
41
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
Table 23
PCB
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
Standard telephones
Voice mail ports
Off-premises stations
Other similar devices
RSTU2
8 standard telephone circuits
Alternate BGM source
25-pair amphenol
Auto Attendant digital announcer
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are female)
Message Waiting lamp (RSTU2
only)
Fax machines
ACD Announcer
Strata Airlink wireless telephones
attaches to
RSTU2 and R48S
RDSU
RDSU
48 volt circuit for up to 8 standard
telephone circuits
Optionally interfaces to the RSTU2
and RDSU to extend loop length of
None
standard telephones from 600
ohms to 1200 ohms.
Without RSTS:
2 standard telephone/
4 digital telephone circuits
Digital: same as PDKU, except no
DDSS console
With RSTS:
4 standard telephone/
4 digital telephone circuits
attaches to
RSTU2 and RSTS
RDSU
Provides two additional standard
telephone circuits
PESU
2 standard telephone circuits/
4 electronic telephone circuits
(standard/electronic telephone
ports)
(DK424 only)
RATU
4 PC attendant PC console
circuits
Standard: same as RSTU
(standard Message Waiting not
available)
25-pair amphenol
1 maximum per RDSU
None
Standard: same as KSTU2
Electronic: same as PEKU, except
PESU does not support HDSS
console
PC attendant console
Conventional attendant console
25-pair amphenol
25-pair amphenol
Digital telephones (with or without
RPCI-DI, DVSU, DADMs, or digital
cordless telephone)
PDKU2
8 digital telephone circuits
Stand-alone digital cordless
telephone
25-pair amphenol
DDSS console
PDIU-DS
DDCB
2, 4, 6, or 8 VM ports
Stratagy DK
All of the above Stratagy DK
systems use 8 station ports in the
DK40i and DK424 software
None
None
Electronic telephones
HDSS console
PEKU
8 electronic telephone circuits
25-pair amphenol
Alternate BGM source
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are Female)
EOCU PCB for OCA
External conference amplifier
HDCB
42
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
Table 23
PCB
Subassembly
attaches to
PEKU or
PESU
EOCU
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
Provides Speaker OCA path for 8
circuits on PEKU or 4 circuits on
1 for PEKU or PESU that supports
PESU. (Handset OCA is not
Speaker OCA
available on EKTs.)
ACD/SMIS
SMDI for voice mail
Up to 4 interface ports when
installed with the optional RSIS or SMDR printer or call accounting
machine
RMDS piggy-back PCBs.
PC or maintenance terminal (local
or remote)
RSIU
(DK424 only)
attaches to
RSIU
RSIS, RS-232
interface
Up to 3 RSISs
...or
RMDS
(Modem/
RS-232)
1 RMDS and
2 RSISs per RSIU
(DK424 only)
One 3-pair modular (TTY/
SMDR/SMDI/SMIS)
Provides up to four interface ports
(RS-232 and modem) for system
interface with:
RMDS (1200 or 2400 bps)
Voice Mail SMDI
ACD/SMIS
One 3-pair modular per
RSIS (RS-232), RMDS
(Modem/RS-232)
SMDR
Local or Remote Maintenance for
DKAdmin or DKBackup PC.
RWIU
4 RJ11 jacks to support 4 Strata
AirLink Integrated Base Stations
Digital Wireless Handsets: same as
PDKU, except no DDSS console,
None
Stand-alone cordless telephone,
PDIU-DS, or DDCB
Option Interface PCBs
For a list of optional interfaces, see Table 24 (DK40i) and Table 25 (DK424).
Option Interface Unit (PIOU)
The PIOU provides interfaces for Paging (Amplified, Unamplified, and Zone), SMDR, SMDI for
Voice Mail integration, SMIS for ACD, DKAdmin Interface for on or off-site maintenance, an
Alarm sensor, and a Remote Maintenance Modem subassembly (IMDU) that allows the system to
be programmed from an off-site DKAdmin PC.
♦
DK40i – the PIOU PCB's three-watt or non-amplified 600 Ω paging output is not used since
paging is supported by the Base KSU paging interface.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
43
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
♦
DK424 – the PIOU provides two-relay contact pairs. One of the contact pairs can be set for
control of a customer-provided door lock or control of a MOH source. The other relay pair can
be configured to mute BGM while the page feature is being activated or for the Night Relay
function.
Simplified Option Interface Unit (PIOUS)
The PIOUS has most of the PIOU’s features, including SMDR output and the TTY output port
interface and IMDU. It also provides flexible relay contacts and an Unamplified Page output. It
does not provide Amplified or Zone Paging.
Remote Maintenance Subassembly (IMDU)
The IMDU is an optional modem that connects to a PIOU or PIOUS to link the system to off-site
programming and maintenance equipment, such as a DKAdmin PC. The IMDU has an internal
maintenance channel and does not require a dedicated CO line or station port. Data transmission
speed can be set at 300 or 1200 bps full duplex.
Table 24
DK40i Interface PCB Options
Interface Options1
RSSU
PIOU
PIOUS
PEPU
TSIU
DK40i Base 2
X
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones)
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 Ω,
duplex)
X
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay
X
X
X
X
Door lock or external amplifier control relay
X
X
X
X
IMDU disables TTY output when piggy-backed
onto PIOU or PIOUS cards
X
X
X
X
X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)
X
X
X
Alarm sensor
X
X
X
X
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided
external modem, StrataControl and/or DKAdmin
PC (requires TTY output port)
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)
X
X
X
1. Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) on the PIOU and PEPU is not available on the DK40i.
2. These functions are standard (built-in) to the DK40i Base KSU.
External Page Interface Unit (PEPU)
The PEPU is a reduced version of the PIOU and PIOUS, providing most of the Paging and Relay
Contact options offered by these other optional PCBs.
44
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
Single Serial Interface Unit (RSSU)
The RSSU contains one RS-232 serial port for connecting an SMDI, SMIS processor, DKAdmin/
DKBackup PC or external modem.
The RSSU provides a cost-effective alternative to the PIOU or PIOUS when only one other serial
I/O port is needed, or when the other features of the PIOU or PIOUS are not required. The RSSU
has a fixed speed of 1200 bps. It does not support SMDR, or the IMDU or RMDS modems.
Table 25
♦
DK40i – one optional RSSU maintenance interface PCB can be used for connecting a
maintenance PC or external modem (local or remote) to the DK40i.
♦
DK424 – a maximum of three RSSU cards can be supported per DK424.
DK424 Interface PCB Options
RSSU1
Interface Options
PIOU1
PIOUS1
PEPU
X
X
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones)
X
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex)
X
Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms)
X
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay
X
X
X
Door lock or external amplifier control relay
X
X
X
Alarm Sensor
X
X
Remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU or RMDS)
(disables TTY output when they are piggy-backed onto the
PIOU/PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS cards)2
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external
modem (requires TTY output port)2
X
X
X
(IMDU)
(IMDU)
X
X
X
X3
X3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)2
StrataControl and/or DKAdmin PC (requires TTY output
port)2
X
(IMDU)
X
MIS for ACD (requires TTY output port)2, 4
RSIU/
RSIS1
1. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU each provide one TTY port which can be flexibly programmed for the features marked with X.
RSIU/RSIS can provide up to four flexible TTY/SMDR ports.
2. Maintenance modem, ACD/SMIS, Insight DK, Voice Mail, SMDI and DKAdmin PC Interface each require a separate TTY
output. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU provide one TTY output each. RSIU with RSIS PCBs provides up to four TTY outputs.
3. SMDR output will function simultaneously on the same PIOU or PIOUS with one of the following: DKAdmin, remote
modem, SMIS for ACD, Insight DK, or SMDI features.
4. Insight DK, Call Center Viewer and SMIS for ACD requires that the system processor (RCTU PCB) must be equipped with
an RKYS3 or higher feature key.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
45
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
Serial Interface Unit (RSIU, DK424 only)
The RSIU provides up to four interface ports that allow the Strata DK424 system to connect to the
following:
♦
Voice Mail system with RS-232 SMDI
♦
ACD/SMIS system or Call Center Viewer
♦
SMDR printer or call accounting machine
♦
DKAdmin/DKBackup running on a PC as a maintenance terminal (locally or remotely)
The RSIU, which comes standard with one port, can be equipped with up to three more optional
RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232 ports). The Single Interface Subassembly (RSIS) piggy-backs
onto the RSIU PCB to provide the optional ports. One of the serial ports can be an internal modem.
An optional 2400 bps built-in Modem Subassembly (RMDS) can be added onto the RSIU.
The maximum allowed combined speed of all four channels is 9600 bps. All four channels of the
RSIU connect directly to the RCTU processor via a short ribbon cable. The RSIU must be
positioned in the first universal slot of the Base Cabinet.
RMDS (DK424 only)
The optional RMDS modem mounts on an RSIU and can function either as a remote maintenance
modem to provide the same functions as the IMDU or as a direct RS-232 link to a DKAdmin/
DKBackup PC COM port.
The function of the RMDS is set in system programming. Data transmission speed for the built-in
modem function can be set at 1200 bps or 2400 bps via system programming.
46
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
5
This chapter discusses the current line of Strata DK telephones and peripherals that are compatible
with DK14, DK40i and DK424.
The Strata DK40i and DK424 systems can also support all older Strata digital telephones and most
Strata electronic telephones.
A large number of widely used and sophisticated features are available to Strata DK station users.
Everyday features such as Call Transfer, Call Forwarding, Call Holding, and Call Pickup are
executed with just the push of a button or a brief access code. LCD telephones offer more
sophisticated features.
In addition to various operational features, the Strata DK also supports multiple [DNs], providing
easy access to specific lines at the convenience of station users.
Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division (TSD) does not provide ISDN station equipment,
such as ISDN telephones, fax machines, and computer interface devices for high speed internet
access or video conferencing. Toshiba does provide the interface circuit boards that support all of
the above ISDN station equipment.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
47
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones
Digital Telephones
The Strata DK supports the latest line of Strata DKT2000-series digital telephones, which offer
station users a number of useful features that are easy to access (see Figure 15).
LCD Display
Handset
LCD Control/Soft
Key Buttons
Red/Green
LED Indicators
Dial Pad
Flexible Feature
Control Buttons
Message Waiting Button and
LED Indicator
Microphone ON/OFF Button
and LED Indicator
Speaker ON/OFF Button and
LED Indicator
1716
Microphone Location
Volume (up/down)
Last Number Redial
Conference/Transfer
Figure 15
Hold
2000-Series Digital Telephone Buttons and Features
These telephones share a similar design and fit with a variety of office environments. The
DKT2000-series are available in charcoal gray or ash white color in the following models:
48
DKT2010-H
DKT2020-S
The DKT2010-H
is a 10-Button
Digital Telephone
with Handsfree
Answerback.
The DKT2020-S is
a 20-button Digital
Speakerphone.
DKT2010-SD
DKT2020-SD
The DKT2010-SD
is a 10-Button
Digital
Speakerphone
with Liquid
Crystal Display.
The DKT2020-SD is
a 20-Button Digital
Speakerphone with
Liquid Crystal
Display.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones
DKT2001
The DKT2001 is a Digital Single Line Telephone. It looks similar to
the existing 2000-series telephones, but it has a smaller footprint. It is
narrower because there are no programmable buttons and no LCD.
The DKT2001 connects to same digital station port as other 2000series digital telephones. This makes it compatible with all Strata DK
and Perception systems that support digital station ports.
Features
The digital single line telephone supports many features of the other
2000-series digital telephones, including:
♦
Line button with a red LED. The Line button for the DKT2001 is
the [PDN] on this telephone.
♦
Hold button
♦
Conference/Transfer button
♦
Message Waiting button with red LED
♦
Volume Up and Volume Down buttons
♦
One-way voice announce and handset OCA
♦
Supports most DKT features through the use of feature codes
There are some features of the other 2000-series digital telephones that the DKT2001 does not
support:
♦
On-hook dialing
♦
Handsfree answerback.
♦
Speaker OCA
♦
Add-on module (DADM2020)
♦
Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI)
♦
Headset/loud ringing bell connection (HHEU)
♦
Redial button
♦
Programmable buttons or LCD
The digital single line telephone has many feature advantages over analog single-line telephones:
♦
Automatic Busy Redial
♦
Automatic Line Selection
♦
Background Music with station control
♦
Busy Override over Handset
♦
Exclusive Hold
♦
One-way voice announce and handset OCA
Strata DK General Description
5/99
49
Stations and Peripherals
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones
LCD telephones (DKT2010-SD and DKT2020-SD) provide a variety of calling and messaging
information on an alphanumeric screen that displays up to two-lines of information, up to 16
characters per line. LCD telephones provide the features shown in Table 26.
Table 26
LCD Features
Feature
Description
Alphanumeric
Messaging
Station users can create alphanumeric messages that display on other station users’
LCDs, including busy, called station, calling station, and group station messaging.
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)
Displays the telephone numbers of the calling party for incoming, transferred, and
Call Forward calls.
Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) Indication
Indicates the busy or idle status of all of the telephones in the system.
Call Duration
The time elapsed during an outside call displays.
Caller ID
The telephone number or name of the calling party displays on the ringing telephone
for incoming, transferred, and Call Forward calls.
Call Park Orbits
When a call is parked, the orbit number displays. When multiple calls are parked,
LCD station users can scroll through a list of parked calls.
CO Line
Identification
Each line can be assigned a name which displays when station users answer or
access lines. Names can be up to 16 characters long.
Date/Time of Day
The date and time displays when stations are idle.
Dialed Number
Identification
Service (DNIS)
Displays names of called parties which have been previously correlated with the
system database of assigned DNIS numbers.
[DN] User Name/
Number
Station users can enter a name that displays on the station’s LCD when idle, and
appears on the LCDs of other calling stations when the station calls them. The called
station’s name also appears on the calling station’s LCD. Names can be up to 16
characters long.
If a name is not created for a station, the station’s Primary Directory Number [PDN]
displays in place of the name.
50
Feature Prompting
Soft Keys
Soft keys are used as an alternative to access codes or feature buttons. Station
users can access features by responding to LCD prompts.
Timed Reminders
with Messaging
Selected station users can define up to five separate messages and have each
message appear on their LCD at pre-scheduled times.
Speed Dial Memo
Directory Dialing
Selected station users can enter 12-character names for each of their Station
(Personal) Speed Dial numbers. They can call any of these numbers by scrolling
through the directory on the LCD, selecting the desired name, and pressing a line
access button. LCD users can also scroll the system common speed dial directory.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
Speakerphones
Speakerphones
The DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and DKT2020-SD models enable users to make both internal and
outside calls without lifting the handset (see Table 27).
Table 27
Speakerphone Features
Feature
Description
Handsfree Answerback
All DKT2000-series telephones enable users to answer internal calls without
lifting the handset.
Handset OCA
Enables you to speak through the handset of an off-hook, busy digital phone.
Flexible Buttons
All DKT2000-series telephones have flexible buttons which can be assigned
to access features or CO lines.
The DKT2010-H and the DKT2010-SD both have 10 flexible buttons, and the
DKT2020-S and the DKT2020-SD have 20. LEDs can be red or green
depending on conditions.
Fixed Buttons
All DKT2000-series digital telephones have fixed buttons with red LEDs
which are permanently dedicated to the features noted below:
0VJ
The Message button is used to turn on the Message LED of a called station
that is busy or that does not answer. Users can press 0VJ to call back the
station or voice mail device that left the message.
0LF
The Microphone button cuts off the microphone during speakerphone
operation to enable private office conversations. Also used to enable
handset OCA talkback mode.
6SNU
The Speaker button is used to turn the speaker on and mutes handset
microphone for group listening. It also disconnects on-hook dialing calls.
5HGLDO
The Redial button is used to redial the number last dialed from the station.
&QI7UQ
The Conference/Transfer button is used to set up the Conference and
Transfer features.
9RO
The Volume up/down button provides independent control of the handset,
speaker, and ring volumes.
+ROG
The Hold button places internal [DN] and outside calls on hold. Can also be
used to place calls on Exclusive Hold.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
51
Stations and Peripherals
Peripherals
Peripherals
The Strata DK supports several types of stations and customer-supplied peripheral devices, such as
attendant consoles, Direct Station Selection (DSS) consoles, door phones for visitor screening, a
music source for MOH, a speaker for BGM and Paging, Toshiba Stratagy systems and Voice
Processing (VP) for voice mail/auto attendant applications, and more (see Figure 16).
For information on the supporting PCB or data interface unit, refer to “Customer-supplied
Peripherals and Interfaces” on Page 111.
Digital Telephone With
Integrated Personal
Computer Interface
Door Lock
Control
Alarm Sensor
(DK40i, DK424)
$
Mainframe Computer Access
DSS Console
(DK40i, DK424)
Least Cost
Routing
Standard
Telephone
TAPI Personal
Computer
Strata AirLink
Wireless Handset
Printer
(Sharing)
Stand-alone Data
Interface Unit
Off-hook Call
Announce
Digital
Telephone
Door Phone/
Monitor Stations
Network Interface Lines
Facsimile
G4-ISDN (DK40i, DK424)
Ground/Loop/OPS/Caller ID (all DKs)
Tie/DID/T1/ANI/DNIS/
ISDN PRI (DK40i, DK424)
and BRI (DK424)
Music-On-Hold/
Recorder Control
SMDR Data
Collection
Voice Mail Integration
(SMDI and In-Band DTMF)
Centrex
Digital Telephone
with ADM Console
External
Speaker
Figure 16
52
Modem Pooling
PC Attendant Console (DK424)
DKAdmin PC Remote Administration
ACD/MIS PC (DK424)
Call Center Viewer (DK424)
PC Digital Telephone
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus (DK424)
ISDN Video Conference (DK424)
ISDN Fast Internet Data (DK424)
Hospitality Management Information System
(DK40i and DK424)
StrataControl
4275
Strata DK Peripherals
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options
Digital telephones can be upgraded with the following options.
Digital Add-on Module (DADM)
The DADM adds 20 feature buttons to DKT2000series telephones. These feature buttons can be
assigned for CO line access, DSS, and Station or
System Speed Dial. Directory Numbers or other
functions, however, cannot be assigned to DADMs.
Up to two DADMs can be attached to a telephone to
provide 40 buttons to supplement the telephone’s 10
or 20 buttons.
♦
DK14 supports up to 8 DADMs
♦
DK40i supports up to 12 DADMs
♦
DK424 supports up to 200 DADMs (Table 34
on Page 89 for the capacities of different
DK424 common control units)
Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI)
An optional RS-232 PC interface unit that replaces
the normal telephone base and provides the
telephone with simultaneous computer-telephone
interface and voice/data features, without the need
of a modem or an extra outgoing line.
RPCI-DI-equipped digital telephones can also be
connected to a PC with Microsoft® Windows®
TAPI applications. TAPI, or Telephony Application Programming Interface, applications enable
the DK to provide “pop-up” screens on a PC that show information on the Calling or Called party.
Information such as ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data is sent from the digital telephone/RPCI-DI to
provide information for “pop-up” screens to the computer. The Telephone Service Provider
Interface (TSPI) PC software is included with each RPCI-DI. For details on data interface
specifications (Table 43 on Page 116).
Digital phones shared with the Cordless DKT-2004-CT telephone cannot use the RPCI.
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU)
The HHEU provides interfaces for both a headset and a loud ringing bell speaker. The headset
must use a carbon microphone. (With the loud ringing bell feature, the speaker amplifies the
ringing or voice announcement of an incoming call.) For details on data interface specifications
(Table 42 on Page 115).
Strata DK General Description
5/99
53
Stations and Peripherals
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS)
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (DVSU)
DVSU-equipped digital telephones can receive Speaker OCA. This enables stations to receive
internal calls over their speaker while on another call. DVSU is not required in a telephone to
originate OCA calls or in a digital telephone that receives OCA calls via the handset or headset.
Stand-alone Data Interface
Unit (PDIU-DS)
The PDIU-DS enables users to make switched data
connections for modem pooling, printer sharing,
and host/mainframe computer accessing. LEDs on
the front panel of the PDIU-DS indicate the status
of each call.
Cordless Digital Telephone
(DKT2004-CT)
The Toshiba DKT2004-CT Cordless Digital
Telephone brings mobility and productivity to
office telephones. Greater call access cuts down on
leaving messages and “telephone tag.” Its compact
design enables the user to take it to many locations
within the office complex.
Digital 900 MHz spread-spectrum technology
provides nine simultaneous channels and represents
state-of-the-art design and engineering. Spreadspectrum technology provides clarity in
unsurpassed range, several times greater than conventional analog cordless telephones.
Spread-spectrum technology also provides extremely secure communications between cordless
digital telephones and their corresponding base stations within a given environment. Fully
charged, the cordless digital telephone provides over 3 hours of talk time, and 42 hours standby.
An extended operation battery is also available to provide over five hours of talk time.
The cordless digital telephone either attaches to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital
telephone or is used as a stand-alone. It provides many sophisticated Strata features:
54
♦
LCD provides information such as User Name, DNIS and Caller ID
♦
Four programmable buttons for feature, multiple line or feature access
♦
Headset jack (headset optional)
♦
Handset volume adjustment
♦
Conference/Transfer (&QI7UQ) button
♦
+ROG button
♦
Message Waiting LED and button
♦
20 Speed Dial number memory (in addition to 40 station speed dials)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
The DKT2004-CT Cordless Digital Telephone operates from the same digital station port on the
PDKU2 as the DKT2000-series digital telephone which may or may not be attached. It is not
compatible with receiving Group Pages or All Call Pages.
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
The Strata AirLink Wireless handset, like the cordless telephone, is
designed for mobility, reliability, and outstanding performance.
Operating in the 1.9 GHz Unlicensed Personal Communication Service
(UPCS) range, it represents state-of-the-art design and engineering.
The handset can access up to eight separate Strata AirLink wireless
systems enabling movement from building to building, system to
system.
It provides unsurpassed range, clarity, and fully-secured
communications using a voice scrambling algorithm.
The handset uses one Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) battery. When fully
charged, the battery provides up to 4 hours of talk and 40 hours of
standby time.
Features
The handset is equipped with 12 handset volume adjustments (plus a silent mode), 8 ring levels,
and a lockable dial pad. Seventy internal alphanumeric Speed Dial memory locations enable Speed
Dialing by name or number.
The handset has an LCD that shows an idle message, date, call duration, and icons. The icons
represent these conditions:
Off-hook or ringing
♦
Battery strength
♦
Alpha mode
♦
Signal lock and strength
It also has standard built-in buttons that perform these specific functions:
♦
3:5 – turns the power ON and OFF
)/6+ – performs hookflash functions
)&1 – enables features with the use of other buttons; for example, Call Forward, Transfer, Speed
Dial, and Conference
▲/▼ – adjusts volume and scrolls through menu options
$%&– toggles handset between alpha and numeric modes
5&/ – recalls numbers stored in memory
672 – stores Speed Dial numbers/names and the idle message
&$// – places the handset off-hook to enable calling
(1' – places the handset on-hook and exits from RCL, FCN, STO, and ABC modes
&/5 – erases one or more digits in the display
*▲ – scrolls backwards through the Speed Dial list
▼–
scrolls forward through the Speed Dial list and locks/unlocks the dial pad
Strata DK General Description
5/99
55
Stations and Peripherals
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT)
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT)
Using Windows, the PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT) application functions as an independent
telephone. The PC-DKT enables you to make and receive calls using the Windows Virtual
Telephone Display on your PC screen, using your PC’s mouse and/or keyboard. A Toshiba digital
desk telephone can be connected for backup or for speakerphone use. It’s automatically activated
when you close the PC-DKT application or when your computer is turned off.
The PC-DKT software runs in the background while you work on other Windows applications.
You can set it to appear when calls arrive and when you want to make a call, or keep it displayed
on top of all active applications. You can also use the PC-DKT with a Toshiba Cordless Digital
Telephone and switch between them at the touch of a button - even during a call.
The PC-DKT provides all the features of a Toshiba LCD Digital Telephone while giving you these
advanced features:
56
♦
StrataBase directory stores frequently called numbers and other contact information. Speeddial directly from the database, and easily find specific information with the Search feature.
♦
Call logging tracks time, date, duration, destination, and Caller ID of all incoming and
outgoing calls.
♦
Voice mail access panel lets you conveniently operate voice mail with user-definable buttons
on screen.
♦
Analog port enables you to connect a speakerphone, cordless phone or other external device,
or if you choose, send faxes and data from your PC telephone line through the Strata DK
system.
♦
Customize ring tones to identify internal, external, recall, and emergency calls. It also can
play separate sound wave (.WAV) tones to give each telephone line its own ringing sound
(sound card required).
♦
Call recording and playback enables you to store recorded calls as sound wave (.WAV) files,
play them back, and attach them to other applications (sound card required).
♦
On-line help makes the PC-DKT easy to use.
♦
Account code calling becomes an automatic process for any call, simply by selecting the
option.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)
Operators can process a heavy load of incoming calls quickly and efficiently using the Strata DK
PC Attendant Console for Microsoft Windows. The console is not available for the RCTUA
processor, DK40i or DK14. The console consists of the following items:
♦
Custom keyboard (DK-PCATT-KB)
♦
Handset and cradle (RATHC)
♦
Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATI) connected to an RATU PCB
♦
Special Toshiba-proprietary software
The following customer-supplied items are needed:
♦
An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) with a 1.44 floppy disk drive and an additional
COM port to attach to Toshiba RATI PCB
♦
Windows 3.1 software, or higher
♦
Color VGA monitor
♦
Windows graphics acceleration
♦
Mouse
Note
Minimum requirements for the PC are a 100MHz Pentium® computer with 16MB of RAM
(for Microsoft Windows 3.1) or 32MB of RAM for (Windows 95), and 200MB hard drive.
The application uses up to 20MB on the hard drive. A tower PC, placed on the floor, is
recommended over a desktop type for visibility. An internal or external modem is
recommended with a third COM port.
The system supports up to four attendant consoles. Multiple consoles automatically sharing
incoming call load on a call-by-call rotation basis. Features such as Overflow, Position Busy
Mode, and Interposition Call Transfer add to the efficiency of multiple console applications.
Although designed to be a dedicated console, the PC can also be used for other Windows
applications and serve as a multi-purpose work station.
The main screen, shown below, changes according to the status of the console.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
57
Stations and Peripherals
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Various telephone and system parameters can be changed from the console, without a separate
maintenance port. These include Telephone User Names and System Speed Dial numbers.
The PCATT provides a Name/Number search that works with automatic or manual call handling.
Other powerful features for the PCATT include Call Answer Priority and Queuing, Direct Station
Selection, dial pad DTMF signaling, Emergency Call ID, Flexible Programmable Keys, Loop
Keys with Status Indication, keyboard or mouse operation, and headset or handset operation with
volume control. See “PC Attendant Console Features” on Page 102 for feature descriptions and
Table 36 on Page 108 for a list of features.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
The DSS consoles are for system operators.
They operate alongside a digital or electronic
telephone and have 60 buttons which can be
programmed for DSS, CO line access, All Call
Page, Night Transfer, and Station or System Speed
Dial. DSS consoles do not have their own [DNs],
since they are connected to a telephone.
Multiple consoles can operate with one DKT:
♦
DK14 does not support DSS consoles
♦
DK40i supports up to three consoles
♦
DK424 supports up to eight consoles (Table 34
on Page 89 for DK424 DSS console capacities
for various common control units)
The DSS console uses LEDs to indicate call and feature status; the DDSS has dual red and green
LEDs to help further define status. The DDSS console connects to the PDKU2. For details on data
interface specifications (Table 43 on Page 116). The older electronic HDSS console is also
supported.
Door Phone (MDFB)
MDFBs are often used with a door lock to screen
building visitors. Door phones also can operate as a
“hot line.” For example, a door phone can be used
for calls between an office and a warehouse
(requires DDCB).
58
♦
DK14 can have up to 6 door phones
♦
DK40i can have up to 9 door phones
♦
DK424 can have up to 12 door phones (see
Table 34 on Page 89 for MDFB capacities for various common control units)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Stations and Peripherals
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit (DDCB)
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit
(DDCB)
The DDCB can support as many as three door phones
(MDFBs) or two door phones (MDFBs) and one door lock
and connects to designated telephone circuits.
External Speaker (HESB)
The HESB is a multi-functional, external, six-inch speaker
unit with a built-in three-watt amplifier. It can be used as a
paging speaker, an amplified talkback speaker, or a
telephone’s Loud Ringing Bell.
Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK Processing
The Strata DK can operate with Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK voice processing systems,
which provide a number of helpful features.
The DK14, DK40i and DK424 also support SMDI voice mail integration (see “Simplified
Message Desk Interface (SMDI)” on Page 80). Refer to the appropriate Stratagy literature for
details. For Stratagy voice mail processors, a standard telephone PCB is also required (QSTU2,
KSTU2, RDSU, RSTU2).
The Strata DK supports in-band DTMF voice mail integration for all of the above voice mail
systems and requires DTMF receivers:
♦
DK14 requires the QRCU3 for DTMF voice mail integration.
♦
DK40i requires the DK40i Expansion KSU for Stratagy DK voice mail. The K5RCU3 is
required for DTMF voice mail integration. The Stratagy DK does not require a KSTU2,
RDSU or RSTU2; it acts as an RSTU2 in the Strata DK KSU slot.
♦
DK424 requires the RRCS for DTMF voice mail integration.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
59
Stations and Peripherals
Cabling and Connectors
Cabling and Connectors
Strata DK uses industry standard cabling and connectors to interface with lines, stations, and
peripherals (Table 39 on Page 112).
Stations use standard twisted-pair cabling to connect to the system via the MDF. Digital and
standard telephones require just one pair-cabling, or two pair, if equipped with DADM, RPCI or
DVSU. Electronic telephones need two-pair cabling or three-pair for Speaker OCA.
Station PCBs connect to stations and peripherals with a 25-pair Amphenol connector via the MDF.
CO, DID, and Tie line circuits interface with the public telephone network via modular connectors.
Peripheral devices such as SMDR, DKAdmin maintenance PC, etc., are connected to the interface
PCBs (TSIU, RSIU, PIOU, etc.) with three-pair (six wires) modular cords and the Toshiba PPTC9
or PPTC RS-232-to-modular adapters.
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system configured to standard ports (RSTU2) connects to
all Strata DK systems using the Base Station Interface Adapters (BSIAs) and one or two Base
Stations.
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system configured to digital ports interfaces to the DK40i
and DK424 (standard cabling and connectors) using the proprietary RWIU PCB. The RWIU uses
industry standard RJ11 jacks to support up to four Base Stations. Multiple RWIUs can be installed
to increase the capacity of the wireless system.
Station and Peripheral Specifications
For more information on Station and Peripheral Specifications, refer to these tables in the
Appendix.
60
♦
Station Loop Requirements (Table 39 on Page 112)
♦
Station Dimensions (Table 40 on Page 113)
♦
System Tones (Table 41 on Page 114)
♦
Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones (Table 42 on Page 115)
♦
Data Interface Specifications (Table 43 on Page 116)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
6
Features
This chapter provides descriptions of system and station features for the DK14, DK40i and
DK424, in alphabetical order. These features apply to all of these systems, except where noted.
This chapter includes these sections:
♦
System Features
♦
Station Features
♦
PC Attendant Console Features (DK424 only)
System Features
This section describes features that are available on a system-wide basis. See Table 32 on Page 88
for a list of system features.
Abandoned Call Numbers
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Caller ID calls that ring but are abandoned before
they are answered can be stored in system memory. LCD telephone and attendant console users
can display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” ANI and Caller ID numbers.
♦
DK14 and DK40i can store up to 200 ANI and Caller ID abandoned call numbers
♦
DK424 can store up to 2,000 ANI and Caller ID abandoned call numbers
For DK14/DK40i/DK424, stations can be programmed to store from 0 to 100 abandoned call
numbers in increments of 10.
Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verified)
Account Codes provide a method of tracing and categorizing CO line calls on the SMDR report.
They may even be used to temporarily change a restricted station's class of service to allow long
distance calling after an Account Code is entered.
Account Codes may be required before dialing calls (Forced) or optionally entered during calls
(Voluntary). Codes can be as long as 15 digits and can be verified or nonverified. If a printer is
connected to the system, a record of each Account Code prints out on the SMDR report.
Note
The 911 emergency number and two other optional customer-designated numbers (up to
four digits long) can be assigned to bypass Forced Verified Account Code requirements.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
61
Features
System Features
Alarm Sensor (DK40i and DK424 only)
Both the PIOU and PIOUS option interface PCBs have a sensor that can be connected to a
customer-supplied alarm system. If the alarm is activated, the sensor triggers a loud alert tone to all
digital and electronic telephones. Any station programmed with an $ODUP button can turn off the
alert tone.
Alternate Answer Point
Users can answer a transferred outside line call from any station that has the /LQH button or a
Secondary [DN] for the destination station.
Amplified Conference Interface
Provides interface for a customer-supplied amplifier to improve low volume levels due to losses
on some CO lines. The amplifier is not dedicated to certain CO lines (it is shared by all CO lines)
and automatically connects to calls that include two CO lines: for example, DISA, conferencing
and external call forward.
This amplifier provides a louder sound level on these types of calls and requires two circuits on a
PEKU or PESU PCB installed in the Strata DK per amplifier. A maximum of two (DK40i) or four
(DK424) amplifiers per system can automatically connect to any two CO line conference. This
feature is available for the Strata DK40i and DK424.
Auto Attendant (Built-in)
The built-in AA feature acts as an operator that automatically directs incoming calls to stations.
Strata DK provides a built-in AA feature via optional feature upgrade keys: QKYS (DK14),
KKYS (DK40i), RKYS1~3 (DK424).
Callers who dial in to assigned Strata DK AA lines can receive a dialing prompt menu, such as,
“Dial 5 for Sales, dial 6 for Tech Support.” When the caller dials the digit, the call routes to a
[DN], ACD group, or Distributed Hunt group (assigned in system programming).
AA can be programmed to answer CO line calls immediately or with a delayed ring option. AA
can pick up unanswered calls that ring for either 12 or 24 seconds at selected stations. An
unlimited number of CO lines can be assigned for built-in AA. Built-in AA applies to loop and
ground start CO lines only; it does not answer Tie or DID line calls.
Built-in AA enables access to outgoing lines via DISA, which should be security protected with
account codes and/or a DISA security code.
The AA feature requires customer-provided digital announcement device(s) and optional QRCU3
(DK14), K5RCU (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver PCBs. Callers can be connected to one
digital announcer simultaneously. One DTMF receiver is needed per caller.
♦
DK14 enables up to three caller connections
♦
DK40i enables up to five caller connections
♦
DK424 allows up to 24 caller connections
Auto Attendant is licensed by Dytel, Inc. under United States Patent No. 4,975,941.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (DK424 only)
With an optional feature upgrade key (RKYS2~3) connected to an RCTU processor, stations in the
DK424 can be arranged in ACD groups. Such an arrangement enables incoming calls over a CO
line to be distributed among a group of ACD Agents. This is ideal where a number of staff
members receive the same type of calls, since calls can be automatically distributed.
62
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Incoming calls that are not directly connected to Agents wait in queue for the first available Agent
in the called group. While waiting, callers hear programmed announcements and music at
designated intervals to encourage them to remain on hold. This feature requires a customerprovided, digital announcement device(s) and music source.
When the number of ACD calls waiting in queue reaches a programmable threshold, calls can
overflow to another ACD group or destination such as a Distributed Hunt (DH) group.
The ACD feature also enables supervisor stations to provide ACD Agents with call assistance and
call monitoring. ACD Supervisor LCD telephones can display ACD group status, individual Agent
status (available/unavailable, on an ACD call, etc.) and Call Status (the number of calls in queue,
longest call in queue, etc.).
Additionally, the RKYS3 feature key enables the use of a Call Center Viewer, SMIS, or Insight
DK application. SMIS provides detailed supervisory monitoring of Agent calls (on a PC screen)
and printed reports regarding an Agent’s performance. Call Center Viewer presents real-time ACD
Agent and Queue Status to multiple PC screens.
Insight DK (DK424 only)
The Insight DK and Insight DK Plus systems are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center
supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic
wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging.
Insight DK and DK Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running
Windows 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), Windows 98 or Windows NT® with Service Pack 3.
They both support external wallboard displays and scheduled reporting. The data collected can be
exported for further processing using other report generator programs or spread sheets. They also
support inView, which provides LAN-based status displays in a wallboard format on Agent’s or
Supervisor’s PC screens. See the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description for
more information.
ACD Feature capacities are listed in Table 28.
Table 28
ACD Capacities
DK424
ACD
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
ACD/Insight DK and Insight DK Plus/SMIS/Call Center Viewer
Yes
Yes
Yes
8
16
16
ACD Groups
1
200
256
256
ACD Music Interface Ports (1 per Group)
8
16
16
ACD Announce Interface Ports (3 per Group)
24
48
48
ACD Agent IDs
1. There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK424 Call
Center Solutions General Description for details.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
LCD telephones can display the telephone number of the calling party for direct, incoming,
transferred, and Call Forwarded calls. The telephone number can also be sent to an application
computer or to voice mail.
The system supports ANI on analog or digital lines (T1 or ISDN PRI/BRI), DID and Tie lines, and
provides the calling telephone number to answering parties. An optional tone receiver PCB
(K5RCU for DK40i; RRCS for DK424) is required for ANI line operation. DK14 does not support
ANI.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
63
Features
System Features
ANI is also known as Calling Number Identification Service (CNIS) on ISDN lines. CNIS
operates the same as ANI on the DK424. ANI digits can be received independently or
simultaneously with DNIS called number digits.
Calls received with DNIS digits can be routed to unique destinations for each DNIS number (see
“Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only)” on Page 68 and
Table 29).
If ANI is received without DNIS, all ANI calls ring the same selected destination. ANI calls are
calls can be routed to a unique destination for each system ringing mode (Day, Day 2, Night). All
routing destinations except Intercept can be assigned by system programming to change according
to the time of day (see “Day/Night Modes” on Page 67).
In the DK40i, each ANI line reduces station capacity by one. ANI (DID or Tie) lines do not reduce
the station capacity in DK424 systems, Release 4.0.
Refer to the sections on ANI, Caller ID, DNIS or DID and Table 29 for more specific routing
information.
Table 29
ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS Routing Destinations
Routing Destination
ANI Line1, 2
Calls
Caller ID
Line Calls
Individual Primary/Secondary/Phantom DNs
✕
✕
DNIS Line1, 2 Tie & DID 1, 2
Calls
Line Calls
✕
✕
✕
CO line or pooled line buttons
2
Ground 2
Loop Start
Line Calls
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Individual ACD Groups
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Remote Maintenance/Administration modem
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Individual Distributed Hunt (DH) Groups
System External Page (Tie lines, private
network lines only)
✕
System night bell or night ringing over
external Page
✕
Intercept destination (station console
announcement) applies to DID line types only
✕
External telephone network numbers
✕
Voice mail box/Auto Attendant device
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
1. DNIS calls can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits. ANI-only calls (without DNIS) can
also be routed to one destination shown in this table.
2. Not supported by DK14.
Automatic Release from Hold
If an outside caller on hold hangs up, the system will automatically disconnect the call and free the
line for other calls. This feature applies to DISA, DNIS and/or ANI external routed calls, AA,
voice mail calls, and regular voice calls.
Automatic Release is available on a line-by-line basis and operates only with COs that provide a
disconnect (Calling Party Control) signal.
Background Music (BGM)
BGM can be sent to telephone and external speakers. The customer-supplied BGM source(s) can
be applied in a flexible manner.
64
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
One music source can feed both types of speakers, or both types can have their own separate
source. The source used for MOH can also be piped to telephone speakers for BGM or an alternate
BGM source can be connected so callers on-hold have a separate music/announcement source.
The BGM source connects to the RCA jack in the system’s Base Cabinet, RCTU, or to a
designated standard or electronic telephone circuit port.
Caller ID
This feature enables the telephone number or name of the calling party to display on the ringing
telephone’s LCD. It can also be sent to an application computer or to voice mail. Up to 10 digits or
16 characters can be displayed or sent to a computer.
Caller ID (CLID) information displays on direct, incoming, transferred, and Call Forwarded calls.
For PCs, CLID allows both the caller’s name and number to be sent. If the Strata DK system is
programmed to receive both ANI and DNIS information on incoming calls, the station user can
press 3DJH while the call is ringing to alternate between DNIS and ANI/Caller ID LCD displays.
See Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) on Page 66 for more information.
Caller ID is similar to ANI except that Caller ID is offered by local carriers on ground or loop start
lines. Most local carriers charge an extra fee for this service.
A Caller ID Interface PCB is required, in conjunction with the normal ground or loop start CO line
PCBs, to provide the Caller ID feature.
Caller ID can be provided only on analog loop start lines (with QCDU2, KCDU2, TCOU, RCOU
or RCOU/RCOS) and analog ground start lines (RGLU2). It is not available on any other type of
analog lines (TDDU, RDDU and/or REMU) or any type of T1 or ISDN digital lines (see Table 29).
♦
DK14 – the WSIU PCB is required to provide an RS-232 interface to a customer-provided
Caller ID interface device (TC-1041). CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected
to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box. The TC-1041 (MLX-41) is available from
TEL-CONTROL, Inc., P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087. Phone (205) 881-4000.
♦
DK40i –the TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs come with four Caller ID circuits each. The
TCIU2 is used for Base Cabinet lines and the RCIU2/RCIS is used for Expansion Cabinet
lines to provide up to eight Caller ID interface circuits. A KCDU2 can also support Caller ID
with an RCIU2. A TCIU2/RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available for each line that is to
receive Caller ID.
♦
DK424 – when ordered from the factory, the RCIU2 PCB comes with four Caller ID circuits;
however, an RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed on the RCIU2 to provide four more Caller
ID circuits, for a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. An RCIU2/RCIS circuit
must be available for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
ANI is delivered by long distance providers on DID or Tie lines.
Centrex/PBX Compatible
All system features are compatible with Centrex/PBX operation, including repeat of Centrex/PBX
ringing cadence, one-button access to Centrex/PBX features, a two- to four-digit station
numbering plan, and Delayed Ringing to selected stations.
Centrex Ringing Repeat
The system can mimic CO/Centrex/PBX ringing cadences received from outside lines when it
rings a called station.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
65
Features
System Features
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI combines the capabilities of the Strata DK digital business telephone system with custom
functionality provided by computer applications. This can be provided through the Digital
Telephone Integrated PC Interface.
Digital Telephone Integrated PC Interface
A Toshiba 2000-series digital telephone can be connected to a PC. This can be used for both
routine data switching simultaneous voice and data applications, and for more robust CTI
applications.
The connection is made with an RS-232 cable from a communication port on a PC to an RS-232
port on the digital telephone. The RS-232 port is provided by equipping the digital telephone with
an integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). This optional unit replaces the normal telephone base
and equips the telephone for simultaneous computer-telephone interface and voice/data features.
Data switching applications enable users to make data calls to printers, PCs, and other data
devices. Users can also make voice calls using PC directory dialing software, without the need for
a modem or an additional outgoing line.
The system can be programmed with one to four security groups, and can restrict calls between
groups. It can also support modem pooling and printer sharing.
For CTI applications, digital telephones interface to a PC that runs the application software using
the Microsoft Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI), to provide customized
functionality. The PC must run Microsoft Windows software.
Any TAPI-enabled PC software is compatible with Strata DK systems. The most common types of
application are database look-up and pop-up screens that provide information on the calling party.
From a Strata DK system, Caller ID, ANI, DNIS and call processing information can be passed
from the digital telephone to the application computer.
StrataLink
The Strata DK can interface with computer applications that conform to Microsoft Windows TAPI
format. The Toshiba StrataLink Telephony Service Provider Interface (TSPI) software enables the
Strata DK to communicate with TAPI applications. StrataLink TSPI software is bundled with the
RPCI-DI in the form of a 3-1/2” IBM-compatible disk.
StrataLink software greatly enhances the use of the basic TAPI interface, enabling you to
customize the call-control functions of your PC application, including:
♦
Select how the PC application responds to the next call event – StrataLink can accept call
events from the telephone, apply call handling rules and conditions, and invoke actions in a PC
application.
♦
Handle multiple telephone calls – Most TAPI compatible applications can only handle one
call at a time because they only respond to a ringing line for Caller ID database lookup and
screen display. StrataLink enables the application to respond to multiple calls and events that
capture Caller ID and generate screen displays. It also displays transferred calls and
reconnections to held calls. The display can be delayed until after the current call or for a
programmed amount of time.
♦
Handle multiple PC applications from the same telephone – Incoming calls can activate
actions in different applications, depending upon the type of call.
For example, you can generate “customer database” application screens of callers on your
regular directory numbers, use “help desk” application software generated from ACD calls,
and have your pager beep with Caller ID when you are away from your desk. Different
applications can be assigned to work on specific buttons on your telephone, or on all buttons.
66
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
♦
Enhance outbound calling – StrataLink provides for outbound telephone calling and call
control from the PC application.
♦
Easy setup, testing, and monitoring – StrataLink provides tools for testing the interface,
debugging or monitoring the call events, and makes application setup easier. When you select
from pre-defined tested applications, the proper interface is automatically assigned.
Conferencing
A variety of Conferencing combinations are available to all station users, as listed below. Stations
and lines can be added in any order. (See “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62 for more
information.)
♦
One or two stations and two outside lines
♦
Two or three stations and one outside line
♦
Four stations on one internal [DN] line
Credit Card Calling
Callers can make credit card calls (0 + telephone number + credit card number) that bypass Toll
Restriction. The calls are billed to the credit card, not to the Strata DK line. The system requires
that a specific quantity of digits be dialed; otherwise, the call will be dropped within 20 seconds to
prevent operator-placed calls that would be billed to the Strata DK line.
Data Switching
Strata DK offers a sophisticated optional data switching capability using PDIU-DS and RPCI-DI
that can interconnect a wide range of customer-supplied data equipment, including PCs, printers,
and modems. Asynchronous data can be transmitted between devices connected to PDIU-DS/
RPCI-DI at speeds up to 19.2 kbps (see Table 34 on Page 89).
The system provides four data security groups to restrict data calls between groups. Dialing by PC
(both data and voice calls) as well as modem pooling and printer sharing is supported.
Day/Night Modes
The system has three available ringing modes for routing incoming line calls. The routing
destinations are [DNs], ACD groups, Distributed Hunt groups, Auto Attendant, DISA, and a night
bell. The ringing modes are Day, Day2, and Night.
Each mode can be assigned a distinct ringing destination. The system can be programmed with
either two modes (Day, Night) or three modes (Day, Day 2, Night), which can be changed by any
station programmed with a 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button. A supervisor’s 1LJKW/RFN button can be
provided to prevent false changes in modes. Day/Night call routing applies to all incoming line
types: ANI, DNIS, Caller ID, DISA, Tie, and DID lines.
Delayed Ringing
If an incoming CO, DID or Tie line or internal [DN] call rings a station [DN] and is unanswered,
alternate stations can be programmed to ring 12 or 24 seconds later. The stations that were ringing
initially will continue to ring after the Delayed Ringing begins. This feature is assigned on a lineby-line and [DN] basis.
It is also possible to direct loop or ground start CO line calls to the Strata DK built-in AA on a
delayed ring basis. In this case, the telephone(s) that initially ring will stop ringing when the AA
answers.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
67
Features
System Features
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only)
This feature enables incoming DNIS (called party) telephone numbers to display on the LCDs of
ringing telephones. DNIS is provided on analog, and/or digital (T1, ISDN PRI/BRI), DID and Tie
lines. An optional DTMF tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS.
Normally, DNIS is associated with “1-800” type calls offered by various long distance carriers;
however, the Strata DK can provide DNIS information over DID and Tie line circuits.
Traditionally, each 800-number is assigned to its own line group, often resulting in a large number
of under-used lines. DNIS allows multiple numbers to ring into the same line or line group, which
provides a more efficient use of 800-numbers. Each DNIS line is used on an as-needed basis for
different 800-number calls.
♦
DK14 does not support DNIS.
♦
DK40i supports up to 200 DNIS numbers and a maximum of 100 telephone network numbers.
The K5RCU (DK40i) optional tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS. Each DNIS, DID or
Tie line reduces the station capacity by one.
♦
DK424 supports up to 500 DNIS numbers and a maximum of 300 telephone network
numbers. RRCS optional tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS. See “Station and Peripherals
Capacities” on Page 89. DNIS, DID or Tie lines do not reduce station capacity in DK424
Systems, Release 4.0.
The DNIS numbers are correlated in the system database with assigned DNIS names. DNIS names
(up to 16 alphanumeric characters) display on direct incoming, transferred, and Call Forward calls.
This allows incoming calls to be identified and answered appropriately.
DNIS numbers can be assigned to ring unique destinations in the Day, Day2, and Night Ring
modes (see Table 29). The DNIS (called number) digits can be received independently or
simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits (see “Automatic Number Identification (ANI)”
on Page 63).
Priority of ANI or DNIS is set for each line in system programming. DNIS digits can also be sent
to a PC. See “Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)” on Page 66.
External Telephone Network Numbers
All DNIS/DID/Tie numbers that ring into the Strata DK can be routed externally to any outside
telephone number. Depending on the application, the caller DNIS name may be passed to the
destination Strata DK when routed over the telephone network.
Voice Mail
If assigned in the system database, incoming calls for each unique DNIS/DID/Tie number can be
directly routed or Call Forwarded to a designated voice mailbox. This allows callers of each DNIS/
DID/Tie number to receive immediate personal custom greetings.
Note
This feature is available on in-band integration only. It is not available using SMDI.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines (DK40i and DK424 only)
Based on the final digits of a dialed telephone number, DID enables incoming calls over a single
line to directly ring one or a number of stations which share a common [DN]. DID numbers can be
assigned to ring a number of destinations (see Table 29). DK14 does not support DID.
DID is provided by analog or digital (T1, ISDN PRI/BRI) lines. The TDDU and RDDU analog
PCBs support DID. For the DK424 only, the digital T1/DS-1 (RDTU2) or ISDN PRI (RPTU)
PCBs support DID.
68
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Each DID number can be assigned a Name to display on an LCD telephone that rings when the
DID number is called. Each DID line has a single office code and a block of extension numbers
(the final digits) that can be individually assigned in system programming to ring stations.
DID lines can directly access the remote maintenance modem and can optionally provide
automatic Camp-on-busy when callers dial a busy [DN] on incoming DID calls. This feature
provides a camp-on tone and distinctive LED flash at the busy station.
♦
DK40i – each DID line reduces the station capacity by one.
♦
DK424, Release 4.0 – DID lines do not reduce station capacity.
An optional tone receiver PCB (K5RCU or RRCS) is required for DID line DTMF operation.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Outside callers using a DTMF-capable telephone can dial internal stations or outgoing lines
directly, without going through a receptionist or operator. DISA security codes and/or a verified
account codes, each up to 15 digits, can be assigned to prevent undesired access to lines.
DISA is available to any quantity of ground or loop start lines (not Tie or DID), either directly or
through the Strata DK built-in AA. It enables privileged users to take advantage of the benefits of
the Strata DK even when they are not on the premises. An optional tone receiver PCB (QRCU3,
K5RCU or RRCS) is required for DISA.
DISA can be accessed by calling into the DK built-in AA. To prevent users from calling into the
Auto Attendant and accessing an outgoing line with DISA to make unauthorized external calls, be
sure to use the DISA security code.
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing
The incoming line ringing tone to digital telephones is distinct from the internal ringing tone
indicating the type of the call. This feature is optional for standard telephones by using a different
ring pattern.
Door Lock Control
Digital and electronic telephone station users can unlock a customer-supplied electronic door lock
at the touch of an optional button on their telephone.
♦
DK14 supports up to two locks
♦
DK40i supports up to three locks
♦
DK424 RCTUA supports up to four locks; all other processors support up to five locks
Door Phones (MDFB)
Door phones are frequently mounted near building entrances and associated with a customerprovided door lock to help screen visitors. Door phones can be assigned to ring [PDNs] and/or
[PhDNs]. Each door phone must be connected to a DDCB or HDCB.
They also monitor sound—station users can call the door phone and listen to sounds from the
surrounding area. In a warehouse-type environment, a door phone can work as a “hot link,” for
example, the door phone can have a preassigned button that accesses a certain telephone [DN] in
an office, and any common [DNs].
♦
DK14 supports up to 6 door phones
♦
DK40i supports up to 9 door phones
♦
DK424 supports up to 12 door phones
Strata DK General Description
5/99
69
Features
System Features
DTMF Back Tone
The system can be programmed to allow or prevent DTMF tones from being returned to digital
telephones when a user dials on outside lines or sends DTMF digits to a voice mail device.
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
The Strata DK System works with either DTMF or rotary dial pulse CO lines on a line-by-line
basis.
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 milliseconds)
DTMF tones that are sent via Speed Dial to lines and via automatic dialing to voice mail devices
can be set to 80 or 160 milliseconds. The time can be set independently for line out-dialing and for
voice mail automatic dialing. See “Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone” on Page
94.
Emergency Ringdown
Standard telephones can be programmed to automatically ring a designated extension when they
are taken off hook, after a predetermined time without dialing. The receiving digital or electronic
LCD station or attendant console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station.
This feature does not work with digital and electronic telephones.
In healthcare applications, this feature is known as Emergency Ringdown operation. It is used to
assist callers who may not be able to complete a call by dialing. If a station is left off-hook,
continuous ringing will occur at a designated extension. This feature is also known as “Hotline
Service” for hotel/motel applications. See “Hotline Service” on Page 72 for more information.
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service
In the public safety arena, Enhanced 911 (E911) is distinguished from Regular 911 by the delivery
of specific location information to the console of the dispatcher handling the emergency call. The
public switched telephone network (PSTN) delivers a Caller Emergency Service Identifier
(CESID) to the Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) as part of the telephone call set up.
PSAP procedures outside the telephone connection translate the CESID into a specific location to
which emergency services can be dispatched. The Strata DK is not involved in the translation of
CESID into Automatic Location Information (ALI).
The Strata DK40, DK40i and DK424 can accept a call dialed as “911” or “9” + “911” from any
extension and deliver it to a specially programmed, single-line telephone port that connects to
customer-provided, emergency call adjunct equipment. As part of the call, the DK communicates
the originating directory number (DN) to the external equipment using DTMF signaling. The
external equipment translates the received DN to a valid CESID, connects the call to the PSTN and
delivers the CESID information when the call is answered.
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks connect the customer-provided
equipment to the PSTN. When its CAMA trunk interfaces become available, the Strata DK424
will be able to connect directly to CAMA trunks, eliminating the need for external equipment.
The RMCU PCB with one RCMS subassembly provides two CAMA trunk interfaces in one
cabinet slot. One more RMCS may be added to the RMCU for a system total of 4 CAMA trunks.
An extension dialing “911” or “9” + “911” will be routed to its appropriate CAMA trunk. The
DK424 will seize the CAMA trunk, dial “911,” and deliver that stations CESID once the trunk is
answered. The DK424 stores a unique, programmable CESID for each Primary Directory Number.
The DK424 has several internal notification features. It will notify all consoles and designated
stations of an E911 call. It may be programmed to initiate a conference call including the
70
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
originating telephone, the PSAP and an internal emergency station. The SMDR port will generate
a special record at the beginning of the call as well as at the end.
DK owners are urged to learn local regulations and availability of services which may vary
widely. A growing number of locations require a business owner to maintain accurate location
information in a public safety database. Certain locations require E911 only for systems
functioning as PBXs or hybrids but not as key systems. Contact your local emergency services
provider and Local Exchange Carrier for specific information. Another useful resource is the
National Emergency Number Association (NENA) at www.NENA.org.
External Page Zones
The Strata DK40i can support up to four External Page Zones and DK424 can support up to eight
(Tables 24 and 25). Station users can access one, four or eight zones simultaneously by dialing a
brief access code. The zones are composed of customer-supplied speaker(s) and amplifier(s) which
interface with one or two PIOU PCBs. DK14 does not support zone paging.
Flexible Button Assignment
Each of the flexible buttons on digital and electronic telephones can be assigned for feature or CO
line access, enabling station users access to features and lines with the touch of a button. Digital
telephones are available in 10- and 20-button models.
Flexible Directory Numbers
A “flexible” number of digits can be programmed for station [DNs] in the Strata DK. The DK14,
DK40i and DK424 station [DNs] can have from one to four digits. The maximum available
number of unique station [DNs] ([PDNs] plus [PhDNs]) are listed below:
♦
♦
♦
DK14 – up to 20 unique station [DNs] are allowed
DK40i – up to 56 unique station [DNs] are allowed
DK424 – up to 672 unique station [DNs] are allowed
Single-digit [DNs], such as “0”, can be assigned to attendant consoles or attendant telephones.
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
Each CO line can be programmed to ring the Auto Attendant, night bell, DISA, remote
maintenance modem or any station [DN] in the system. A different ringing assignment can be
created for each of three ringing modes—Day, Day2 or Night. Stations assigned to ring can do so
with any of the following three timing designations:
♦
Immediate – Stations assigned Immediate timing ring as soon as the line rings into the system.
♦
Delay 1 – If stations with Immediate timing have not answered within 12 seconds (3 rings),
stations assigned Delay 1 timing also begin ringing. Immediate Ring telephones continue to
ring when Delay 1 Ring telephones ring.
♦
Delay 2 – If the above stations have not answered within 24 seconds (6 rings), stations
assigned Delay 2 timing also begin ringing. Immediate and Delay 1 Ring telephones continue
to ring when Delay 2 Ring telephones ring.
Group Paging
Digital and electronic stations can be divided into Paging Groups. Any station user can make a
page announcement to just one or all of these groups. The page is sent to the speakers of all idle
telephones in a page group. For more information, see Table 34 on Page 89.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
71
Features
System Features
♦
DK14 and DK40i each support up to five Paging Groups, including the All Call Page Group.
♦
DK424 supports to up to nine Paging Groups in systems operating with the RCTUC/D and
RCTUE/F common control units (up to five are supported with either the RCTUA or
RCTUBA/BB). These groups include the All Call Page Group.
Note
Cordless DKT-2004-CTs and standard telephones are not compatible with Paging.
Handsfree Directory Number Paths
All stations can have handsfree conversations simultaneously. Because [DN] paths are
nonblocking, the number of conversations is only limited by the amount of digital and electronic
stations.
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS)
The Toshiba Strata DK Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) is a PC-based
solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized hotels and
motels.
The HMIS tightly integrates with the Strata DK40i and DK424 Digital Telephone System, Release
3.1 or higher, and the Stratagy Voice Processing System, providing a complete and fully-integrated
hospitality package.
The HMIS is an optional turnkey package that includes both the PC and software. The packaged
product includes a PC with a Pentium® 133 MHz processor, 2GB hard drive, three serial ports,
keyboard, mouse, SVGA color monitor, and software (printer not included). The HMIS software is
a Microsoft Windows 95-based application.
The HMIS PC is dedicated to running the HMIS server program and functions as a front desk
terminal. In applications requiring multiple front desk terminals, PC HMIS workstations can be
networked together to share a common database.
The HMIS application provides hotel/motel features and property management capabilities that
are not resident within the Strata DK telephone system. The HMIS is well integrated with the
telephony features of the Strata DK telephone system to which it is attached.
The Strata HMIS provides guest check-in/check-out, up to 20-year reservation capacity, automatic
wake-up calls, SMDR telephone call tracking and costing, billing, telephone system control, and
many other features. See the Hospitality Management Information System General Description for
details.
Hotline Service
Standard telephones can be automatically ring a designated extension if they go off hook and do
not dial with a preprogrammed time. The receiving digital or electronic LCD station or attendant
console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station. This feature does not
work with digital and electronic telephones.
Hotline Service is very useful for hotel/motel applications, where it may be preferable to have
lobby or public area telephones without dialing capability. Standard telephones can be
programmed to automatically call a specific number, such as the front desk. This feature is also
known as Emergency Ringdown in the healthcare field (see “Emergency Ringdown” on Page 70.)
72
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
ISDN is a set of integrated telecommunications services, available over the public
telecommunications networks. ISDN makes it possible to send, receive and modify information
using telephone lines in ways that were not previously possible, such as:
♦
Dynamic use of individual or groups of standard (POTS), DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800 lines on
an as-needed basis
♦
Much faster call setup and data transfer up to 128 kbps
♦
Multi-purpose line use, including sharing lines for voice, data, fax, and video
♦
DID functionality based on the number dialed; without needing to reserve a block of numbers
ISDN service comes in two forms:
♦
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) supports 23 or 24 simultaneous voice or data connections. PRI
is similar to digital T-1 service and uses two pairs of wires from your phone company.
♦
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) supports up to two simultaneous connections using a single pair
of wires.
National ISDN standards were first established in 1992. These were formed for all equipment
providers and services to create a common set of functions for these new services. The public
network is in the process of implementing nationwide the National ISDN 2 (NI-2) services and
some locations have started National ISDN 3. Strata DK Release 4.0 is based on NI-2.
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
PRI is the larger ISDN interface (via the RPTU) and uses the 23B+D transmission format, which
has 23 64-kbps bearer channels and one 64-kbps data (control) channel, with total bandwidth of
1.544 mbps.
PRI is designed as the trunk interface to the ISDN network. PRI connects the Strata DK424
telephone system to an intra- or inter-LATA communication provider. PRI can be used to send/
receive voice and/or data.
More importantly, PRI can save money by enabling the multiple use of the channels on the PRI
link for a variety of services, such as DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc., on demand.
This capability to support multiple services and dynamically allocate channel use as needed is
known as the call-by-call feature. PRI lines also support Calling Number Identification Services
(CNIS).
A dealer-supplied, UL listed, Channel Service Unit (CSU) is required between the DK PRI
interface and the PRI line provider interface in most locations of the U.S. In Canada, a CSA
certified DSU/CSU must be installed.
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Note
Strata DK40i and DK424 support BRI S/T. The DK424 and DK40i will support BRI U
basic features in Release 4.2. No supplementary features are offered in theses releases.
BRI is the smaller ISDN interface and provides two simultaneous voice or data connections with a
single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer
channels and one 16 kbps data (control) channel. The D-channel carries call setup control data.
ISDN BRI station applications allow the connection of ISDN instruments, such as a group IV fax,
PC, computer terminal or port, a LAN bridge, video conferencing terminal, Internet access
devices, LAN access routers, or other devices that benefit from an all digital transmission link.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
73
Features
System Features
BRI applications for the DK424 will include video conferencing, remote access servers, faster
Internet access, point-of-sale devices and high-speed data connections from ISDN stations to the
public ISDN network, as well as typical voice and fax connections. With the correct external
adapter, data can be sent up to 128 kbps.
Like PRI, BRI provides CNIS, DID, Direct Inward Lines, and other data access services when
used to access the public network.
The Strata DK424 BRI cards will support both station side and trunk side connections. The Strata
DK424 system will also support BRI interface from the public network as a CO line service. There
are two types of ISDN BRI interfaces: S/T type (via RBSU/RBSS) and the U-type (via RBUU/
RBUS). Both types are used in the U.S.
The Public Switched Telephone Network provides BRI U-type lines only; therefore, a dealersupplied, external Network Terminal Unit (NT-1) is required to connect DK S/T-type BRI line
circuits to the network. The NT-1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada).
Call-by-Call Service Selection
This feature permits the grouping of individual PRI B-channels to be shared among various types
of services specified by the customer, instead of having to dedicate each channel to a particular
type of service. Using this common pool of channels provides much improved traffic handling
than using dedicated channels.
This dynamic allocation of service can reduce the number of circuits required to access various
services, especially if various services have different peak busy periods.
In Release 4.15, the DK424 will enable specifying the minimum and maximum number of Bchannels used for each service on a common set of B-channels in system programming. Minimum
and maximum values can be set for three time periods during the day.
These values can be used to ensure that a minimum number of channels remain available for
incoming calls. They can also be used to determine if calls should be rejected because they exceed
the maximum number subscribed for that service. Until Release 4.15 becomes available, Call-byCall minimum/maximum service will be implemented at the CO.
Call-by-Call services can be specified to map Strata DK capabilities to network services such as
DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. These services can be provided via the local telephone carrier or be
connected to any ISDN inter-exchange carrier.
Outgoing calls, specific numbers, or DID numbers can be checked against the Call-by-Call table
which lists all valid DNs. DNs can be identified on a per station basis to enable billing calls to a
selected service or station. All numbers used for identifying the call must be subscribed from the
providing service, otherwise the call will be rejected by the provider.
Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS)
NFAS provides the ability to create ISDN trunk groups beyond the 23 channels available with a
single PRI. This is extremely important when Call-by-Call Services are used since all B-channels
must be controlled using a common D-channel.
The Strata DK system will support one additional PRI (two circuits to be linked with one Dchannel). This extends the number of call-by-call B-channels to 47 (2 x 24 minus 1). This provides
better performance and cost savings in high volume ISDN PRI applications.
74
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Calling Number Identification Services (CNIS)
CNIS features provide “Calling Party Information” to the network (outgoing calls) and from the
network (incoming calls). There are four types of CNIS services:
♦
Number Provisioning for outgoing calls is controlled by subscription parameters with your
telco provider. The choice is for the number to be necessary or not. The number sent is based
on the call originator and the call type. The originator can be a tandem call, a station (with or
without DID), or a station with a designated number. The type of call refers to whether it is a
direct or redirected (call forwarded) call.
For a tandem call, the Calling Party Number digits received are the digits that will be sent. For
a direct station call, the default number assigned to the selected service, and which is
programmed into the Strata DK as the Listed Directory Number (LDN), will be the number
sent. In this case, the system can send a fixed number (assigned in the system) or it can use the
DID programming to determine the number to be sent.
♦
Number Screening is normally performed by the public network to ensure that the call being
placed has a valid billing number. In systems with a flexible Calling Number Provisioning, the
network can determine if the call is for a valid billing number. Based on this, it can either place
or reject the call, rather than completing the call and billing it to the default LDN.
♦
Number Privacy allows the caller to prevent the public network from delivering the Calling
Number to the called party on a per-call basis. Service subscribers can request that the number
be presented or not, as a default from the public network. Subscribers can also change default
settings. If a public telco service allows changes to be made, then a user can enter change a
code to the setting for that call after selecting a trunk group.
♦
Number Delivery sends the calling number with the call setup message, if that number is not
blocked. The Strata DK handles the number the same way that ANI information from T1
trunks is handled. For instance, the number can display on the called telephone’s LCD, or it
can be used by TAPI interfaces, or it can be recorded in SMDR data records.
Note
Name Delivery will not be supported in this release, due to the lack of a common
specification for the public ISDN network.
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Different route plans may be designed to automatically place outgoing calls over the most costefficient routes. See the table below for LCR capacities.
Three different LCR time schedules with their own priority schedules can be set up for the
business day. Stations can be grouped into one of eight LCR classes, each with its own routing
priority. Selected station users may have priority use of a line, even when the route with the lowest
cost is not available. LCR is compatible with ABR.
Table 30
Least Cost Routing Capacities
DK424
Least Cost Routing
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
LCR route plans
8
8
8
8
16
16
Area Code/Office Code exception tables
8
8
8
8
16
16
Time schedules
3
3
3
3
3
3
Station classes
4
4
4
4
8
8
Route definition tables
4
4
4
4
6
6
Modify digit tables
6
6
6
6
12
12
Strata DK General Description
5/99
75
Features
System Features
Line Groups
For easy access, various types of outside lines can be assigned to groups (normally for pooled line
and LCR applications). For example, all local lines can be assigned to one group and WATS lines
in another group. Station users access line groups by dialing an access code or by pressing a
feature button.
♦
DK14 provides up to 4 line groups
♦
DK40i provides up to 8 line groups
♦
DK424 provides up to 16 line groups
Line Queuing
A station user can use the Automatic Callback feature to enter the queue for a busy outgoing line.
When the line becomes available, the system calls the station back. Queuing applies to single lines,
line groups, and when calling via LCR.
Live System Programming
Programming the Strata DK from an on-site or off-site location does not interrupt the operation of
the system in most cases. It is interrupted for hardware upgrades.
Memory Protection
If the power fails, the Strata DK has an internal battery backup that protects data and the
customer’s programmed configuration. This information will be maintained within a powerless
system for at least six years.
Message Waiting
Any station and most voice mail devices can leave a message waiting indication (light) on a
designated message waiting light of a digital, electronic, or standard telephone station.
Message waiting lights can be activated when a voice mail message has been left, or they can be
turned on by a calling station. The station user can retrieve messages by pressing the button next to
the message waiting light.
♦
DK14 and DK40i – QSTU2 and KSTU2 PCBs do not support standard telephone MW lamps.
♦
DK424 and DK40i – an RSTU2 PCB must be connected to a standard telephone with a MW
lamp to enable this feature. The DK40i and DK424 provide Message Waiting to standard
telephones with a message waiting lamp. The user can enter an access code to retrieve the
messages. A standard station can store up to four indications.
Multiple Directory Numbers
A [DN], sometimes called an “extension number,” is the number someone must call to reach a
destination within the system. To maximize call coverage flexibility, station [DNs] can appear on
multiple telephones. Also, individual telephones can have multiple [DNs] (see Figure 17).
The system provides three types of [DNs]: Primary, Secondary and Phantom. All [DNs] can be
used to originate and answer calls. If you press a [DN] while on a call, it releases the existing call
and provides dial tone to make another call.
♦
♦
♦
76
DK14 supports a maximum of 10 [PDNs] and 10 [PhDNs]
DK40i supports a maximum of 28 [PDNs] and 28 [PhDNs]
DK424 supports a maximum of 336 [PDNs] and 336 [PhDNs] (see Table 32 for maximum
capacities for various common control units)
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Primary Directory Number [PDN]
Each station in the Strata DK has a unique [PDN]. This [PDN] can appear on multiple buttons (up
to four) of the primary station.
Secondary Directory Number [SDN]
When the [PDN] of a station appears on another station, it becomes an [SDN]. Any [PDN] can
appear as an [SDN] on all other Toshiba telephones in the system. A [PDN]/[SDN] can ring on up
to 120 telephones in the system. Each telephone can be assigned up to four of the same [SDN]. The
maximum number of [PDNs] plus [SDNs] on each telephone is 16.
Phantom Directory Number [PhDN]
This is an additional [DN] that can be dedicated to a station or to a group of stations (usually in the
same area or department). Each unique [PhDN] can only appear once on a given telephone, but
each telephone can be assigned up to eight different [PhDNs].
Any [PhDN] can appear on all Toshiba telephones in the system. A [PhDN] can ring on up to 120
telephones in the system. Each [PhDN] must be assigned to a designated telephone owner via
system programming.
Each [PhDN] is flexibly assigned to an owner telephone in system programming. Only [PhDN]
owner telephones have the following privileges:
Set Call Forward for [PhDNs]
♦
Set Call Forward Mailbox destination for [PhDNs]
♦
Receive Message Waiting (MW) indication for up to four [PhDNs] on individual Phantom
Message Waiting [PhDN/MW] LEDs
♦
Receive OCA when the [PhDN] is called
0554
♦
[PhDNs]
504
508
501
501
500
MW/500
500
201-1
200-1
201-2
200-2
200-1
200-3
200-2
201-1
200-3
201-2
[SDNs] of Station 201
Station 200 can originate or
answer calls for Station 201
by pressing [201-1] or [201-2].
Station 200's [PDNs]
Station 200
Figure 17
Station 201
Multiple Directory Number Example
Notes
●
Incoming calls come in to a telephone’s [PDNs] from the top down to prevent “call collisions.”
For example, incoming calls to Stations 200’s [PDN] will first ring the top “200-1” line, a
second call will ring “200-2” below it, and a third call will ring “200-3.” Auto preference to
Strata DK General Description
5/99
77
Features
System Features
●
●
●
select a [DN] to make a call by going off-hook is from the bottom [PDN] up. This avoids
answering an incoming call while attempting to originate a call.
Each [PhDN] can have a dedicated Message Waiting [PhDN/MW] LED/button to notify the
[PhDN] owner telephone user that there is a message for the person or department associated
with the [PhDN]. Up to four [PhDNs/MWs] can be programmed onto the flexible buttons of
each telephone. In the above example, [MW/500] is the Message Waiting button for [PhDN
500].
A station [PDN] shows busy on Busy Lamp Field when the station is in DND mode or offhook on any [DN], CO line or Tie line. [PhDNs] do not display Busy Lamp indication.
[PhDNs] are usually associated with a function such as an “800” number for a Technical
Support Group; whereas a specific [PDN] is usually associated with a person, for example,
Station 200 is assigned to Steve, Station 201 is for Susan, etc.
Multiple FCC Registration
The DK14 and DK40i can be configured as either a key or hybrid system with separate FCC
registration numbers for each type. The DK424 can be configured as either a key, hybrid, or PBX
system with separate FCC registration numbers for each type.
Multiple registration ensures compliance with FCC regulations, regardless of how the system is
configured. The appropriate configuration for an individual system depends on its function.
Systems configured only for manual selection of lines via line buttons may be registered as key
systems; systems with Automatic Line Selection, LCR, 3RROHG/LQH buttons, etc., usually must
be registered as hybrid or PBX systems.
Music-on-hold (MOH)
A customer-supplied radio, tape player, tuner, compact disc player, or other device can be used to
send music or announcements to parties on-hold on CO lines or on [DNs].
Night Ringing Over External Page
Incoming line or door phone calls can be programmed to ring over an external speaker when the
system is in the Night mode. The call can be picked up from any telephone. After-hours employees
who are not near a ringing telephone can easily answer calls with this feature.
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones
Lines can be programmed to night ring over four selected PIOU Page zones via customer-supplied
paging equipment. Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be
assigned to night ring over the selected zones:
♦
DK40i supports two tenant groups
♦
DK424 supports two tenant groups with RCTUA; all other processors support four tenant
groups
Non-blocking Talk Paths
All outside lines and internal [DN] lines can be used at the same time.
Off-premises Station
Off-site standard telephones can be part of the system, having access to many of the features
offered by the Strata DK. Each off-site station requires a special line from the CO.
78
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Outgoing Call Restriction
Stations can be selectively restricted from originating calls over any number of lines. The same
stations can receive incoming calls on those restricted lines.
Pooled CO Line Button
Several lines can be pooled to appear under one digital telephone, electronic telephone CO /LQH
button. The lines are usually pooled in categories, e.g., WATS lines in one pool, regular lines in
another, etc. Pooled and single-appearing line buttons are designed for use with loop and ground
start lines, not DID, Tie, DNIS, or ANI lines.
Power Failure Transfer
CO line(s) can be switched directly to dedicated standard telephones (customer-provided 2500- or
500-type) for incoming and outgoing calls in the case of a system power failure. The number of PF
telephones available depends on system configuration. Refer to the appropriate configuration
chapter in the Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual.
During normal operation with AC power, in the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU, the PF telephone
connected to the base KSU PF jack does not function.
In the DK424 and the DK40i Expansion Unit, PF telephones connected to DPFT/RSTU2 do
function as a normal standard telephone with all the Strata DK available features, when operating
with normal AC power.
During a power failure, the following connections are made:
♦
DK14 – one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone.
♦
DK40i – in the Base KSU, one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone (up to eight more
can be added in the Expansion Unit).
♦
DK424 – in the DK424, multiple CO lines can be switched. If AC power is lost, the PF
telephones are automatically/directly connected to a pre-wired CO lines.
PF transfer requires an external unit called the Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) and the
RSTU2 PCB on the DK424 and in the DK40i Expansion KSU (if more than one PF telephone is
needed). Each DPFT provides interface for eight power failure telephones.
An RSTU2 PCB is required to supply the DPFT with a -24VDC control signal and ground
connections.
Privacy/Non-privacy Calling
This feature applies to CO /LQH buttons only and does not apply to [DNs]. Outside CO /LQH
buttons can be Private or Non-private on a station-by-station basis. Private lines prohibit users
from pressing a common CO /LQH button and accessing a line that is already in use, whereas users
can do so on Non-private lines.
Private line users can change the mode with a 3ULYDF\5HOHDVH button, enabling as many as
three stations (total) on a line. Non-private users can block access to their lines with a 3ULYDF\
button.
Relay Service
The DK14 KSU and DK40i Base KSU provide one relay contact to provide the functions listed
below. For the DK40i and DK424, the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs each have two pairs of
relay contacts that can each be programmed for one of the following two functions.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
79
Features
System Features
External Page/Door Lock Control
♦
External Page is a Page over external speakers will mute BGM that is being broadcast over
the same speakers.
♦
Door Lock Control Relay requires PIOU or PIOUS relays. Only the PIOU and PIOUS relays
will open a customer-supplied door lock for three or six seconds when a designated button is
pressed on selected telephones.
Night Relay/Hold Relay
♦
Night Relay enables answering machine or a night bell (or chime) will be activated when a
call rings in during the Night mode.
♦
Hold Relay enables an MOH source will turn on only when calls are placed on-hold.
Remote Administration/Maintenance
See “System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin)” on Page 83.
Reserve Power
Customer-supplied 12-volt batteries (gel-cell and maintenance free) can be connected to the
system power supply as a power failure backup.
If there is a power failure, Strata DK automatically switches over to battery power without any
interruption to operation. A built-in charger circuit keeps the batteries charged during normal
system operation.
Reserve power duration depends on the condition of the batteries and the system load, and is
specific for each Strata DK model. Reserve power batteries must be fully-charged, connected, and
tested before a power failure occurs.
♦
DK14 – see “Power Supply” on Page 4
♦
DK40i – see “Power Supply” on Page 13
♦
DK424 – see “Power Requirements” on Page 26
Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI)
This feature provides system integration between the Strata DK and the Toshiba Stratagy and VP
voice processing systems.
SMDI is a standard (RS-232 serial) link; its protocol was developed by Bellcore and is used by
many PBX and Central Office telephone systems to integrate with voice mail systems. SMDI does
not support Strata DK DNIS mail box routing. SMDI interface requires that the Strata DK have a
WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU PCB installed.
By using this standard integration method, a Strata DK has the flexibility to integrate with a wide
range of standard voice mail machines and also to grow with the standard as more features are
added for enhanced integration.
Advantages provided by the Strata DK and the Stratagy/VP SMDI integration are:
80
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Better Port Usage
SMDI is a faster and more efficient integration compared to DTMF (in-band) integration and is
recommended for high-traffic installations.
Improves Call Coverage
Stratagy uses the call forwarding status (e.g., all calls, no answer, busy, etc.) supplied by SMDI to
provide better call coverage. The status information also enables Stratagy to perform custom
applications using Stratagy RNA and Busy Chain options.
Streamlines Messaging Procedures
♦
SMDI provides the calling party’s extension to Stratagy. Users calling Stratagy from their
telephone do not have to enter their User ID to log on to their mailbox.
♦
When an internal party calls an extension that is forwarded to voice mail, SMDI applies the
calling party’s identification to the message. Since the source of the message is already known,
the message recipient does not have to enter the User ID when replying to it.
♦
Caller ID and ANI numbers are delivered to the Voice Mail machine via SMDI packets. DNIS
names are not sent on SMDI packets.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial enables users to dial frequently-called telephone numbers (up to 20 digits per number)
quickly by dialing a brief access code or by pushing a feature button. DK and Centrex/PBX feature
access codes can also be stored for Speed Dial. There are two types of Speed Dial: System and
Station.
System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be used by all stations on the system. A designated station or
attendant console or DKAdmin PC can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
♦
DK14, DK40i and the DK424 RCTUA processor provide up to 40 System Speed Dial
numbers that can be used by all stations on the system.
♦
DK424 RCTUBA/BB and RCTUC/D provide up to 100 Speed Dial numbers.
♦
DK424 RCTUE/F can have up to 800 System Speed Dial numbers.
Station Speed Dial
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 Systems provide up to 40 personal Station Speed Dial
numbers for each individual user. Each user Station Speed Dial numbers are exclusive to that user,
and are not available to other station users. For more information, see “Speed Dial Buttons” on
Page 99.
Station Hunting
The system supports two types of station hunting:
Serial Hunt
When a called [DN] ([PDN] or [PhDN]) is busy, the call (data or voice) will hunt to an assigned
[DN]. If that [DN] is busy, the call hunts to the next assigned [DN], and so on.
The call is eventually routed to the first idle station, or if it is a CO line call, then the call camps on
to the last station in the hunt sequence, if all stations are busy.
If a hunt station is call forwarded, calls to the station will ring at the forwarded destination—not
the hunt destination. Internal callers will receive busy tone if calling into a hunt group in which all
stations are busy.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
81
Features
System Features
Distributed Hunt (DH)
When a call is directed to the DH group, the system hunts for and sends the call to the next
available station that is assigned to the DH group. Calls are evenly distributed to the members of
the group on a rotational basis. The rotation of DH calls always follows the last telephone that
receives a call.
Each DH group is assigned to a unique [DN]. When a DH-[DN] is called, the call is sent to the
[PDN] or 3RROHG/LQH button of the telephone that is next in rotation to receive calls.
If all stations in the DH group are busy, calls directed to the group will be placed into a call waiting
queue and will be routed to the next available telephone in the DH group. Callers in queue will
receive ringback tone until a DH group member becomes available to answer the call.
DH calls can be routed or transferred from Caller ID/DID/DNIS/ANI lines, Tie lines, DISA lines,
loop/ground start CO lines, [DN] lines, and built-in and/or external AA. They can also be
forwarded calls from stations, and overflow calls from ACD groups.
The DK14, DK40i, and DK424 provide a maximum of 16 DH groups. The queue can contain up to
10 calls per group. A telephone can be a member of more than one (up to 16) DH group. Up to 32
telephone [PDNs] can be programmed in any rotation order desired in each DH group. [PhDNs]
can be assigned as members of the DH group in Release 3.1 and higher.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
The system produces calling information that is sent to a printer or call accounting device
connected to a serial interface unit PCB (see below):
♦
DK14 – WSIU
♦
DK40i – TSIU in the base KSU, PIOU, PIOUS in the Expansion Unit
♦
DK424 – PIOU or PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS
The station number and the [DN] that made, received, or transferred a call is sent to the SMDR
device after the call or transferred call is completed. Account Code information can also be
included. ANI numbers, Caller ID numbers, and DNIS/DID/Tie numbers/names can be
programmed to appear on the SMDR report. If present, the names take the place of the system
Account Codes.
SMDR reports include the called number(s), and the time and duration of calls. Customers can
select what type of calls—all calls, outgoing only, long distance calls—they want to appear on the
report.
Station Relocation
This feature enables stations to be moved from one location to another without having to
reprogram the Strata DK. Stations which are moved will maintain their set features and all [DNs],
including Primary, Secondary, and Phantom.This feature does not work when stations are
relocated from a PDKU to a KCDU PCB in the DK40i.
StrataControl (DK40i and DK424 only)
StrataControl™ is a system administrative tool designed specifically for end users who prefer to
administer part of their own telephone system. It is a Windows-based PC application enables
limited access to Strata DK40 and DK424 system programming functions.
StrataControl also enables printing telephone keystrips based upon button programming assigned
within the Strata DK system. Quick reference user guides can be printed based upon station
features and options assigned within the system. StrataControl also includes an on-line telephone
user guide, compiled from the end user’s DK database, specifically for each telephone.
82
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
System Programming through a Station
The system can be fully programmed with a 20-button, LCD-type digital or electronic telephone.
Programming telephones function the same as any other station when they are not in programming
mode. See “Live System Programming” on Page 76.
System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin)
Toshiba DKAdmin software enables all customer configuration program options (speed dial,
number plan, ring assignment, etc.) to be downloaded and stored on a PC disk. The customer data
can be added or changed, using a PC independent of the Strata DK. DKAdmin is fully functional
on DK14, DK40i and all processors of DK424.
The new (or original) customer program options stored on disk can be uploaded into the Strata DK
from the PC to change (or restore) customer configuration.
DKAdmin software can be used to change or restore a customer’s configuration database stored on
the PC disk and then installing at the customer’s site or remotely by modem. It enables customer
database information to be transferred from one common control PCB to another, even when
upgrading to a higher level processor.
Remote maintenance interface is enabled by the WSIU (DK14 only), TSIU (DK40i only) or for
both DK40i and DK424, an RSSU and a customer-provided external modem, or a PIOU/PIOUS
with IMDU built-in-modem, or an RSIU with RMDS (DK424 only).
An external customer-supplied modem could be used in place of IMDU or RMDS; however, the
external modem will require a standard telephone port or CO line.
T1 Interface (DK424 only)
The T1 (DS-1) interface provides the system with up to 24 digital voice channels that can be
individually programmed to operate as ANI, DNIS, Tie, DID, loop start or ground start CO lines.
This allows the system to connect to a CO, Long Distance Provider or another type of Key or PBX
system with a T1 interface.
The T1 interface (via the RDTU2 PCB) provides economic advantages through the high-traffic
carrying capacity of its 24 channels and the cost-effectiveness of its digital transmission facilities.
This feature requires a customer-provided, UL listed CSU in most locations of the U.S. In Canada,
a CSA certified CSU/DSU is required.
T1 interface users also benefit from the increased quality and no loss nature of digital
transmission. Access to the T1 interface is completely transparent to station users. With DK424,
Release 4.0, RDTU2 PCBs supports features, which require the hook-flash signal on T1 DID/
DOD/Tie circuits.
Tandem CO Line Connections
This feature enables unattended line-to-line connections for the Strata DK, freeing the
conferencing analog station or voice mail port for other calls and important tasks (see Table 32 on
Page 88 for feature system capacities).
♦
DK14 enables up to two tandem connections
♦
DK40i enables up to three tandem connections
♦
DK424 enables up to 10 tandem connections
When a tandem connection is set up with a [DN] only, the [DN] must appear on the originating
DKT or EKT. With DK14 and DK40i, standard telephones and VM ports that set up a tandem CO
line connection cannot release from the connection.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
83
Features
System Features
With DK424, Release 3.2 and above, standard telephones and/or VM devices can establish tandem
analog CO line connections and then release them without disconnecting the tandem connection.
After releasing from tandem call, reconnecting to the call can be accomplished by dialing an
access code. This feature does not work if one or both of the CO lines are digital.
Tandem CO line volume level depends on the volume loss level of the Telephone Network CO
lines (see “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62).
Tenant Service
Businesses in the same office building can share a system.
♦
DK14 and DK40i each support up to two tenants
♦
DK424 supports up to two tenants with RCTUA; all other processors support up to four
tenants
Tenants can have separate LCR and Toll Restriction plans, Page Groups/Zones, Night Transfer
ringing assignments, and flexible door phone and CO line ringing assignments.
Tie Lines
Tie lines can link the Strata DK40i or DK424 to other Strata DK systems or PBXs that support Tie
lines. Incoming Tie line calls can be routed to ring a number of destinations within the Strata DK
(see Table 29 on Page 64).
Analog Tie lines are interfaced via the REMU PCB, each of which provides four circuits. The
interface options of Tie lines are: E & M Type I or Type II signaling, optional 2- or 4-wire
transmission, Wink or Immediate start. Digital Tie lines, available with DK424, are provided by
the RDTU2 and RPTU PCBs.
Tie lines do not reduce station capacity in DK424 Systems, Release 4.0. In DK40i, each Tie line
reduces the station capacity by one.
CO lines transferred from Strata DK to another system over Tie lines will recall back to the
originating Strata DK if the transferred call is not answered within a specified time (recall time is
flexible for each station). The recalling station number may display on the LCD of the telephone
being recalled.
An optional DTMF tone receiver PCB is required for Tie line operation:
♦
DK14 does not support Tie lines
♦
DK40i requires the K5RCU tone receiver
♦
DK424 requires the RRCS tone receiver
Toll Restriction
Stations can be individually restricted from making toll calls. Separate restriction levels can be
defined, each allowing or denying specific area and office codes, long distance information calls,
international calls, and/or operator-assisted calls.
Each station is assigned any one of the available restriction levels or no restriction. Individual lines
can be defined as unrestricted. Restriction levels can also be assigned to verified account codes,
which require a user to enter an account code before dialing long distance.
84
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to override Toll Restriction. When employees
need to access a toll number that falls into a restricted area/office code for work purposes, an
employer can assign the particular toll number as a System Speed Dial number. After overriding
Toll Restriction with system Speed Dial, the caller can be blocked from or allowed to dial
additional digits. Dialing long distance provider access codes (10XXX and 101XXX) is not
allowed, except when entered via a System Speed Dial number or LCR.
Traveling Class of Service
The normal Toll Restriction class of a station can be temporarily changed to another class. Each of
the Toll Restriction classes can be assigned a four-digit code.
If one of these codes is entered at any station, the station assumes the class associated with the
code for the next dialed number. Then the station reverts back to its normal Toll Restriction class
for subsequent calls. Traveling Class codes can be added, deleted, or changed by users from
stations selected in programming.
Traveling Class codes will not appear on the SMDR reports. Verified account codes, which can
also change Toll Restriction Class of Service, do print out on SMDR reports.
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers
Any CO, Tie or DID line or internal call can be transferred to any station [DN]. A station does not
need a specific CO line’s appearance in order to transfer or answer the call.
Voice First or Tone Signaling
The system can be programmed for either Voice First Signaling to [PDNs] or Tone First Signaling
to [PDNs] as the standard method of internal [PDN] call signaling.
Tone Signaling is the commonly-used telephone ring when a call comes in. Tone Signaling better
ensures privacy. With Tone Signaling, the called telephone receives a one-second ring tone every
three seconds.
With Voice First Signaling, station users will hear a tone burst followed by the caller's voice over
their telephone speaker when called by another station user. Voice First allows handsfree talkback
from the called telephone on internal and private network Tie line calls.
When [PhDNs] are called, they always ring Tone first. Callers can always select the alternative
method immediately after dialing a station number by dialing a .
Voice Mail Integration
The system can be configured with a Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP (Voice Processing) or a
customer-supplied voice mail messaging system. The following features are available with many
of the systems.
Automated Attendant
Many voice mail systems offer AA as part of their overall feature package.
ANI/DNIS Routing to Voice Mailbox
Each DNIS number or all ANI numbers can be assigned to route directly to a voice mailbox
independent of telephone user voice mailboxes. Routing ANI/DNIS calls directly to a voice
mailbox can be set for all calls or just calls during a particular system mode (Day, Day2, or Night).
This feature is available with in-band VM integration only, not with SMDI.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
85
Features
System Features
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
Each telephone user can forward calls directly to a personal mailbox. The caller bypasses the usual
sequence of voice mail commands and simply leaves a message after hearing a tone. Feature
integration of special voice mail features in Strata DK software enables the systems to work
together more efficiently.
The DK Systems provide SMDI or Inband DTMF tones for voice mail feature integration. These
two options function independently of each other or together. All systems require a DK standard
telephone port to interface with each Voice Mail port.
♦
DK14 – the QRCU3 PCB enables DTMF. The WSIU PCB provides SMDI.
♦
DK40i – the K5RCU enables DTMF. TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS or RSSU PCBs enable SMDI.
♦
DK424 – the RRCS enables DTMF. PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU/RSIS PCBs enable SMDI.
Message Waiting Indication
When a message is recorded in a user’s mailbox, the voice mail system automatically sets a
message waiting indication—typically a flashing LED—at the user's digital or electronic
telephone or the message waiting lamp on a standard telephone connected to an RSTU2 PCB.
A Toshiba telephone can have up to five message waiting buttons/LEDs. A fixed 0VJ button for
the telephone’s [PDN], and up to four (flexible) message buttons for each of the [PhDN].
Voice Mail Control via Station
On DK14 and DK40i, station users can control voice mail equipment from their telephone dial
pads. when not connected in a conference call. With DK424, Release 3.2 and above, DK424
station users can control voice mail equipment on a conference call with other station’s internal or
external CO lines.
86
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Table 31
Standard and Optional System Features
Standard System Feature
Abandoned Call Numbers (ABR)
Account Codes (forced/voluntary/verified)
Alternate Point Answer
Automatic Release from Hold/DISA
Background Music Interface1
Centrex/PBX Compatible
Centrex Ringing Repeat
Conferencing
Credit Card Calling
Day/Night Modes
Delayed Ringing
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing
Distributed Hunt (DK424 only)
DTMF Back Tone
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 ms)
Flexible Button Assignment
Flexible Directory Numbers
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment:
♦ Immediate
♦ Delay 1
♦ Delay 2
Flexible Port/line Assignment
Group Paging
Least Cost Routing
Line Groups
Line Queuing
Live System Programming
Memory Protection
Message Waiting1
Multiple Directory Numbers
Multiple FCC Registration
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
Night Ringing Answer Code
Non-blocking Talk Paths
Outgoing Call Restriction
Pooled CO Line Buttons
Pooled CO Release/Answer Button
Privacy/Non-privacy
Station Hunting
Station Speed Dial
Station Relocation
System Programming through Station
System Speed Dial
Tandem CO Line Connections
Tenant Service
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial
Transfer Recall (CO line and Tie line)
Traveling Class of Service
Unlimited Handsfree Directory Number Talk Paths
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers
Voice First or Tone Signaling
Voice Mail Integration:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
ANI/DNIS Routing to Voice Mail Box
Automated Attendant
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
Feature Integration
Message Waiting Indication
Voice Mail Control via Station
Optional Features
Sensor1
Alarm
Alternate Background Music1
Amplified Conference Interface1
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)1
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Built-in Auto Attendant1
Caller ID1
Computer Applications1
Data Switching1
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Door Lock Control1
Door Phones (MDFB)
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service1
External Page Interface1
External Page Zones1
External Amplified Speaker1
Ground Start CO Lines
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Loop Start CO Lines
Modem Pooling1
Night Ringing Over External Page1
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones1
Off-premises Station1
Power Failure Transfer1
Printer Sharing1
Relay Service1
♦ External Page/Door Lock Control Relay
♦ Night/Hold Relay
Remote Administration and Maintenance1
Reserve Power1
System Program Administration Software1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)1
Tie Lines
Voice Mail Interface (SMDI)
1. Some feature implementation may require additional auxiliary equipment.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
87
Features
System Features
Table 32
System Feature Capacities
DK424
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/
BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Amplified Conferencing1
0
2
4
4
4
4
Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous calls in
queue
3
5
12
12
24
24
Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers:
stored per station
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
Features
200
200
200
400
1000
2000
CO Line Groups
stored per system
4
8
8
8
16
16
Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups
10
10
10
10
10
10
DH Groups
16
16
16
16
16
16
DH stations per Group
8
28
32
32
32
32
DNIS Network Routing Numbers
0
100
100
200
300
300
DNIS Numbers
0
200
200
350
500
500
DTMF receivers
3
5
12
12
24
24
External Page Zones
0
4
4
4
4
8
Call Park Orbits - general
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
28
32
80
240
336
Call Park Orbits - individual
2
Personal LCD Messages per DKT
10
10
10
10
10
10
Personal Message DKTs
8
16
16
32
96
96
[PhDNs] per System
10
28
32
80
240
336
[PDNs] per System
10
28
32
80
240
336
Ring Tones
3
3
3
3
3
3
Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party)
2
3
3
7
7
14
Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing
(3-party)
2
4
4
10
10
20
Station Speed Dial
40
40
40
40
40
40
Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group)
1
1
1
1
1
1
Stratagy DK Systems (per system)
0
2
2
2
4
4
System LCD Messages
40
40
40
40
40
40
System Speed Dial
40
40
40
100
100
800
Telephone Page Groups
5
5
5
5
9
9
Telephone Group Page – simultaneous stations
paged
8
28
32
80
120
120
Telephone Pickup Groups
8
20
20
20
20
20
Tenants
2
2
2
4
4
4
Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table
8
8
8
8
16
16
Toll Restriction Classes
4
4
4
4
8
8
Verified Account Codes
300
300
300
300
300
500
Voice Mail SMDI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware.
2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo.
88
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Table 33
Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots
DK424
Lines and PCB Slots
DK14
DK40i
0
41
CO lines – loop start
4
2
CO lines – ground start
0
Universal slots
12
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
6
12
36
54
2
16
48
2
144
2
200 2
12
16 2
40 2
136
2
200 2
3
3
136
3
200 3
3
200 3
4
192 4
DID lines (analog)
0
12
16
Tie lines (analog)
0
12
16 3
40 3
136
T1 (DS-1) lines each)
0
0
0
48 4
144
ISDN BRI B channel lines
0
12
ISDN PRI B channel lines
0
0
4 lines +
4 stations
12 lines +
12 stations
Squared System Maximum
(lines + stations)
8
40
5
16
5
16
47 6
0
16 lines +
16 stations
5
141
48 lines +
48 stations
16 5
6
188 6
144 lines +
144 stations
200 lines +
200 stations
1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
2. All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or
RCTUE/F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs.
3. Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines.
4. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination).
5. BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL).
6. PRI lines provide CO line services, including Calling Party Number, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL.
Table 34
Station and Peripherals Capacities
DK424
Stations
Add-on modules (DADM)
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
8
12
12
40
120
200
Attendant consoles
0
0
0
2
4
4
DKT2004-CT Cordless Telephones
8
28
32
80
240
336
DKT2004-CT simultaneous calls
8
9
9
9
9
9
Door locks
2
3
4
5
5
5
Door phones
6
9
9
12
12
12
DSS consoles
0
3
3
4
8
8
ISDN BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA
(2B+D per circuit)1
0
10
8
16
40
64
Handset;OCA stations
8
28
32
80
240
336
Off-premises stations
2
20
32
80
232
328
PDIU-DS2
7
24
31
79
160
208
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per system 2
8
24
32
80
144
200
N/A
N/A
32
40
40
40
8
24
32
80
186
280
8
28
32
80
160
208
Standard stations
2
20
24
72
232
328
Telephones – DKT
8
28 3
32 4
80 4
240 4
336 4
0
3
4
4
4
328 4
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per cabinet
per system 2
Speaker OCA stations 2
Telephones – EKT
2
16
32
80
240
1. ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/or TA)
can connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit.
2. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits.
3. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the stations
must be DKTs.
4. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation).
Strata DK General Description
5/99
89
Features
Station Features
Station Features
This chapter describes the features that are available to Strata DK station users. For an overview,
see “Station Features by Station Type” on Page 100. Tables 34 and 35 list the station and
peripheral capacities and station features.
Note
Not all features for digital telephones are available on the digital cordless phones.
Account Code Button
This button, enables digital telephone users to enter Voluntary Account Codes (verified or
nonverified), during conversations without interrupting the talk path. It can also be used to enter
Verified Account Codes to allow normally restricted stations to dial long distance calls.
Add-on Module (DADM)
One to two DADMs can be attached to a DKT2000-series digital telephone to provide an
additional 20 or 40 buttons (see “Digital Add-on Module (DADM)” on Page 53). DADM buttons
can be programmed for outside line access, System or Personal Speed Dial, or Direct Station
Selection (Appendix – Table 42 on Page 115).
Alert Signal Button
This feature enables a digital or electronic telephone user to signal a predesignated station. When
the $OHUW6LJQDO button is pressed, a distinct tone signal is sent to the dedicated station. This
signal can be used to alert someone about a pre-arranged event or action—No talk path will exist
between the called and calling telephones.
An alert signal can be sent to telephones that are idle, or Busy, Call Forward, and/or Do Not
Disturb mode. Each station that has this feature can send/receive the alert signal to/from the other
station in the alerting pair. Up to four unique $OHUW6LJQDObuttons can be on a station.
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
Digital and electronic telephone users who dial a busy outside telephone number can set ABR,
which automatically redials the number at preprogrammed intervals. Busy tone must consist of
standard tones. The system will call back the station when it rings the number. ABR is compatible
with LCR and ISDN, but is not compatible with outgoing DID or Tie line calls. ABR requires the
QRCU3 on DK14 and K5RCU option PCB for the DK40i; it is standard on the DK424.
Automatic Callback (ACB)
Station users that call busy or Do Not Disturb (DND) stations can set ACB and have the system
call them back when the busy or DND station or trunk group becomes available. When calling a
station with multiple [PDNs] in the ring first mode, ACB will be available to the calling station
only if all the [PDNs] of the called station are busy.
Automatic Hold
This option enables a user to place a CO /LQH or [DN] call on Hold by pressing another CO /LQH
or [DN] button. The user can then alternate between the new and the old call by pressing the
desired /LQH or [DN]. If this feature is not activated, users must press +ROG before accessing
another line and switching between calls.
90
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
Automatic Line Selection
A digital or electronic telephone user with this programmable feature automatically accesses an
outside line, a line group, and an internal [PDN] line whenever the handset is lifted or the speaker
(6SNU) button is pressed.
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control
Digital telephone users can control BGM playing over their telephone speakers. (Only a
designated station can control BGM over External Page speakers.) Besides being able to turn the
music on or off, users can also adjust the volume level. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT attached to a
DKT is not compatible with BGM.
Busy Override
Enables a station user to send tone bursts to a busy station’s idle [DN] or CO /LQH button by
dialing a or pressing a feature button. The tone burst can either be sent two times (four seconds
apart) or repeated continuously every four seconds. If there are no idle [DNs] or line buttons on the
busy station, the station will receive two bursts of camp-on tone (see “Call Transfer with Campon” on Page 93.)
The busy station can be a digital or electronic and receive this tone. The DKT2000-series
telephone users can adjust their telephones to receive the tone over their handset or headset
receiver, as well as the speaker. Standard telephones will receive camp-on tone twice from the
handset receiver (it is not continuous on standard phones).
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing
The Busy Station Transfer and Busy Station Ringing features operate together to ensure that a
busy digital or electronic telephone station always receives transferred calls along with distinct
LED and tone indications. A typical application is when an AA device transfers calls frequently to
a busy answering position station.
Call Forwarding
Outside CO Line and internal [DN] calls to stations in the Call Forwarding mode are routed to an
alternate station or voice mail device. Stations in this mode can originate calls as usual. Call
forwarding can be set by a feature button or access code.
Station users can set Call Forward for the telephone’s [PDN] or the [PhDN] that is “owned” by that
telephone. The Call Forward destination mailbox can be different for each [PDN] or [PhDN]. LCD
telephones display the forwarded [DN] and the “forward to” destination.
On DK424, Release 3.2 and above, a telephone can be designated as the Call Forward controlling
telephone in applications that require ground and loop start CO lines to ring a group of telephones.
In DK14 or DK40i, and prior releases of DK424, CO lines that ring more than one telephone do
not Call Forward.
To Call Forward in a particular ringing assignment (immediate, 12-second delay, 24-second
delay), the Call Forward control telephone must be the only one designated to ring in the ringing
assignment. If the call forwards to voice mail, it is sent to the mailbox controlling telephone’s
[PDN] or designated [PhDN]. There are six Call Forwarding modes:
All Calls
This mode forwards all calls to a busy or idle [DN] immediately; the station will not ring.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
91
Features
Station Features
Busy
When this mode is set, all calls to a busy [DN] immediately forward. If a station has an idle [PDN],
but is busy on another [DN] or CO line call, calls to the [PDN] will not forward if the system has
Ring First signaling, but they will forward if the system has Voice First Signaling. If all the
station’s [PDNs] are in use, then calls to the [PDN] will forward immediately. When a station is in
the DND mode, all calls to the station’s [PDN] forward immediately, if the [PDN] does not appear
on other stations.
No Answer
Calls to an idle [DN] set with this mode will ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward. The Ring
No Answer time (8 to 60 seconds) can be set by the telephone user. Call Forward No Answer
(CFNA) is optional on Handsfree Answerback.
Notes
●
●
OCA calls will not Call Forward.
Handsfree internal calls can be programmed to automatically forward if there is No Answer. If
this is not programmed, callers can force Call Forward with a one-digit entry.
Busy/No Answer
When a station is idle and in this mode, calls will ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward. The
Ring No Answer time can be set by the telephone user. When all the station’s [DNs] are busy or
when the station is in the DND mode, the call will “Call Forward-busy” immediately.
On Ring First systems, if the station is busy on a call, but has an idle [DN], calls will mute-ring the
idle [DN] until the CFNA timer expires and then the call will forward. This allows other users to
answer the call if the called [DN] appears on their telephones. On Voice First systems, calls will
immediately Call Forward-busy when the station is busy on a call, even if it has an idle [PDN]. A
station in the DND mode will call forward immediately.
Fixed
Calls to the [PDN] or private CO line of an idle or busy digital or electronic telephone in this mode
will forward immediately to a destination assigned in system programming, but not as defined by
the telephone user.
External Call
Users can set their stations to forward incoming calls (on private or DID lines) to numbers outside
the DK System. The forwarding destination can be cancelled or changed to another outside
number or an internal voice mailbox (either remotely via DISA or from the user’s telephone,
security code protected). Internal, Tie line, and transferred calls will not call forward externally,
but can forward internally if another Call Forward mode is set simultaneously with Call Forwardexternal.
Note
Call Forwarding can be set for [PDNs] and [PhDNs] individually, with the exception of
Call Forward External and fixed Call Forward which applies only to [PDNs].
Call Park Orbits
The Call Park feature enables a station user to place a call temporarily in an orbit so that the call
can be retrieved by any user, either from the same station or from a different station. There are 20
General Park Orbits for the system and one Personal Park Orbit for each station. Personal Park
Orbits are available to any type of telephone, including standard telephones.
If a call is parked, but not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, it will recall the parking
telephone. The Park recall time is set individually for each station.
92
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
Park and Page
This feature enables a user to park a call (in a General or Personal Park Orbit), enter a Page Zone
or Group access code, and then announce the orbit number of the waiting call to the Paged party. A
pre-programmed flexible button can be assigned to telephones to automatically connect to a
predesignated External Paging circuit, a Telephone Paging group or both.
Auto Park
This feature is only available to LCD telephones. When a telephone user parks a call, the user can
enter instead of a specific Orbit Number. The system will then automatically select the next
available General Park Orbit and park the call. The parking telephone’s LCD will show the Park
Orbit that has been automatically selected for the parked call.
Call Pickup
By pressing a button or by going off-hook and dialing an access code, any station can pick up the
following type of calls:
♦
[PDN] or [PhDN] calls on hold or ringing at other stations
♦
CO/DID/Tie lines calls ringing at other stations, either all lines or designated lines. (See
“Tenant Service” on Page 84.)
♦
External or Station Group Page
♦
CO line ringing during the Night mode over External Page or night bell
♦
Door phone calls
♦
Incoming CO line calls
♦
Parked calls
♦
Any ringing line or designated Tenant Group lines
♦
Tandem CO line connections (by tandem origination telephone)
Call Pickup Groups
Up to 20 Call Pickup groups can be created to enable station users to pickup calls ringing at other
stations with the touch of a Pickup feature button or by dialing brief access codes.
Station users can pick up a call that is ringing or transferred to any station in their own group with
a single access code or feature button, and can pickup calls ringing stations in other groups with
selected codes. Any station can be in all the different pickup groups.
Call Transfer with Camp-on
A station user can transfer a CO, DID, or Tie line or internal call to a busy station, which will
receive an alert tone indicating that a call is camped-on. If the busy station fails to answer, the
camped-on call will recall the transferring station.
A camp-on tone is also sent to electronic or digital telephones that are busy and that do not have an
idle [DN] or /LQH button to receive the call. Camp-on tone consists of two tone bursts, followed
by silence. It can be enabled or disabled for each individual station.
Call Transfer Immediate
For Digital LCD telephones: If the Feature Prompting Soft Key is used to transfer a call, the call
immediately transfers after the last digit of the destination is dialed. If the called station is not
available or is busy, the call automatically camps-on to it. This feature is helpful to people who
process a large number of calls with no time to wait for transferred calls to be answered.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
93
Features
Station Features
Call Transfer Music or Ringing Option
This feature enables ringing or music to be heard by the caller when a call is transferred,
depending on system programming. Prior to Release 3.2, callers heard music during the transfer
process and no ringing option in programming was available.
Call Transfer Recall
CO, DID, or Tie lines that are transferred (internally or over Tie lines) will recall to the transferring
station if the called station does not answer. The recall time is individually set for each transferring
station.
Centrex/PBX Features
System Speed Dial buttons can be programmed with access codes, plus any flashes or pauses
necessary to access features through a host switching system.
Conferencing
A variety of Conferencing combinations are available to all station users, as listed below. Stations
and lines can be added in any order. (See “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62 for more
information.)
♦
One or two stations and two outside lines
♦
Two or three stations and one outside line
♦
Four stations on one internal [DN] line
♦
Three to four simultaneous Conference calls (Table 32 on Page 88).
♦
Voice Mail plus one station and two other parties (internal or outside line for DK424, Release
3.2 and above. (Outside line must be analog, not digital.)
Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone
The DTMF dial signal sent to an outside line or voice mail/auto attendant device can continue as
long a DKT2000-series digital telephone user presses a button on the dial pad. This feature is not
available with electronic or DKT1000-series digital telephones.
Data Call Button
A flexible button on a digital telephone can be assigned as a 'DWD&DOO button, which can be used
to dial internal data calls. The telephone must be equipped with an RPCI-DI for 'DWD&DOO button
applications.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons
Digital telephone users can ring selected stations by pressing a flexible feature button assigned for
a DSS function. The LED associated with the button provides the busy status of the station and the
station’s [PDN]. Each flexible button can be assigned as a DSS button to a different station [PDN].
DSS buttons can also be assigned on DADMs.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Features
On DK40i and DK424, digital and electronic telephones can operate with DSS consoles, which
offer the following features:
♦
94
Automatic CO line Hold
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
♦
Feature buttons
♦
All Call Voice Page
♦
Outside Line access buttons
♦
DSS with busy LED indication
♦
Night Transfer
♦
Speed Dial
♦
Voice First or Tone Signaling
♦
Call Forward Override
Directory Number [DN] Buttons
These are the telephone’s call buttons, used to originate and receive internal and external calls. See
“Multiple Directory Numbers” on Page 76 for information on the different types of [DNs].
DISA Security Code Revision
Certain digital telephones selected in programming can revise the DISA security code.
Distinctive LED Color and Flash Indications
♦
Outside CO /LQH and [DN] button LEDs light red or green to help digital telephone users
determine the status of calls. Electronic telephone LEDs are always red when they light.
♦
Digital and electronic telephone LEDs flash at varying rates to indicate calling status.
Distinctive Station Ringing
Digital and electronic telephones can have one of three different ring tones for incoming CO and
DID line calls to help distinguish incoming calls. Also, ring tones for transferred CO and DID line
calls are different from the ring tones of direct CO line calls to the same telephone.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Station users with digital telephones can activate DND to prevent any calls from ringing them.
Callers will hear a fast busy tone. If a DND station’s [DN] appears on other telephones, callers will
ring the [DNs] on those other telephones. The [DN] will then flash on the DND station, but it will
not ring. Stations in DND mode can originate calls. Also, Call Forward-Busy will operate on a
DND telephone, even if the telephone has idle [DNs].
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Stations with this special feature programmed can override stations in the DND mode with a tone
that indicates that somebody is trying to contact them.
DP/DTMF Mode Change
This feature allows digital and electronic telephone users to change the line out-dialing signal
mode from Dial Pulse (DP) to DTMF with the touch of a feature button.
Exclusive Hold
Exclusive Hold enables a digital telephone user to place a call on hold so that the call can only be
picked up at that station or at another station using Directed Call Pickup. No other station can pick
up the call by simply pressing the [DN] or line button that the call is being held on.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
95
Features
Station Features
Executive Override
Stations with this feature programmed can enter any conversation, except ACD and ACD/PBX
calls, in the system by dialing an access code or pressing a Feature Prompting Soft Key. An
optional warning tone notifies the parties that another party is about to conference into their
conversation. Executive Override can be blocked selectively to any station in system programming
for security with modem (data) calls, voice mail calls, fax machine calls, etc.
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
As an alternative to dialing access codes and using feature buttons, station users with LCD digital
telephones use Soft Keys (shown on their LCD) to access features. Abbreviated feature names
appear during a call (when the telephone is in the ring or talk state) on the LCD above fixed keys.
Users can select a feature by pressing the associated key. The LCD feature selections change
according to the call state to provide the most logical options.
Flash Button
An optional button on a digital or electronic telephone can be used either to disconnect a line and
regain CO dial tone, or to gain access to Centrex features. The timing choice is system-wide by
system programming.
Handsfree Answerback
When a voice-announced internal [DN] call comes in to a digital or electronic telephone, users can
answer without lifting the handset. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT and standard telephones are not
compatible with this feature.
Hearing Aid Compatible
All Toshiba digital telephones are hearing aid compatible.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Features
LCD model telephones provide a number of features, such as: ANI, Caller ID, CO Line
Identification, DNIS, and more. See Table 26 on Page 50 for a list of LCD features.
Microphone Cut-off Button
Digital telephones can be programmed with a Microphone Cut-off (0LFURSKQ &XWRII) button to
turn the microphone inside the telephone on and off while idle. This “push-on/push-off” button
enables/disables Handsfree Answerback to the telephone. When Microphone Cut-off is on, it
blocks room monitoring and Hands-free Answerback.
Modem Button
This button enables a digital telephone user to reserve a modem from a pool or to switch from a
voice to a data call. Its LED indicates the availability of modems. The telephone must be equipped
with an Integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI) for 0RGHP button applications.
Modular Handset and Line Cords
All Toshiba telephones are equipped with modular handset and line cords.
96
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
Modular Headset
Digital telephones may be optionally equipped with a modular headset jack by installing an HHEU
PCB.
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
OCA allows a station user to send a voice announcement to a busy digital or electronic telephone.
The call must be directed to a station’s [PDN] or [PhDN]. OCA will not occur when the called
station is not the owner of the dialed [PDN] or [PhDN]. Only the [PhDN] owner telephone can
receive OCA on calls to the [PhDN].
In order for a station to receive OCA, the station must be assigned with OCA-receive capability in
the system database. Depending on system programming and hardware availability, the called
station can receive OCA in one of the following ways:
Handset Mode
An OCA announcement can be sent through the handset receiver to called party who is off-hook
and engaged in a conversation. Only digital telephone sets can have this feature. If the called
party’s station has been programmed with Handset Mode and OCA-receiving capability, an OCA
warning tone (optional) and announcement can be sent to through the handset. The Cordless DKT2004-CT will also receive the warning tone and announcement.
The called station user, while off-hook and engaged in a conversation, will hear the outside talking
party and the OCA calling party, but the outside talking party cannot hear the OCA calling party.
The called station user can hold down the 0LF button to respond and talk to the OCA calling party
through the handset; the outside talking party will not hear the response.
A digital telephone feature button can be programmed to work with “push-on/off” action. When
“push-on/off” is used, the outside party will hear MOH, if installed, when the called party talks
back to the OCA party; otherwise, the outside party hears nothing when excluded from the talk
path. Receiving handset OCA calls is available to digital telephones only; no special hardware
additions are required.
The DKT2001 telephone can receive handset OCA annoucements, but the user cannot respond,
since the DKT2001 does not have 0LF button.
Speaker Mode
An OCA announcement can be sent through the speaker to a called party who is off-hook and
engaged in a conversation. The called phone user must be equipped with a digital telephone with
the optional DVSU PCB and the station must be programmed for OCA-receiving capability. The
Cordless DKT-2004-CT telephone is not compatible with Speaker OCA.
The called station user can respond to the OCA caller by talking into the telephone’s microphone.
With more than one party connected, two-way simultaneous conversations are possible. However,
the RPCI PC/Data Interface cannot be used if speaker mode OCA is installed or vice versa.
Electronic telephones are compatible with speaker OCA (optional hardware is required).
On-hook Dialing
Digital and electronic telephone users can dial calls without lifting the handset, freeing their hands
for other tasks. System dial tone, dial pulsing, ringing, and the voice of the answering party are all
heard over the telephone speaker. The handset does not need to be lifted until after the party
answers, and on speakerphone models does not need to be lifted at all.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
97
Features
Station Features
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI)
An optional PC interface unit that replaces the normal digital telephone base and provides the
telephone with simultaneous computer-telephone interface and voice/data features as described in
“Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI)” on Page 53.
Pooled Line Buttons
A group of CO lines can appear under one button on digital and electronic telephones. The system
can support up to 16 line groups. A station can have up to four buttons for the same group for
handling calls in the same group. Pooled and single appearing line buttons are designed for use
with loop and ground start lines, not Tie, DID, DNIS, or ANI lines.
Private CO Lines
The system can be programmed to allow certain “private” CO lines to appear only on one digital or
electronic telephone and is accessible only by that station.
Push-button Dialing
All Toshiba telephones are equipped with push-button dial pads.
Release Button
Users can complete a transfer or disconnect from a call and become idle just by pressing an
optional 5HOHDVH button on their digital telephones; going on-hook or pressing the hookswitch is
not required. This feature is useful for headset-equipped stations.
Release/Answer Button
The 5HOHDVHDQG$QV button enables a station user that is talking on a call to release and
transfer or disconnect the active call and automatically answer a new incoming call. This is useful
for DSS console’s telephones or stations that must process many incoming calls.
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls
Calls placed on hold or parked by a station can be picked up selectively by another station by
pressing a feature button or dialing an access code.
Repeat Last Number Dialed
The last number dialed by a digital or electronic telephone is stored in system memory, and may be
redialed automatically by accessing a CO line and pressing the 5HGLDO button or dialing an access
code.
Ringing Line Preference
A digital or electronic telephone user with this programmable-by-station feature can answer an
incoming CO, DID, or Tie line call ringing at their station just by lifting the handset or pressing the
6SNU button, without having to press the button associated with the line.
Saved Number Redial
After dialing a telephone number, a digital telephone user can “save” the number by pressing an
optional feature button. The system will automatically redial the saved number when the user
accesses a [DN] or CO line and presses the button again.
98
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
Speed Dial Buttons
This feature enables digital station users to dial telephone numbers with the push of a button.
Standard telephones can dial System and Station Speed Dial numbers with access codes. There are
two types of Speed Dial buttons:
♦
Station Speed Dial Buttons – Station users can store their own personal telephone numbers
on Station Speed Dial buttons. Each button uses one of the assigned 40 station speed dial
number storage locations.
♦
System Speed Dial Buttons – A designated station user can store numbers for System Speed
Dial buttons, which can be assigned to any digital or electronic telephone. For the number of
available system speed dial numbers, see “System Speed Dial” on Page 81.
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) Compatibility
The DK can interface with computer applications which conform to the Microsoft Windows TAPI
format. TSPI software, which allows the DK to communicate with TAPI applications, is bundled
with the RPCI in the form of a 3-1/2” IBM-compatible disk.
The TAPI connection is made with a customer-supplied RS-232 cable connected to a
communication port on a PC and through a DKT2000-series digital telephone with an installed
RPCI. The PC must be able to run Microsoft Windows software.
Timed Reminders
Five separate “reminders” (i.e., a tone which sounds at a preset time) can be set at any telephone to
ring only once or at the same time daily.
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
Privileged digital telephone stations can change Toll Restriction Override Codes.
User Programmable Feature Buttons
This feature enables digital and electronic telephone users to program their personal Speed Dial
buttons with codes to access features and/or dial telephone number. As many as 20 digits and
button functions—such as Hold, [PDN] access, and Conference/Transfer (2 digits each)—can be
stored. More than one feature can be linked under one button to allow functions like placing a line
on hold and accessing the Page system with the touch of one button.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
99
Features
Station Features
Table 35
Station Features by Station Type
Feature
DKT
DKT2001
Digital
Wireless
Cordless
EKT1
ST & Analog
Wireless
Standard
Feature
X
X
X
X
X
X
Account Code Button
X
Account Code Revision
X
Add-on Module (DKT2000-series only)
X
ANI/Caller ID
X2
Alert Signal Button
X
X
X
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
X
X
X
X
X
X3
Automatic Callback (ACB)
X
X
X
X
X
Automatic Hold
X
X
X
X
Automatic Line Selection
X
X
X
X
X
X
Background Music with Station Control 3
X
X
X
X
Busy Override (receive)
X
X
X
X
X
Receive over Handset/Headset
X
X
X
X
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing
X
X
X
X
X
X
All Calls
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Busy
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X2
X
X
X
X
Call Forward:
X
X
No Answer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Busy/No Answer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Fixed
X
X
X
X
X
External Call
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Park/Page
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Auto Park/Page
X2
X2
X
2
X2
X
Call Park Orbits:
Orbit Lists
X
X
Call Pickup:
X
Night Bell
X
X
X
X
X
Tenant Ringing Lines (4-Groups)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Station Groups (20-Groups, All Call Types)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Any Ringing Line
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Directed Station (All Call Types)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Held CO Lines (Selectively)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Door Phone
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Parked Call
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
External Page
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Call Transfer with Camp-on
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Call Transfer Immediate
X
Call Transfer Recall
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Centrex/PBX Compatible
X
X
X
X
X
X
CO/Centrex Feature Buttons
X
X
X
X
Conferencing
X
X
X
X
X
Continuous DTMF Tones
X
X
Data Call Button 4
X
Direct Station Selection Buttons
X
Direct Station Selection Console Features
X
Directory Number Buttons
X
DISA Security Code Revision
X
Distinctive Ringing - CO vs. Station
X
X
X
X
X
Distinctive Ringing - Station (for CO calls)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DKT – Digital Telephone
EKT – Electronic Telephone
ST – Standard Telephone
100
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
Station Features
Table 35
Station Features by Station Type (continued)
Feature
DKT
Do Not Disturb (DND)
X
Do Not Disturb Override (receive)
X
DP/DTMF Mode Change
X
DKT2001
Digital
Wireless
X
X
Executive Override
X
X
X
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
X
X
X
“Flash” Ability
X
Flexible Buttons
X
Handsfree Answerback
X
Headset Interface 3
X
Headset Receiver Volume Control 3
X
Hearing Aid Compatible
X
LED - Distinctive Indications
X
LED - Dual Colors
X
Liquid Crystal Display
X
Message Waiting Indication
X
X
Multiple Message Waiting
X
X
X
Standard
Feature
EKT1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Exclusive Hold
ST & Analog
Wireless
Cordless
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X
X
X
X
X
Microphone Control Button (fixed)
X
Microphone Sensitivity Control by User
X
X
Modem Button
X
Modular Handset and Line Cords
X
Modular Headset\Loud Ringing Bell Interface
X
X
Night Lock
X
X
Night Transfer
X
X
Off-hook Call Announce - Handset Mode
X
Off-hook Call Announce - Speaker Mode
X
X
On-hook Dialing
X
X
Page Access
X
PC Interface - Telephone Application Program
Interface (TAPI) Compatibility
X
X
X
X
X
X5
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off-premise Station
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Phantom Message Waiting Indication
X
X
X
X
Pooled Line Buttons
X
X
X
X
Private CO Lines
X
X
X
X
X
Push-button Dialing
X
X
X
X
X
Release Button
X
X
X
X
X
Release/Answer Button
X
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls
X
X
Repeat Last Number Dialed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ringing Line Preference
X
X
X
X
X
Saved Number Redial
X
X
X
X
Speed Dial Buttons
X
Timed Reminders
X
X
X
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
X
X
X
Two CO Line Conference
X
X
User Name Display
X
User Programmable Feature Buttons
X
1.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Does not apply to DK14.
2.
For LCD EKTs and DKTs.
3.
Standard on DK424; optional on DK14 and DK40i.
4.
5.
6.
May require customer-supplied hardware.
button).
The DKT2001 can receive handset OCA, but cannot respond (no
Not applicable on DK14 or DK40i. DK424 requires software Release 3.2 or higher.
Strata DK General Description
0LF
5/99
101
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
PC Attendant Console Features
The Strata DK PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT) offers many new features, not available on the
older model DK Attendant Console (see Table 36 on Page 108). Additionally, it offers most of the
features available on digital telephones and the older DK Attendant Console. Most features can be
operated either from the DK-PCATT-KB keyboard or from a PC mouse.
Note
For minimum requirements and an illustration of the DK-PCATT screen, see “PC
Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)” on Page 57.
The following describes specific console features that are available to DK-PCATT users.
Answer Button
Automatically answers the next ringing call based upon the system defined priority (incoming CO,
recall, transferred, etc.—see Answer Priority). Multiple ringing calls are automatically queued to
the $QVZHU button. The system can prioritize on a first-in first-out (FIFO) basis, or according to
the priority defined by the user with the Answer Priority feature.
Answer Priority
Enables the $QVZHU button to answer multiple ringing calls in a priority sequence. The priority
sequence is programmable except for emergency calls, which are always the highest priority. The
program default priority sequence is (highest to lowest) Emergency Call, Park Orbit Recall,
Transfer Recall, Hold Recall, Transferred to “O” Call, Incoming CO Line Call, Internal “O”
Operator Call, Internal to Operator Directory Number [DN] Call.
Answer Prompting
When an incoming call rings the console, the screen displays can display prompts for answering
the various CO line or DNIS call. These prompts are stored from the console.
Attendant Conference Setup
This enables the Attendant to set up a conference call with up to four members. Conference
members can be another console, station, or CO line user. The conference can be originated by the
Attendant or requested by a station user or outside party.
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching
The DK-PCATT can automatically switch the Strata DK between Day, Day2, and Night modes,
according to the time of day and day of week. Parameters are programmed from the attendant
console. With automatic mode switching, the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button does not have to be
pressed. Automatic mode switching is only available with a DK-PCATT and is not a standard
system feature of the Strata DK.
Auto Dialing
When Auto Dial is on, the DK-PCATT can search for names and numbers in the directory, and
then automatically dial the number. If Auto Dial is off or no match is found, the Attendant can use
the directory and press a button to call a party or enter a number to be dialed.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display
The console screen shows station status (busy/idle), so the Attendant can see who is busy. BLF
data displays in the directory area of the screen, either with or without station names.
102
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Call Waiting Count
The number of calls waiting to be answered in the attendant console answer queue is displayed and
constantly updated.
Color CRT Display
Console text information is displayed on the monitor screen in full color. Various colors indicate
different status or conditions, making them more distinguishable to the Attendant.
Dial “O” For Attendant
Up to four attendant consoles can be installed per system. To call any available console, station
users dial O. To call a specific console, dial the specific console [DN].
Dial Outside Number For Station User
The Attendant can access a CO line and dial an outside destination number for a station user. To do
this, the Attendant must be in the talk state with a station user, an outside caller, or a caller on an
incoming Tie trunk.
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
The Attendant can make direct station calls or transfers by pressing a button, or pointing and
clicking the mouse button on the station name or number on the internal directory screen.
Directory Display and Dialing
The directory listing area of the screen can display both names and numbers of internal station
users. The Attendant can point and click on a name to automatically dial the number.
♦
The Internal Directory displays the names, directory numbers, and station status (busy/idle) of
station users and ACD groups. This facilitates quick and easy call processing, primarily
transfer of incoming calls.
♦
A scroll bar enables the Attendant to quickly scan all of the names in the directory listing.
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad
The Attendant can press a button to send DTMF tones from the dial pad. DTMF tones are used to
signal external devices such as voice mail, auto attendants, answering machines, etc.
Emergency Calls
Emergency calls from internal stations that arrive at an attendant console receive higher priority
call treatment than other calls. Emergency calls display in the incoming call area of the screen. If
the call is placed on hold, hold time appears in red to highlight this call for quick retrieval.
Emergency Page
An attendant console equipped with an assigned (PHUJHQF\3DJH button can Page the All Call
Page group. The Page sounds over the speakers of all idle telephones in the All Call Page group,
but does not sound over the external paging speakers.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
103
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Feature On-Line Help
On-line Help provides feature instructions at the touch of a button or a click of the mouse. It
functions the same as other Windows PC applications. On-line Help provides more details than the
Soft Key feature prompts. For even more detailed explanations and instructions, refer to the Strata
DK PC Attendant Console User Guide.
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys provides access to various console features. On-screen
instructions and Soft Key functions change according to the state of the Attendant Console.
Examples are:
♦
Sending a message waiting indication to a station
♦
Breaking into an ongoing conversation
♦
Performing a transfer, conference, or voice page
Flexible Programmable Buttons
There are 16 flexible buttons on the display screen which can be programmed with a variety of
feature assignments, trunk access, or as Incoming Call (In) buttons.
Headset Operation
In addition to the handset, the console can be used with a headset. The headset can be plugged into
the RATI attendant console interface unit.
Hold Button
When the Hold button is selected, the current call is placed on hold. If the call is not answered
within a preprogrammed time period, the Attendant is reminded by an on-screen ring indicator.
Hold Timer Display
The timer information screen shows the amount of time each call has been on hold. This serves as
a reminder for the Attendant, ensuring that the held calls will not be ignored or forgotten. Also, the
color indicates whether the call is on Hard Hold, Consultation Hold, Supervised Hold, or
Emergency Call Hold.
Incoming Call Identification
This feature enables selective answering of all categories of calls to the Attendant (internal [DN],
transferred, park recall, hold recall, transfer recall, emergency, operator, and incoming CO for all
16 CO line groups). The Attendant can select and answer calls in the incoming call display area,
instead of using the Answer button. Thus, the Attendant can override the FIFO or priority order
established by the Answer button and the Answer Priority feature.
Incoming Call Statistics
The DK-PCATT collects incoming call statistics, such as the number of calls received per hour,
total talk time (in seconds) per hour, total incoming talk time per hour, total waiting time (in
seconds) in queue per hour, and the maximum number of calls in queue each 15-minute interval.
The data is stored on disk for display or printing. Today’s data can be displayed on screen and the
previous day’s data can be printed.
104
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Interposition Call Transfer
This feature allows calls to be transferred from one attendant console to another.
Join Button
Allows the Attendant to connect an incoming call with an outside party on hold or an internal
station. Rather than transferring the call, the Attendant presses the Join button to create a
temporary conference from which the Attendant can drop out.
Keyboard or Mouse Operation
Most of DK-PCATT functions can be operated by clicking a mouse on screen buttons or by
pressing the equivalent keyboard buttons. Attendants can choose the easiest method for them.
Load Sharing
In a multiple-console environment, incoming calls are distributed among the available consoles
(up to four) on a call-by-call rotation basis, which increases efficiency and call coverage
flexibility.
Loop Hold Display
This display lists the calls on hold and the hold time. If a call is not answered within a
preprogrammed time, it recalls with a ring indicator and appears on the Incoming Call display.
The console can be set for Supervised loop operation, which keeps the call in the Loop display
even after it’s transferred, enabling the Attendant to monitor it or re-enter the conversation. With
release loop operation, the held call appears briefly in the Loop display area until it is answered by
the station receiving the transferred call. Then it disappears from display.
The Attendant can type a note, such as who the call is for, the caller’s name, etc., while still
connected to the call. This note is associated with the call so that Attendant can provide personal
attention to each caller.
Message Center
The Attendant can use the DK-PCATT keyboard to enter a message into the message database.
When a message is entered, the station’s message light is automatically lit. At a later point, the
station user can press 0VJ and call the Attendant. If the station is an LCD phone, the display will
show that the Attendant called. Once the station user is connected with the Attendant, the
Attendant can display a list of messages for that caller and read them back.
Multi-tasking
The Strata DK-PCATT software runs as a standard Windows application. Toshiba recommends
using a dedicated PC for the console to maximize response time and efficiency. However, other
applications can be run simultaneously on the same PC, enabling the Attendant to use the PC for
multi-tasking purposes.
When call traffic is light, the PC can toggle from the Attendant Console mode to another
application. If a call is received while in another application, the PC can immediately switch back
to Attendant Console mode to handle the ringing call. The DK-PCATT can be set to toggle
automatically (Auto Activate on) or manually.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
105
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Name or Number Dialing
The DK-PCATT directory can include individuals who do not have stations within the system.
This accommodates personnel located off-site (in other facilities, working at home, etc.). The
directory can include information on reaching these people. It also provides an area for entering
messages for them.
The Attendant can use the directory to select parties by name, number, or department. If Auto Dial
is on, a matching name or number invokes automatic calling or transferring. A department list
shows the names and/or numbers of people within a department.
Overflow
Calls that have been waiting in the ringing queue too long will be re-routed to another console,
station, or answering device. This feature is controlled by the overflow timer, and can be manually
activated by the Attendant during high-traffic conditions via the 2YHUIORZ button.
Override
There are three different ways to override calls:
♦
Busy Override lets the Attendant send a tone to a busy station to signal a call is waiting.
♦
DND Override lets the Attendant send a tone to an idle station in the DND mode to indicate
that an important call is coming in.
♦
Executive Override lets the Attendant enter an established conversation.
Position Busy Mode
This feature places the console in Unattended mode. It should only be used when multiple
attendant consoles are sharing the load of incoming calls.
When one console is in Position Busy Mode, new calls are sent to other console(s). Held and
unanswered transferred calls will continue to recall to the console that processed them. When the
last console in the Attendant group is placed in Position Busy mode, the entire group is considered
Unattended. Consoles must set Call Forward and/or Night Transfer in order for calls to be rerouted
to another destination, such as Night Bell, alternate answer position, etc.
Release Button
This button releases the console from any connection by transferring (or extending) the call and
placing the console in the idle state.
Speed Dial Calling
Speed dial numbers and names can be used for calling or transferring. When a speed dial name or
location number is entered on the “active keyboard,” speed dial information displays. Up to 40
station speed dial numbers and 100 system speed dial numbers (for RCTUB, RCTUC/D), or 800
system speed dial numbers for RCTUE/F can be stored in the speed dial list.
From the console, the Attendant enters the names for the speed dial numbers; these names can be
different from those entered in the system records, so the Attendant can customize them.
106
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Split/Switch Button
The Split/Switch button is used to alternate between source and destination parties; the two
parties are kept separate. This feature can only be used during a three-way conference (console,
source and destination party). The parties can be connected on outside lines only, either on [DN]
lines only, or on a combination of outside and [DN] lines. The Split feature does not work on fourparty conference calls.
Three-way Calling
Three-way Calling enables an Attendant to talk simultaneously with the source and destination
parties. This feature requires a connection with a station user or outside caller, including a party on
Consultation Hold.
Through Dialing
This feature lets an Attendant provide outgoing call privileges to a restricted station user. On a
call-by-call basis, the Attendant can access otherwise denied trunks and then pass the dial tone to
the station user. The station user can then complete the call dialing procedure. Through Dialing can
also be applied to callers using DISA and incoming Tie trunks.
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail
A button on the DK PC-ATT enables direct transfer of outside callers to a station user’s voice
mailbox. This is more efficient than directing a call to a busy station which, if call forward was set
to voice mail, would then forward. This is also helpful when the Attendant knows a station user is
unavailable. This feature is also useful the called party does not own a station set, but they do have
a voice mailbox. The Attendant can release the call when voice mail answers.
Trunk Group Busy Indication
This feature shows the trunk groups and whether all members of the group are busy. Trunk groups
with no members are always shown busy.
Trunk Group Control
Outgoing CO line groups can be restricted on an as-needed basis. This feature also restricts
outgoing calls on two-way CO line groups. This enables the Attendant to control outgoing traffic
on heavily-used line groups during busy hours.
Volume Control
The Vol Up and Vol Dn buttons adjust the console’s ringing and handset/headset volumes.
Windows PC Operation
The Strata DK PC-ATT software runs on the computer as an application within Windows. Toshiba
recommends using a dedicated PC for the console; however, other applications can run
simultaneously on the same PC. The PC can toggle between Attendant Console mode and other
applications.
The console commands are similar to other Windows applications, making training easier for
previous Windows users. Either a mouse or keyboard can be used for console operation.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
107
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Table 36
PC Attendant Console Feature List
Attendant Console Features
Answer Button
Answer Priority
Answer Prompting by CO Line or DNIS
Attendant Conference Setup
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching
Auto Dialing
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display
Call Waiting Count
Color CRT Display
Dial “0” For Attendant
Dial Outside Number for Station User
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Directory Display and Dialing Internal [DN]
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad (Tone Button)
Emergency Calls
Emergency Page
Feature On-Line Help
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Flexible Programmable Buttons
Headset Operation1
Hold Button
Hold Timer Display
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming Call Statistics
Interposition Call Transfer
Join Button
Keyboard or Mouse Operation
Load Sharing
Loop Hold Display
Message Center
Multi-tasking
Name/Number Dialing
Overflow
Override
Position Busy Mode
Release Button
Speed Dial Calling - Outgoing Speed Dialing
Split/Switch Button
Three-way Calling
Through Dialing
Transfer Direct to Voice Mailbox
Trunk Group Busy Indication
Trunk Group Control
Volume Control
Windows PC Operation
Station Features Performed by the Attendant Console
Account Code Calls
Alarm Set
ANI/Caller ID Display1
Automatic Callback
Automatic Hold
Automatic Recall
Parked Calls
Held Calls
Transferred Calls
Background Music Control
Call Forward
Call Park
♦ Call Park Orbits
♦ Auto Park/Page
♦ Call Pickup
Call Transfer with Camp-On
Conferencing
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) Display
Directory Number User Name/Number Display
DISA Security Code Revision
Door Lock Control
Door Phone Operation
DTMF Tone Signaling from Dial pad
Last Number Redial
Message Waiting
Night Transfer
Paging
♦ External Speakers1
♦ Telephone Speakers
Privacy Release
Saved Number Redial
User Programmable Feature Buttons
1. Some feature implementation may require additional auxiliary equipment.
108
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Appendix
This appendix contains reference information for the DK14, DK40i and DK424 systems and
compatible stations. The information here applies to all systems unless noted otherwise.
The tables in this appendix include:
♦
Network Requirements
♦
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
♦
Station Specifications, which includes these tables:
♦
Station Loop Requirements
♦
Station Dimensions
♦
System Tones
♦
Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones
♦
Data Interface Specifications
Strata DK General Description
5/99
109
Appendix
Network Requirements
Network Requirements
Table 37
PCB Network Requirements
PCB/Interface
QSTU2/PESU/RSTU2/
KSTU2/RDSU1
(Off-premises Station)
Facility Interface Code
OL13A (PESU)
OL13B (QSTU2, RSTU2, –24V)
OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with R48S48V)
Ringer
Equivalence
Network Jack
RJ21X
Universal Service
Order Code
N/A
9.0F
0.3B
N/A
RJ14C/RJ21X
0.0B
AS.2
RJ2EX
RJ2GX
RJ2FX
RJ2HX
Not Available
(N/A)
9.0F
RJ11C/RJ21X
(QCDU2 only)
QCDU2/RCOU/RCOS, TCOU
(loop start line)
02LS2
RDDU, TDDU
02RV2-T
REMU type 1 or type 2
TL11M, 2-wire
TL31M, 4-wire
TL12M, type 2, 2-wire
TL32M, type 2, 4-wire
RGLU2 (ground or loop start
line)
02GS2 (ground)
02LS2 (loop)
RJ14C/RJ1CX
0.3B
N/A
RDTU (DS-1/T1)2
(See last bullet note on Note 2 below.)
RJ48C/RJ48X/
RJ48M
N/A
6.0P
RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID)
N/A
RJ21X/RJ14C
0.3B
N/A
3
RJ14C/RJ21X
(all others)
04DU9-1SN
RJ48C/RJ48M
N/A
RBSU (S/T, BRI)3
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI)3
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
RCMU/RCMS (CAMA)
02RV2-O
RJ11C/RJ21-X
N/A
TBSU
021S5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
RPTU (PRI)
6.0P
6.0P
1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or
equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If
equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection.
2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified:
●
The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels.
Unused channels must be bit-stuffed.
●
Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or
Immediate).
●
Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame
Format to be used, either is adequate for DK424 CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance
monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU.
●
Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally
specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424 T1 CO digital voice lines.
●
The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424 T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit.
(CSUs are a Telco requirement.)
●
RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN.
3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits
may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs
must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified.
110
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Appendix
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
The Strata DK supports many customer-supplied peripheral devices, a number of which are listed
in Table 38 (with the supporting PCB or data interface unit noted). For a depiction of these
devices, see Figure 16 on Page 52.
Table 38
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
Peripheral
Interface
Auto Attendant (built-in) digital
announcement devices
QSTU2, KSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Alternate BGM interface
QRCU3, QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU
Caller ID
KSTU2, WSIU, TCIU2, TCOU, RSIU, RCIU/RCIS, RGLU, RCOU, RCOS,
PIOU
Dictation equipment
QSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
DTMF
An optional QRCU3, K5RCU, K5RCU2 or RRCS tone receiver is required if
a DTMF signalling peripheral is connected to QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2,
RDSU, or PESU; or if Tie, DID or DISA lines are used.
External page equipment
PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU
External remote maintenance modem
WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU
Fax machines
QSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Local maintenance terminal
WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU
Mainframe computers
PDIU-DS
Modems
WSIU, TSIU, RSTU2, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2, PESU, or PDIU-DS
Personal computers
RPCI or PDIU-DS
Radio paging equipment
QSTU, KSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Remote maintenance (built-in)
RSIU with RMDS, PIOU or PIOUS with IMDU
Standard telephones
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Standard telephone with Message
Waiting neon lamp
RSTU2
SMDR printer/call accounting device
or SMDI
WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, RSIS
Voice mail device voice ports
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PESU or Stratagy DK
ISDN Terminal Adaptors/
Terminal Equipment1
RBSU/RBSS, RBUU/RBUS
1. ISDN Terminal Adaptors (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE-1) are ISDN status devices, such as ISDN telephones, G-4 fax
machines, modem and video conference interfaces, etc.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
111
Appendix
Station Specifications
Station Specifications
Table 39
Station Loop Requirements
No. of Wire Pairs
(24 AWG twisted pair)
Device
Digital telephones1
DDSS consoles
PDIU-DS
DDCB
Max. Loop
Resistance
(includes device)
1-pair
Attendant Console (DK424
only)
2-pair
HDCB
Electronic telephones
2-pair; 3-pair for OCA
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2
Shares digital telephone
wire-pair1
DADM
RATI (DK424 only)
40 ohms
1000 ft. (303 m)
20 ohms
500 ft. (152 m)
300 ohms
Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with
150 ohm device.2
600 ohms
Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m)
with 150 ohm device.2
1,200 ohms
Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m)
with 150 ohm device.2
1- or 2-pair
HDSS consoles
2-pair
Standard telephones, voice
mail, AA, etc.
1-pair
BRI-TE1 (S or U type)3
BRI-TA (S or U type)
Max. Distance
(KSU/Cabinet to Device)
3
1650 ft.
4-pair modular
100 ohms
1650 ft.
1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM,
OCA, Headset, or DIU.
2. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device.
3. ISDN station devices (telephones, fax machines, modems, etc.) are classified as Terminal Equipment (TE-1)
or Terminal Adapters (TAs). There are generally two models available for each particular device: S-type or
U-type.
112
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Appendix
Station Specifications
Table 40
Station Dimensions
Device
Height
Width
Depth
10-button Digital Telephone with Handsfree Answerback (DKT2010-H)
3.3 inches
(85 mm)1
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
10-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone and Liquid Crystal
Display (DKT2010-SD)
3.8 inches
(97 mm)1
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
20-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone (DKT2020-S)
3.3 inches
(85 mm)1
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm
20-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone and Liquid Crystal
Display (DKT2020-SD)
3.8 inches
(97 mm)
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT2001)
3.8 inches
(97 mm)1
5.4 inches
(137 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Add-on Module (DADM)
3.3 inches
(85 mm)
2.8 inches
(71 mm)
9.0 inches
(229 mm)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
3.3 inches
(85 mm)
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS)
1.5 inches
(38 mm)
4.8 inches
(122 mm)
7.3 inches
(185 mm)
External Speaker Amplifier (HESB)
10.3 inches
(263 mm)
10.3 inches
(263 mm)
5.0 inches
(128 mm)
Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB)
4.6 inches
(117 mm)
5.5 inches
(140 mm)
1.5 inches
(38 mm)
Door Phone (MDFB)
5.5 inches
(140 mm)
3.1 inches
(79 mm)
1.3 inches
(33 mm)
Attendant Console Interface (RATI) (DK424 only)
1.5 inches
(38 mm)
4.8 inches
(122 mm)
7.3 inches
(185 mm)
Handset with Handset Cradle (RATHC) (DK424 only)
2.8 inches
(70 mm)
2.8 inches
(70 mm)
9.5 inches
(241 mm)
Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone Handset
6.0 inches
(152 mm)
2.3 inches
(58 mm)
1.0 inches
(25 mm)
Height
Width
Depth
Base (without antenna)
3.7 inches
(95 mm)
5.0 inches
(128 mm)
7.5 inches
(190 mm)
Handset (with antenna)
1.1 inches
(27 mm)
2.2 inches
(55 mm)
8.3 inches
(210 mm)
Base with handset (with antennas)
8.7 inches
(221 mm)
5.4 inches
(137 mm)
8.8 inches
(223 mm)
Digital Cordless Telephone (DKT2004-CT)
1. 4.1 inches (105 mm) with handset.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
113
Appendix
Station Specifications
Table 41
System Tones
CO Line
Idle digital and electronic
telephones
Ring Tone Options
1
2
3
Direct Ring Call
500/640 Hz
1200/1500 Hz
800/1000 Hz
All tones are interrupted
at 10 Hz
Ring Transfer Call
540/760 Hz
1300/1780 Hz
860/1180 Hz
1-sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Busy station (queuing) to DKT/EKT
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
(twice or continuous 4 sec. apart)
Busy station transfer (camp-on) to DKT/EKT
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, one-time 1 sec. tone burst
(twice or continuous 4 sec. apart)
Standard telephone or voice mail port
20 Hz
Normal ring option
1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Camp-on tone options to standard telephone
No tone or two 160 msec. bursts of 1209 Hz 160 msec. apart, twice, 3 sec.
apart
Distinctive ring option (standard telephone)
0.4 sec. ON – 0.2 sec. OFF – 0.4 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
To busy station
480/620 Hz, 0.50 sec. ON – 0.50 sec. OFF
Tie or DISA line calls
Internal [DN] Calls (except for DKT-2004-CT)
Tone first (EKT/DKT ring signal)
500 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (twice or continuous)
A&C
Door phone
B
870 Hz, 1 sec./710 Hz, 0.5 sec. twice per ring (1 or 5 rings)
870 Hz, 0.5 sec./710 Hz, 0.5 sec. twice per ring (1 or 5 rings)
Alert Signal to idle telephone
Six - 160 msec. burst of 350/440 Hz, twice 1 sec. apart
Alert Signal to busy telephone
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON, twice, 1 sec. apart
Busy station transfer (camp-on) to DKT/EKT
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, one-time 1 sec. tone burst
(twice or continuous 3 sec. apart)
Busy Override/DND Override
2400 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (twice or continuous 3 sec. apart)
Dial Tone (internal)
350/440 Hz, continuous
Ringback Tone
440/480 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (once: voice first; continuous: ring first)
Busy Tone
480/620 Hz, 0.5 sec. ON – 0.5 sec. OFF
Reorder Tone
480/620 Hz, 0.25 sec. ON – 0.25 sec. OFF
Do Not Disturb
480/620 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON – 0.125 sec. OFF
Voice Page Warning
500 Hz, 1 sec. ON (via DKT/EKT telephone speaker)
Speaker OCA Warning
500 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via DKT/EKT telephone speaker)
Handset OCA Warning
350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. (via DKT handset)
Executive/Privacy Override Warning
440 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via handset or speaker)
Hold Recall
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 1 sec. OFF
Standard telephone ringing
20 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Standard telephone Busy Override
160 msec. burst of 1209 Hz, twice, 3 sec. apart
Standard telephone Camp-on tone
Two 160 msec. bursts of 1209 Hz, 160 msec. apart, twice, 3 sec. apart
Voice Mail Special Tones
Answer:
DTMF “A”
Disconnect:
DTMF “D”
Recall:
DTMF “B”
80 or 160 msec., dual tone
Special Confirmation Tones
Verified Account Code
confirmation tones (sent
only to the station that
enters the code, not to the
outside party)
Code valid
350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. ON
Code not valid
350/440 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON – 0.125 sec. OFF – 0.125 sec. ON
Station option programming confirmation tones
(Call Forward, Timed Reminders, etc.)
350/440 Hz, 1 sec. ON
Supervisor Monitoring Tone
350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. every 15 sec.
ACD
Queue Alarms
114
Alarm 1
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 0.5 sec. OFF
Alarm 2
2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, continuous
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Appendix
Station Specifications
Table 42
Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones
Subassembly
Host Telephone
Function
DVSU1
2000- and 1000-series
Digital Telephones
Provides interface for digital telephone to
receive Speaker OCA. Not required for
Handset/Headset OCA.
RPCI-DI1
2000-series Digital Telephones
Provides two modes of operation:
TAPI PC application interface and Data
Calling interface.
HVSU2
6500-series
Electronic Telephone
Provides interface for electronic telephone
to receive OCA.
HHEU
2000- and 1000-series Digital
Telephones. 6500- and 6005series Electronic Telephones
Provides interface for headset and Loud
Ringing Bell to telephone. Can be installed
with DVSU, RPCI-DI, or DADM.
DADM1
2000-series Digital Telephones
Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two
DADMs) additional feature buttons for
DSS, System or Station Speed Dial, or CO
line appearances.
Capacity per
Telephone
1
1 or 2
1. Only one of the following subassembly types is allowed per telephone: DVSU, RPCI-DI or DADM.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
115
Appendix
Station Specifications
Table 43
Data Interface Specifications
Item
Specifications
Terminal or personal
computer interface
specification
RS-232C (EIA)
Data transmission speed
Up to 19.2 kbps, asynchronous
V.24/V.28 (CCITT)
TAPI compatible (RPCI-DI only)
Flow control
Half and full duplex, utilizing RTS/CTS/CD control leads
Automatic dialing
Based on AT commands:
♦
Data speed of AT command is 300, 600, 2300, 2400, 4800, or 9600
♦
Data bit: 7 or 8 bits
♦
Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits
♦
Parity bit: even, odd, or no parity
Maximum distance: KSU to
DKT with integrated RPCIDI or stand-alone DIU
♦
With system power supply; 1000 feet with 2-pair (24 AWG)
♦
With battery back-up; 330 feet with 1-pair or 675 feet with 2-pair (24 AWG), or
1000 feet with external power to telephone
Number of wire pairs
1-pair or 2-pair (24 AWG)
LED indicators (stand-alone
DIU only)
Power: lights when power is on
Ready: lights when DTE and DIU are ready
Connect: lights when DIU is in transmission or ringing mode
Automatic disconnect timeout
Forced hang up when RPCI-DI or PDIU does not detect data on SD or RD within
nine minutes.
LSI technology (RPCI-D1/
PDIU-DS only)
♦
One-chip CPU with a clock frequency of 12.288 MHz
♦
Memory: ROM, 16KB; RAM, 512KB
♦
Ping-pong transmission: LSI with bearer transmission rate of 512kbps, 2B+Dtype link
Strata DK option
compatibility
Cabling/connectors
116
Digital telephones with integrated RPCI-DI:
♦
No DVSU (Speaker Off-hook Call Announce only)
♦
No Add-on Module
♦
Compatible with associated DDSS console
♦
Compatible with headset (HHEU)
♦
Desktop or wall mount compatible
♦
RPCI-DI, PDIU-DS to DTE/DCE device: 9-wires, 50 feet maximum, 24AWG:
compatible with RJ-45, 8-wire modular cable and RJ-45 to DB25 RS-232
modular adaptors
♦
Stand-alone DIU: RJ-11 modular connector
♦
Integrated RPCI-DI: connected inside digital telephone
♦
Stand-alone DIU jumper plugs enable straight wire connection to a DTE or
DCE device without null-modem cables or adaptors
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Glossary
Term
Definition
AA
Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs
incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts.
ABR
Automatic Busy Redial.
ACB
Automatic Callback.
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents.
The ACD Supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which
allows the Supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents.
ADM
Add-on Module—See DADM.
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion.
ANI
Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata
DK system over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance
telephone service companies.
B-channel
Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an ISDN line at
64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is a
logical, rather than physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI.
B8ZS
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution.
BGM
Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and
external speakers.
BLF
Busy Lamp Field.
BPS
Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It is used when describing the Data Interface Unit and modem operation.
BRI
Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface with
RJ-11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ-45 four pair S/T interface wiring. BRI is the a
smaller ISDN interface than PRI.
BSIA
Base Station Interface Adapter–Interface between the Strata Airlink™ Wireless Telephone
Base Stations and the host telephone system.
CESID
Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station or station
location which is sent to the CAMA trunk.
CLASS
Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local
telephone companies.
CLID or CND
Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or name of the
calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines. This
feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
117
Glossary
CO ~ HDCB
Term
118
Definition
CO
Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone
service (CO lines, E & M Tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate
geographical area.
CODECs
Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and
digital-to-analog conversions.
CSU
Channel Service Unit. Required between the DK PRI interface and the PRI line provider
interface in most locations of the U.S.
CNIS
Calling Number Identification Services—Caller ID for ISDN. CNIS is calling party information
for outgoing and incoming calls sent to the ISDN network.
DADM
Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital telephones to
provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for
Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line access.
D-channel
Used in ISDN. This channel transmit call control information (out-of-band signaling) for Bchannels. The D-channel is a logical, not physical channel.
DDCB
Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
DDSS
Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone
circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone.
DH
Distributed Hunt.
DID Line
Direct Inward Dialing line—Allows external callers to dial directly to an internal number.
DIL
Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular
extension or hunt group.
DISA
Direct Inward System Access—Enables an outside party to access the Strata DK system
internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or automated
attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing
CO lines for through system calling.
DKT
Digital Key Telephone.
[DN]
Directory Number.
DNIS
Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata
DK over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone
companies.
DSS
Direct Station Selection—Enables a telephone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM
user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button.
DTMF
Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing.
DVSU
A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Off-hook
Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA).
EKT
Electronic Key Telephone.
ESF
Extended Super Frame.
FIFO
First-In, First-Out.
HDCB
Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Glossary
HDSS ~ RAM
Term
Definition
HDSS
Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic
telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones.
HESB
External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide
a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM) speaker.
HHEU
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a
6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be
connected to the telephone.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network. ISDN service requires service subscription from a telco
with ISDN equipment. It allows digital information to be exchanged directly at each end of the
line, without the need to convert analog to digital signals. Connection speeds are faster and
audio quality is superior.
LATA
Local Access and Transport Area.
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that
displays calling information.
LCR
Least Cost Routing.
LSI
Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed
circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design.
MDF
Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet.
MDFB
Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option.
MOH
Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold
on CO lines or the intercom.
NFAS
Non-facility Associated Signaling—provides the ability to create ISDN trunk groups beyond
the 23 channels available with a single Primary Rate Interface.
NT-1
Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables
multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified
(Canada).
OCA
Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public
telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO).
PCB
Printed Circuit Board.
[PDN]
Primary Directory Number.
PF
Power Failure.
[PhDN]
Phantom Directory Number.
PRI
Primary Rate Interface—A trunk interface to the ISDN network, which enables multiple use of
channels for DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. It supports multiple services and dynamic channel
allocation. PRI is the larger ISDN interface (via the RPTU) with 23B+D transmission format.
Channels are 64-kbps. Also see BRI.
PSAP
Public Safety Answering Point—Used for E911 calls.
RAM
Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system
configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily
revised in programming.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
119
Glossary
ROM ~ U Interface
Term
120
Definition
ROM
Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software
engineers.
[SDN]
Secondary Directory Number.
SF
Super Frame.
SLT
Single-line Telephone.
SMDI
Simplified Message Desk Interface—RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or RSIU
modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration.
SMDR
Station Message Detail Reporting.
SMIS
Software Management Information System (SMIS).
S/T Interface
Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are
RJ-45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network Utype BRI lines to S/T type interfaces.
TAPI
Telephone Application Programming Interface.
TA
Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal
that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ-11 voice ports and RS-232C or V.35 or
V.449 data interfaces.
TE
Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes,
computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type interfaces.
TSPI
Telephony Service Provider Interface.
U Interface
A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ-11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with
different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line.
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Index
Symbols
48v loop voltage, 37
automatic
busy redial, 90
call distribution, 62
callback, 90
hold, 90
line selection, 91
number identification, 63
release from hold, 64
A
B
AA, 12, 62
abandoned call numbers, 61
ABR, 90
ACB, 90
account code button, 90
account codes, 61
ACD, 62
add-on modules, 90
capacities, 89
administration software, 83
alarm sensor, 62
alert signal button, 90, 100
alternate answer point, 62
amplified conference, 88
interface, 62
ANI, 63, 88
ANI/caller ID, 100
answer
button, 102
priority, 102
prompting, 102
attendant console (see PC attendant console)
auto attendant, 62
DK14 feature key, 4
DK40i feature key, 12
DK424 feature key, 21
simultaneous announcements, 88
auto day/night mode switching, 102
auto dialing, 102
background music, 64
with station control, 91
base cabinet, 19
basic rate interface (see BRI, see also ISDN)
BGM, 64, 91
BRI, 39, 40, 40, 73
busy lamp field display, 102
busy override, 91
busy station transfer/busy station ringing, 91
[DN], 95
[PDN], 77, 88
[PhDN], 77
[SDN], 77
Numerics
Strata DK General Description
5/99
C
cabling, 60
call forwarding
all calls, 91
busy, 92
busy/no answer, 92
external call, 92
fixed, 92
no answer, 92
call park orbits, 88
auto park, 93
park and page, 92
call pickup, 93, 100
call transfer
immediate, 93
recall, 94
unrestricted to DNS, 85
with camp-on, 93
call waiting count, 103
121
Index
D~D
caller ID, 12, 65, 88
interface unit, 37
lines (see also BRI, PRI lines)
calling number identification services, 75
CAMA trunk, 40
centrex ringing repeat, 65
centrex/PBX
compatible, 65
features, 94
CNIS, 75
abandoned call numbers, 88
CO line, 9
capacities, 89
groups, 88
CO line/digital telephone interface, 36
CO private lines, 98
color CRT display, 103
common control units, 20
computer telephony integration (CTI), 66
conferencing, 67, 88, 94
connectors, 60
continuous DTMF tone, 94
cordless digital telephone, 54, 89, 100
credit card calling, 67
D
DADM, 53, 90
data call button, 94
data switching, 67
day/night modes, 67
DDCB, 59
DDSS, 58, 94
delayed ringing, 67
DH, 82, 88
diagnostics and troubleshooting
system, 18, 33
dial “o” for attendant, 103
dial outside number for station user, 103
dialed number identification service, 68
DID, 38, 68
lines, 89
digital
add-on module, 53
single line telephone (see DKT2001)
telephones, 48
features, 90, 100
interface unit, 35
system capacities, 89
upgrade options, 53
digital/standard telephone interface unit, 35
122
direct inward dialing
interface unit, 38
lines, 68
direct inward system access, 69
direct station selection, 103
button, 94
console, 58, 94
directory
display and dialing, 103
number buttons, 95
DISA, 69
security code revision, 95
distinctive
CO line/directory number ringing, 69
LED color indications, 95
station ringing, 95
distributed hunt, 82, 88
DK14, 1
base KSUarchitecture, 2
digital telephone circuits, 2
features, 61
functional block diagram, 6
maintenance and programming, 8
power failure interface, 4
power supply, 4
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 7
typical line configurations, 5
DK40i, 9
base KSU
architecture, 11
caller ID, 12
CO line circuits, 11
digital telephone circuits, 11
expansion KSUarchitecture, 14
features, 61
functional block diagram, 16
interface PCB options, 44
line configurations, 14
maintenance and programming, 17
power failure interface, 14
power supply, 13
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 17
DK424, 19, 109
architecture, 19
features, 61
floor mount hardware, 28
functional block diagram, 29
interface PCB options, 45
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Index
E~I
maintenance and programming, 32
maximum line capacities, 22
PCBsubassemblies, 21
peripherals, 52
power requirements, 26
printed circuit boards, 21
release 3.2, 101
release 4.0, 64, 68, 69, 73, 83, 84
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 32
DKAdmin, 8, 17, 32, 83
DK-PCATT, 57
DKT2001, 49, 100
DKT2004-CT, 54, 89
DNIS, 68, 88
do not disturb, 95
override, 95
door locks, 89
door phones, 59, 69, 89
lock control unit, 59
DP/DTMF mode change, 95
DSS, 94, 103
DTMF
back tone, 70
dial pulse CO line compatible, 70
receiver subassembly, 21
signal time, 70
signaling from dial pad, 103
DTMF/ABR tone detection receiver, 12
DVSU, 54
E
E&M tie line unit, 38
E911 cama trunk
interface unit (RMCU), 40
subassembly (RCMS), 40
E911 CAMA trunk, 40
electronic telephone
features, 90, 100
interface unit, 36
system capacities, 89
emergency
calls and paging, 103
enhanced 911 service, 70
EOCU, 36
exclusive hold, 95
executive override, 96
expansion
cabinets, 19
expansion KSU, 14
Strata DK General Description
5/99
external
page interface unit, 44
page zones, 71
speaker (HESB), 59
telephone network numbers, 68
external page zones, 88
F
feature prompting with soft keys, 96
features, 61
PC attendant console, 102
station, 90
system, 61
flash button, 96
flexible
button assignments, 71
directory numbers, 71
line ringing assignment, 71
programmable buttons, 104
relay contacts, 5
functional block diagram, 6, 16, 29
G
ground/loop start interface CO line interface
unit, 38
group paging, 71
H
handset OCA stations, 89
handsfree
answerback, 96
directory number paths, 72
headset operation, 104
headset/loud ringing bell interface, 53
hearing aid compatible, 96
HESB, 59
HHEU, 53
HMIS, 72
hold
button, 104
timer display, 104
hospitality management information system (see
HMIS)
I
incoming call
identification, 104
statistics, 104
integrated PC Iinterface, 53
integrated services digital network (see ISDN)
interposition call transfer, 105
123
Index
J~P
ISDN, 73
basic rate interface unit (RBSU), 39, 40
subassembly (RSSS), 39
subassembly (RSSS), 40
BRI S/T or S-type circuits (TBSU), 12
BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA, 89
BRI, PRI channel lines, 89
primary rate interface unit (RPTU), 39
J
join button, 105
K
K5RCU3, 12
KCDU, 36
keyboard or mouse operation, 105
KKYS1, 12
KSTU2, 12
L
LCD
features, 96
telephones, 50
least cost routing, 75
line
capacities, 5, 14, 22
groups, 76
queuing, 76
live system programming, 76
load sharing, 105
loop hold display, 105
loop start CO line interface, 38
subassembly, 38
M
maintenance
DK14, 8
DK40i, 17
DK424, 32
DKAdmin/modem (TTY) interface, 12
MDFB, 59
memory protection, 76
message center, 105
message waiting, 76
buttons, 78
microphone cut-off button, 96
modem button, 96
modular
handset and line cords, 96
headset, 97
MOH, 5, 78
124
multiple directory numbers
PDN, SDN, PhDN, 77
multiple FCC registration, 78
multi-tasking, 105
music-on-hold, 78
interface, 5
N
name/number dialing, 106
night ringing over
external page, 78
selected page zones, 78
non-blocking talk paths, 78
non-facility associated signaling (NFAS), 74
O
OCA speaker, 89
off-hook call announce, 89
handset mode, 97
speaker mode, 54, 97
upgrade unit, 36
off-premises stations, 78, 89
on-hook dialing, 97
option interface unit, 43
outgoing call restriction, 79
overflow calls, 106
overriding calls, 106
P
paging
external zones, 88
groups, 71, 88
interface, 5
max. simultaneous stations, 88
PC
applications, 99
attendant console, 57
conference setup, 102
features, 102
interface unit, 37
on-line help, 104
soft keys, 104
system capacities, 89
digital telephone, 56
PCB, 21
circuits, interface options and connectors, 40
CO line, 37
console, 37
option interface, 43
station, 35
universal slot, 35
Strata DK General Description
5/99
Index
Q~S
PC-DKT, 56
PC-telephone interface (RPCI-DI), 98
PDIU-DS, 54, 89
PDKU2, 35
PEKU, 36
PEPU, 44
peripherals, 52
customer-supplied, 111
specifications, 60
PESU, 36
PhDN, 77, 88
PhDN/MW, 78
pickup groups, 88
PIOU, 43
pooled line button, 79, 98
position busy mode, 106
power failure transfer, 79
PRI, 39, 73
primary rate interface (see PRI‚ see also ISDN)
privacy/non-privacy, 79
programming
DK14, 8
DK40i, 17
DK424, 32
push-button dialing, 98
release
3.2, 94, 101
4.0, 64, 68, 69, 73, 83, 84
button, 98, 106
release/answer button, 98
remote
administration/maintenance, 80
retrieval of held/parked calls, 98
REMU, 38
repeat last number dialed, 98
reserve power, 80
DK14, 4
RGLU2, 38
ringing line preference, 98
RMCU, 40, 41
RPCI, 98
RPCI-DI, 53, 89
RPTU2, 40
RRCS, 21
RSIU, 46
RSSU, 45
RSTS, 35
RSTU2, 36
RWIU, 43
Q
saved number redial, 98
[SDN], 77
serial hunting, 81
serial interface unit, 46
simplified message desk interface (see SMDI)
single serial interface unit, 45
SMDI, 80
SMDR, 12
speaker
OCA stations, 89
off-hook call announce, 54
speakerphones, 51
speed dial, 81
buttons, 99
from PC attendant console, 106
system capacities, 88
split/switch button, 107
stand-alone data interface unit, 54
standard telephone, 89
features, 100
interface units
KSTU2, 12
RSTU2, 36
subassembly, 35
QCDU2, 3
QKYS1, 3
QRCU3, 3
QSTU2, 3
R
R48S, 37
RATU, 37
RBSU, 40
RBUU, 41
RCIS, 37
RCIU2, 37
RCMS, 40
RCOS, 38
RCOU, 38
RDDU, 38
RDSU, 35
RDTU, 38
RDTU2, 41
relay service, 79
external page/door lock control relay, 80
night relay/hold relay, 80
Strata DK General Description
5/99
S
125
Index
T~W
standard/electronic telephone interface unit, 36
station lines, 9
station message detail recording (see SMDR)
stations
dimensions, 113
features, 90, 100
hunting, 81
relocation, 82
specifications, 60
status window, 18, 33
Strata AirLink
cabling, 60
interface unit, 43
troubleshooting, 33
wireless handset, 55
StrataControl, 82
Stratagy DK, 59
StrataLink, 66
system
features, 61
programming, 83
technology, 7
troubleshooting, 18, 33
TSIU, 12
TSPI, 66
U
universal slots, 89
PCBs, 35
user programmable feature buttons, 99
V
verified account codes, 88
voice first/tone signaling, 85
voice mail, 68
integration, 85
SMDI, 88
voice processing
Stratagy DK, 59
volume control, 107
W
windows
PC operation, 107
compatibility, 99
wireless handset (see Strata Airlink)
WSIU1, 3
T
T1/DS-1
interface unit, 38
lines, 89
tandem CO line connections, 83
TBSU, 12
TCIU2, 12
TE-1, 39
telephone application programming interface
(TAPI), 66, 99
telephones
DKT, 48, 89
DKT2004-CT (cordless), 54
EKT, 89
features, 90, 100
wireless handset, 55
tenants, 84, 88
three-way calling, 107
through dialing, 107
tie lines, 84, 89
timed reminders, 99
toll restriction, 84, 88
override codes, 99
transfer direct to voice mail, 107
traveling class of service, 85
trunk group busy indication and control, 107
126
Strata DK General Description
5/99
726+,%$
Telecommunication Systems Division
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
Feature Description
Manual
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.1
Software Releases 4.0, 4.1, 4.2
May 1999
Strata DK
General End User Information
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission’s Rules and Regulations.
Important Notice – Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the
music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the
failure to obtain such a license.
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication
Systems Division, reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise
this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited
to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to
simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
Telecommunication Systems Division, also reserves the right, without
prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or
components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.
Version D, May 1999
Version C, November 1998
Version B, May 1998
Version A, March 1996
© Copyright 1999
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights
hereon, may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying,
or information retrieval systems—without express written permission
of the publisher of this material.
Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a
registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Strata AirLink, Call Center Viewer, Insight DK and Insight DK Plus
are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property
of their respective owners.
Contents
Introduction
Organization..........................................................................................................................................vii
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................viii
Related Documents ................................................................................................................................. x
Chapter 1 – System Overview
Strata DK14............................................................................................................................................. 1
Strata DK40i............................................................................................................................................ 1
Strata DK424........................................................................................................................................... 1
Migration................................................................................................................................................. 2
System Capacities ................................................................................................................................... 2
Feature Availability................................................................................................................................. 4
System Administration Tools................................................................................................................ 10
Chapter 2 – Features
System Features .................................................................................................................................... 15
Account Codes................................................................................................................................ 16
Alarm Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 18
Alternate Answer Point .................................................................................................................. 19
Amplified Conference .................................................................................................................... 20
Auto Attendant ............................................................................................................................ 21
Automatic Hold Recall ................................................................................................................... 23
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)........................................................................................ 24
Automatic Release From Hold ....................................................................................................... 26
Background Music (BGM) Interface.............................................................................................. 27
Caller Identification (ID) .............................................................................................................. 28
Centrex/PBX Compatibility ........................................................................................................... 30
Centrex Ringing Repeat.................................................................................................................. 31
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) ......................................................................................... 32
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 35
Credit Card Calling (“0+” Dialing) ................................................................................................ 36
Delayed Ringing ............................................................................................................................. 37
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) .............................................................................. 38
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ......................................................................................................... 41
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................................................................... 42
Distinctive CO Line/Internal Ringing ............................................................................................ 43
Door Lock Control ......................................................................................................................... 44
Door Phone ..................................................................................................................................... 45
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible .................................................................................. 46
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
i
Contents
Features
DTMF Signal Time Setting ............................................................................................................ 47
E911 Enhanced Operation ............................................................................................................. 48
External Amplified Speaker .......................................................................................................... 50
Flexible Button Assignment ........................................................................................................... 51
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering.................................................................................................. 53
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment................................................................................................. 54
Flexible Slot Assignment................................................................................................................ 55
Ground Start Lines ......................................................................................................................... 56
Hotline Service (Emergency Ringdown)........................................................................................ 57
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ................................................................................................... 58
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)................................................................................................ 61
Least Cost Routing (LCR).............................................................................................................. 64
Line Call Pickup Groups ................................................................................................................ 65
Line Groups .................................................................................................................................... 66
Line Queuing .................................................................................................................................. 67
Live System Programming ............................................................................................................. 68
Memory Protection ......................................................................................................................... 69
Message Waiting ............................................................................................................................ 70
Multiple Directory Numbers (DNs) ............................................................................................... 72
Multiple FCC Registration ............................................................................................................. 74
Multiple Simultaneous Handsfree Intercom Paths ......................................................................... 75
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface ................................................................................................... 76
Night Ringing Answer Code .......................................................................................................... 77
Night Ringing Over External Page................................................................................................. 78
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zone........................................................................................ 79
Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes) ................................................................................................ 80
Non-blocking Dialing ..................................................................................................................... 81
Off-premises Station (OPS)............................................................................................................ 82
Outgoing Call Restriction............................................................................................................... 83
Paging - All Call Voice Page.......................................................................................................... 84
Paging - External Page Interface .................................................................................................... 85
Paging - External Zone Paging....................................................................................................... 86
Paging - Group Paging ................................................................................................................... 87
Pooled CO Lines............................................................................................................................. 88
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................................................................... 89
Privacy/Non-privacy Option........................................................................................................... 90
Relay Service.................................................................................................................................. 91
Remote Administration/Maintenance ............................................................................................ 92
Reserve Power Battery Backup Interface....................................................................................... 93
Speed Dial (SD).............................................................................................................................. 94
Station Hunting............................................................................................................................... 96
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ................................................................................. 98
Station Relocation......................................................................................................................... 101
System Programming Through Station ........................................................................................ 102
Tandem CO Line Connection (Trunk-to-Trunk) ......................................................................... 103
Tenant Service .............................................................................................................................. 105
Tie Lines ...................................................................................................................................... 106
Toll Restriction ............................................................................................................................. 107
Toll Restriction Override Codes................................................................................................... 109
Toll Restriction Override Using System Speed Dial.................................................................... 110
ii
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Contents
Features
Transfer Privacy ........................................................................................................................... 111
Traveling Class of Service............................................................................................................ 112
T1 Interface................................................................................................................................... 113
Voice Mail Interface .................................................................................................................... 114
Voice or Tone Signaling............................................................................................................... 117
Wall or Table Mounting ............................................................................................................... 118
Station Features................................................................................................................................... 119
Alert Signal Button....................................................................................................................... 120
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) .................................................................................................... 121
Automatic Callback (Internal Calls)............................................................................................. 122
Automatic Hold ............................................................................................................................ 123
Automatic Off-hook Line Selection ............................................................................................ 124
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control ......................................................................... 125
Busy Override Tone...................................................................................................................... 127
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing................................................................................ 128
Call Forward ................................................................................................................................. 129
Call Park ....................................................................................................................................... 132
Call Pickup ................................................................................................................................... 133
Call Pickup Groups....................................................................................................................... 134
Call Transfer with Camp-on ......................................................................................................... 135
Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons ...................................................................................................... 136
Continuous DTMF Signal Time ................................................................................................... 137
Data Buttons ................................................................................................................................. 138
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons........................................................................................ 139
Distinctive LED Indicators........................................................................................................... 140
Distinctive Station Ringing .......................................................................................................... 141
Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................................................................................................. 142
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.................................................................................................. 143
Dial Pulse/DTMF Mode Change.................................................................................................. 144
Exclusive Hold ............................................................................................................................. 145
Executive Override ....................................................................................................................... 146
Flash Button.................................................................................................................................. 147
Handsfree Answerback on Intercom ............................................................................................ 148
Hearing-aid Compatible ............................................................................................................... 149
LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging.................................................................................................. 150
LCD - Automatic Callback Number Display ............................................................................... 151
LCD - Busy Lamp Field Indication.............................................................................................. 152
LCD - Busy Station Messaging .................................................................................................... 153
LCD - Call Duration Display........................................................................................................ 154
LCD - Call Forward Source/Destination Display......................................................................... 155
LCD - Calling/Called Number Display ........................................................................................ 156
LCD - Called Station Messaging.................................................................................................. 157
LCD - Calling Station Messaging ................................................................................................ 158
LCD - Clock/Calendar Display .................................................................................................... 159
LCD - CO Line Identification ...................................................................................................... 160
LCD - Dialed Number Display..................................................................................................... 161
LCD - Feature Prompting with Soft Key Operation..................................................................... 162
LCD - Message Waiting Display.................................................................................................. 163
LCD - Recalling Station Identification.........................................................................................164
LCD - Remote/Group Station Messaging .................................................................................... 165
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
iii
Contents
Strata AirLink
LCD - Speed Dial Memo Directory Dialing ................................................................................ 166
LCD - Station Identification ......................................................................................................... 167
LCD - Timed Reminders .............................................................................................................. 168
LCD - User Name/Number Display ............................................................................................. 169
Message Waiting .......................................................................................................................... 170
Microphone Control Buttons ........................................................................................................ 171
Modular Handset and Line Cords................................................................................................. 172
Modular Headset Interface ........................................................................................................... 173
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) .................................................................................................. 174
On-hook Dialing ........................................................................................................................... 176
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI) ..................................................................................... 177
Pooled CO Line Buttons............................................................................................................... 178
Privacy Button .............................................................................................................................. 179
Privacy Override........................................................................................................................... 180
Privacy Release Button................................................................................................................. 181
Private CO Lines .......................................................................................................................... 182
Pushbutton Dialing ....................................................................................................................... 183
Release Button.............................................................................................................................. 184
Release/Answer Button ................................................................................................................ 185
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls.................................................................................................... 186
Repeat Last Number Dialed ......................................................................................................... 187
Ringing Line Preference............................................................................................................... 188
Saved Number Redial................................................................................................................... 189
Speed Dial (SD) Button................................................................................................................ 190
Timed Reminder ........................................................................................................................... 191
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision ..................................................................................... 192
User Programmable Feature Buttons............................................................................................ 193
Chapter 3 – Strata AirLink
System Components............................................................................................................................ 195
Handset Features ................................................................................................................................. 203
FCN Feature Access ..................................................................................................................... 204
Flash Button.................................................................................................................................. 205
Lock/Unlock the Dial Pad ............................................................................................................ 206
Menu Operation............................................................................................................................ 207
Mute.............................................................................................................................................. 208
Speed Dial..................................................................................................................................... 209
Volume Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 210
Chapter 4 – PC Attendant Console
Features ............................................................................................................................................... 211
Operation............................................................................................................................................. 213
PC Requirements................................................................................................................................. 214
Windows PC Operation....................................................................................................................... 214
Applications ........................................................................................................................................ 214
PC Attendant Console Features .......................................................................................................... 216
Answer Button.............................................................................................................................. 217
Answer Priority............................................................................................................................. 218
Answer Prompting........................................................................................................................ 219
Attendant Conference Setup......................................................................................................... 220
iv
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Contents
Automatic Call Distribution
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching................................................................................................. 221
Auto Dialing ................................................................................................................................. 222
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ............................................................................................................... 223
Call Waiting Count....................................................................................................................... 224
Color CRT Display....................................................................................................................... 225
Dial “0” for Attendant .................................................................................................................. 226
Dial Outside Number for Station User ......................................................................................... 227
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ..................................................................................................... 228
Directory Display and Dialing...................................................................................................... 229
DTMF Tone Signaling.................................................................................................................. 230
Emergency Calls........................................................................................................................... 231
Emergency Page ........................................................................................................................... 232
Employee Profile Information ...................................................................................................... 233
Feature Online Help...................................................................................................................... 234
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ............................................................................................... 235
Flexible Programmable Buttons ................................................................................................... 236
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................................ 237
Hold Button .................................................................................................................................. 238
Hold Timer Display ...................................................................................................................... 239
Incoming Call Identification......................................................................................................... 240
Incoming Call Statistics................................................................................................................ 241
Interposition Call Transfer............................................................................................................ 242
Join Button.................................................................................................................................... 243
Keyboard or Mouse Operation ..................................................................................................... 244
Load Sharing................................................................................................................................. 245
Loop Hold Display ....................................................................................................................... 246
Message Center............................................................................................................................. 247
Multitasking.................................................................................................................................. 248
Name or Number Dialing ............................................................................................................. 249
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 250
Override ........................................................................................................................................ 251
Park and Page ............................................................................................................................... 252
Position Busy................................................................................................................................ 253
Release Button.............................................................................................................................. 254
Reminder Notes ............................................................................................................................ 255
Split/Switch Button....................................................................................................................... 256
Speed Dial Calling........................................................................................................................ 257
Three-way Calling ........................................................................................................................ 258
Through Dialing ........................................................................................................................... 259
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail ...................................................................................................... 260
Trunk Group Control .................................................................................................................... 261
Volume Control ............................................................................................................................ 262
Chapter 5 – Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation ................................................................................................................................... 263
ACD System Features ......................................................................................................................... 269
After Shift Service ........................................................................................................................ 270
Automatic Disconnect .................................................................................................................. 271
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)...................................................................................... 272
Call Distribution ........................................................................................................................... 273
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
v
Contents
Hospitality Management Information System
Caller ID ....................................................................................................................................... 274
Data Collection and Reporting ..................................................................................................... 275
Delay Announcements and Music................................................................................................ 276
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)............................................................................. 277
Inbound Call Routing ................................................................................................................... 278
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 279
PBX Calls ..................................................................................................................................... 281
Queuing ........................................................................................................................................ 282
Queue Alarm Timer...................................................................................................................... 283
ACD Agent Features ........................................................................................................................... 284
ACD, PBX, and Non-ACD Calls ................................................................................................. 285
ACD Call Pickup .......................................................................................................................... 286
ACD Display Information ............................................................................................................ 287
ACD Help ..................................................................................................................................... 288
After Call Work Time................................................................................................................... 289
Auto Answer with Zip Tone......................................................................................................... 290
Log In/Log Out............................................................................................................................. 291
Unavailable Mode......................................................................................................................... 292
Work Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 293
ACD Supervisor Features ................................................................................................................... 294
ACD Agent Assistance................................................................................................................. 295
ACD Call Pickup .......................................................................................................................... 296
ACD Supervisor LCD Display ..................................................................................................... 297
ACD Supervisor Log In/Log Out ................................................................................................. 298
Call Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 299
End of ACD Shift ......................................................................................................................... 300
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus................................................................................................... 301
General Features.................................................................................................................................. 308
Insight DK Features ............................................................................................................................ 310
Insight DK Plus ................................................................................................................................... 311
MIS Access................................................................................................................................... 317
Queue Alarm Indication ............................................................................................................... 318
ACD Feature Interaction ..................................................................................................................... 319
Assistance From Busy Supervisor................................................................................................ 320
Call Forwarding............................................................................................................................ 321
Executive/Busy Override.............................................................................................................. 322
Message and Display .................................................................................................................... 323
Station Do Not Disturb (DND)..................................................................................................... 324
ACD Call Center Viewer.............................................................................................................. 325
ACD Software MIS (SMIS) ......................................................................................................... 332
Chapter 6 – Hospitality Management Information System
Hardware Configurations ........................................................................................................ ............ 345
Connection Requirements ........................................................................................................ ........... 347
Main Screen .................................................................................................................... .................... 347
Glossary................................................................................................................................................. 351
Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 355
vi
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Introduction
This manual pertains to features and capabilities of Strata DK14 Release 1, DK40i Release 1, and
DK424 Release 4 digital business telephone systems. Each feature profile includes:
♦
System Availability – indicates whether a feature is standard, optional or available only on
certain Strata systems.
♦
Description – gives a detailed description of the feature.
♦
Benefits – provides an overview of benefits when using the feature either alone or with other
Strata features.
Organization
This manual is divided into the following chapters:
♦
Chapter 1 – System Overview outlines basic categories and options for Strata features.
Multiple tables provide hardware and software capacities and all the available features.
♦
Chapter 2 – Features provides all of the available features in the Strata DK systems in
alphabetical order.
♦
Chapter 3 – Strata AirLink™ outlines the basic concepts of the analog and digital wireless
systems and describes the components and configuration software. For detailed information,
refer to the Strata Airlink Installation and User Guides, and Strata DK I&M (Chapter 16) and
General Description Manuals.
♦
Chapter 4 – PC Attendant Console provides an alphabetical list by feature name, a profile
for each Strata DK424 Personal Computer (PC) Attendant Console feature.
♦
Chapter 5 – Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) details the various features and options
available with ACD applications.
♦
Chapter 6 – Hospitality Management Information System provides an overview of HMIS
capabilities. For detailed feature information, refer to the HMIS User Guide and HMIS
General Description.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
iii
Conventions
Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Note
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within
some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered
notes apply to specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
CAUTION!
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data
could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING!
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or
death.
[DN]
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an
extension or intercom number.
[PDN]
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
number for the telephone).
[SDN]
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which
appears on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional
DN).
$ULDO#%ROG
Courier
Helvetica Bold
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
Represents LCD displays, tokens or custom IVR functions. For
example: M ( ).
“Type”
Indicates entry of a string of text.
“Press”
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then
press Enter.
Plus (+)
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries
without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry.
Example: Esc + Enter. Entries with spaces between them show
a sequential entry. Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.
➤
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
➤
Denotes a procedure.
See Figure 10
iv
Represents telephone buttons.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
electronic version of this document (Strata DK Library CD-ROM
or FYI Internet download), cross-references appear in blue
hypertext.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Conventions
Introduction
Action/Response Table
1. Actions you perform
appear in this column.
They can consist of
either a single step or a
series of numbered
steps.
The immediate response to the action performed appears in this
column. Addtional notes and comments are also included.
2765
2. When the action you
perform results in a
screen, menu, dialog
box, etc., the example to
the right displays.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
v
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Note
vi
Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI, or in
print. To compare and find the most current version, check the document title page.
♦
Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It
also includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console.
♦
Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently used
digital telephone features.
♦
Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
the Toshiba DKT2001 telephone features.
♦
Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshibaproprietary electronic telephones including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata
DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console.
♦
Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently used
electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system.
♦
Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial
and push-button standard telephones.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to Strata DK telephone system Strata DK telephone system and many nonToshiba systems.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset Quick Reference Guide contains instructions
for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features.
♦
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system.
♦
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset Quick Reference Guide contains instructions
for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features.
♦
System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage a
system. Contains instructions for station relocation, system Speed Dial, and other features only
activated by the System Administrator.
♦
PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand alone
data interface units while in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also
provides instructions for connecting to a PC with Telephone Application Programming
Interface (TAPI).
♦
Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless
digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone.
♦
PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal
Computer Digital Key Telephone system.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
♦
DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide describes how to use the DK Admin/DK Backup
interactive software applications, which enable you to easily and quickly custom program and/
or update the Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 with a user friendly PC display. It also describes
how to backup and restore existing Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 system data using the
programs.
♦
Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing
package which enables you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK
2000-series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60button digital DSS consoles.
♦
Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the Strata
DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems and system record sheets including ACD. The Strata
AirLink wireless systems are included throughout the manual.
♦
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes ISDN, T1/DS1 interface installation and configuration instructions, and troubleshooting. Additional
chapters are: ACD, providing installation instructions; Strata AirLink, providing installation
instructions for the standard- and digital-port configurations of the wireless system.
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step
installation instructions for the Base Station Interface Adapter (BSIA) system, including
system configurations examples, site surveys, and troubleshooting techniques.
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an
overall view of the hardware, software, applications and features.
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s
many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them.
♦
The following applies only to the Strata DK424.
♦
Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview,
including hardware and feature information.
♦
ACD Agent Guide describes the ACD agent feature operation along with step-by-step
procedures for using features.
♦
ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features.
♦
Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer
application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status
information.
♦
Insight DK Installation Guide provides installation instructions for Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus Management Information System (MIS) application onto server and client
PCs. Also included are software installation instructions for electronic wallboards and the
inView™ LAN display application.
♦
Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus MIS for the call center Supervisor.
♦
Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and
customizing the on-screen wallboard and large character views of the real time call center
data.
♦
Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions
on using the Software MIS application.
♦
Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications
for Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424 digital business telephone systems.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
vii
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
♦
Insight DK CD-ROM contains the Insight DK software and upgrade to Insight DK Plus
software, demo software and instructions, as well as all Insight DK documentation and a
training module.
♦
StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software and documentation and enables
viewing, downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC.
♦
Strata DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote software and documentation and enables
viewing, downloading, editing, and uploading of DKQuote data to a PC.
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) CD-ROM describes HMIS,
including installation, the Setup Utility, maintaining the HMIS databases and software, and
troubleshooting.
Note
viii
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all Strata DK
documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
1
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 are digital business telephone systems that are electronically
compatible with the public telephone network and can function in PBX or Centrex environments.
Each system can be configured as key or hybrid (DK424 PBX also) with separate Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) registration numbers. Feature capabilities are very similar.
The primary difference between models is capacity. Each system and station feature is described
completely, beginning on Pages 15 and 119 respectively.
Strata DK14
The Strata DK14 uses a compact, single cabinet, wall mount design. It provides built-in circuitry
for two CO lines and four digital stations. It can be expanded to a maximum capacity of four CO
lines and ten stations (eight digital telephone stations and two standard stations).
Strata DK40i
The Strata DK40i uses a compact, double cabinet (base plus expansion), wall mount design. It
provides capacity for four CO lines, eight digital stations, and four standard stations in the base
cabinet. With the expansion cabinet, it has a maximum capacity of 12 CO lines and 28 stations.
Strata DK424
The Strata DK424 uses a modular, building block system design that can be configured using from
one to seven cabinets (base cabinet and up to six expansion cabinets). This enables customers to
grow cost effectively from small to large configurations. They can reuse common equipment by
adding options rather than replacing existing hardware. The only part they potentially replace is
the processor, depending upon the size they start with or grow to.
There are four DK424 processor models available having different degrees of capacity, capability,
and price. The processors are:
♦
RCTUA small system processor – for one-cabinet configurations not requiring some of the
advanced features, such as ACD/MIS, PRI, T1 Interface, Attendant Console, or System Open
Architecture Interface (OAI). It provides a maximum capacity for 16 CO lines and 32 stations.
♦
RCTUBA/BB medium system processor – for one- or two-cabinet configurations and
supports all of the advanced features, such as ACD/MIS, PRI, T1 Interface, Attendant
Console, and System OAI. It provides a maximum capacity for 48 CO lines or 80 stations.
♦
RCTUC/D large system processor – for up to six-cabinet configurations and supports all of
the advanced features. It provides a maximum capacity for 144 CO lines or 240 stations.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
1
System Overview
Migration
♦
RCTUE/F maximum system processor – for up to seven-cabinet configurations and supports
all of the advanced features. It provides a maximum capacity for 200 CO lines or 336 stations.
Migration
An important aspect of the Toshiba product line strategy is cost-effective migration from smaller
to larger systems. This includes reusing as much of the existing equipment as possible.
All Strata DK systems use the same 2000-series digital telephones and wiring. This means a
customer growing from as small as a DK14 to as large as a DK424 can use the same telephones.
Older digital and electronic telephones are also compatible with Strata DK40i and DK424
systems. This means customers growing out of older Strata systems into current larger ones, can
reuse their existing electronic telephones.
Printed circuit boards from Strata DK24/56/96 systems can be reused in DK424 systems. This
includes CO line interface cards, station interface cards, and option cards. This means DK24/56/96
customers need only to buy a new processor and the appropriate number of cabinets to migrate to
the larger DK424.
Customers buy Toshiba telecommunication products knowing their investment is designed for
long-term use. Not only are they buying quality products that will last, but they can also grow and
expand cost effectively.
System Capacities
Table 1 is an overview of each system’s hardware capacities and Table 2 is an overview of each
system’s software capabilities.
Table 1
Hardware Capacities
Lines and PCB Slots
Universal slots
CO lines – loop start
DK14
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
0
DK40i
41
6
12
36
54
4
122
162
482
1442
2002
402
1362
2002
CO lines – ground start
0
12
162
DID lines (analog)
0
12
163
403
1363
2003
403
1363
2003
Tie lines (analog)
0
12
163
T1 (DS-1 lines each)
0
0
0
484
1444
1924
165
165
165
ISDN BRI B channel lines
0
12
85
ISDN PRI B channel lines
0
0
0
476
1416
1886
Squared-system maximum
(lines + stations)
4+4
12 + 12
16 + 16
48 + 48
144 + 144
200 + 200
Stations and Peripherals
2
DK424
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Add-on modules (DADM)
8
12
12
40
120
200
Attendant consoles
0
0
0
2
4
4
DKT2004-CT cordless telephones
8
28
32
80
240
336
DKT2004-CT simultaneous calls
8
9
9
9
9
9
Door locks
2
3
4
5
5
5
Door phones
6
9
9
12
12
12
DSS consoles
0
3
3
4
8
8
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
System Capacities
Hardware Capacities (continued)
Table 1
Stations and Peripherals
DK424
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
ISDN BRI station circuits
TE-1 and TA (2B + D per circuit)7
0
10
8
16
40
64
Handset OCA stations
8
28
32
80
240
336
Off-premises stations
2
20
32
80
232
328
PDIU-DS8
7
24
31
79
160
208
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per
system8
8
24
32
80
144
200
N/A
8
N/A
24
32
32
40
80
40
186
40
280
8
28
32
80
160
208
Standard stations
2
20
24
72
232
328
Telephones – DKT
8
289
3210
8010
24010
33610
Telephones – EKT
0
169
3210
8010
24010
32810
20
24
72
232
328
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only per:
Cabinet8
System8
♦
♦
Speaker OCA stations8
Strata AirLink wireless handsets
1.
2.
N/A
There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or
RCTUE/F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs.
3.
Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines.
4.
T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination).
5.
BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL).
6.
PRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, ANI, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL.
7.
ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/or TA) can
connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit.
8.
Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits.
9. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the
stations must be DKTs.
10. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation).
Table 2
System Software Capacities
Software
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Class of Srv. Toll Restriction Levels
4
4
4
4
8
8
Call Pickup CO Line Groups
2
2
2
2
4
4
Call Pickup Station Groups
8
20
20
20
20
20
Pooled CO Line Groups
4
8
8
8
16
16
Conference Parties
4
4
4
4
4
4
Simultaneous Conferences
2
4
3
7
7
14
Tandem CO Line Connections
2
4
4
10
10
20
System Speed Dial Numbers
40
40
40
100
100
800
Station Speed Dial Numbers
40
40
40
40
40
40
Speed Dial Digits
20
20
20
20
20
20
Speed Dial Digits Chained
37
37
37
37
37
37
Account Code Digits
4~15
4~15
4~15
4~15
4~15
4~15
Verified Account Codes
100
300
300
300
300
300
DISA Security Code Digits
1~15
1~15
1~15
1~15
1~15
1~15
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
3
System Overview
Feature Availability
System Software Capacities (continued)
Table 2
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
DNIS Numbers
N/A
N/A
200
350
500
500
Abandoned ANI/Caller ID Number
N/A
N/A
200
400
1000
2000
Primary Directory Numbers
N/A
N/A
32
80
240
336
Phantom (Multiple) Directory
Numbers
N/A
N/A
32
80
240
336
Software
Feature Availability
Refer to Tables 3~5 for features and services that are available for Strata DK systems.
Table 3
Strata DK System Feature Availability
Feature
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Account Codes-Forced
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Account Codes-Verifiable
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Account Codes-Voluntary
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Alarm Sensor
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Alternate Answer Point
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Amplified Conference
Interface
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Automated Attendant,
Built-in
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Auto Attendant
Delayed Ringing
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Automatic Call Distribution
N/A
N/A
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Automatic No. Identification
(ANI)
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Automatic Recall
(Hold, Transfer)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Automatic Release from
Hold
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Background Music Interface
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Battery Backup
Interface-System
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Battery Backup-Memory
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Waiting Tone
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Caller ID
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Centrex Ringing Repeat
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Class of Service, Station
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Class of Service, Travelling
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
CO Line Call Pickup Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
4 Groups
4 Groups
CO Line Groups
4 Groups
8 Groups
8 Groups
8 Groups
16 Groups
16 Groups
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
4
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
Feature Availability
Table 3
Strata DK System Feature Availability (continued)
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
CO Line Queuing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Computer Telephony
Integration (CTI)
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Feature
Conferencing
4 Party
4 Party
4 Party
4 Party
4 Party
4 Party
Credit Card Calling
(“0+” Dialing)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Delayed Ringing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Dialed Number ID Service
(DNIS)
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
N/A
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Distinctive CO Ringing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Door Lock Control
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) and Dial Pulse
Compatible
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
DTMF Signal Time Setting
(160/80 ms)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
End-to-End Signal Tones
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
E911 Enhanced Operation
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
FCC Registration
(Key, Hybrid)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
FCC Registration (PBX)
N/A
N/A
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flash Timing Programmable
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flexible Button Assignment
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flexible Intercom
DN Numbering
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flexible Line Ringing
Assignment
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flexible Slot Assignment
N/a
(Expansion
Cabinet)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Ground Start Lines
N/a
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Hotline Service (Emergency
Ringdown)
N/A
N/A
Std
Std
Std
Std
Opt
Internal Call Hold
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Internal Call Transfer
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
ISDN Basic Rate Interface
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
ISDN Primary Rate Interface
N/A
N/A
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Live System Programming
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Message Waiting (MW) DKT
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
5
System Overview
Feature Availability
Strata DK System Feature Availability (continued)
Table 3
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
MW Lamp Generator for
2500 SLTs
N/A
Opt
Std
Std
Std
Std
Modular Expansion System
Design
N/A
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Multiple DNs
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Music-on-Hold Interface
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Night Ringing Answer Code
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Night Ring Over External
Page
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Night Ring Over Ext. Page
Zones
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Night Service
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Non-blocking Dialing
DKT/EKT
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Feature
Non-blocking Internal Call
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Off-premises Stations
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Outgoing Call Restriction
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Page Pickup
(Meet-Me Page)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Paging-External Interface
Std
Std
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Paging-External Zone
(4 zones)
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Paging-Internal DKT All Call
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std (120)
Std (120)
Paging-Internal DKT Group
8 Groups
4 Groups
4 Groups
4 Groups
4 Groups
8 Groups
Pooled CO Line Groups
4
8
8
8
16
16
Power Failure Transfer
Std
Std
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Privacy/Non Privacy Option
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Relay Service
Std
Std
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Remote Maint./Admin.
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
SMDR
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Station Hunting – Dist.
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Station Hunting – Serial
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Station Relocation
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
System Programming
Through Station
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
System Speed Dialing
40
40
40
100
100
100
Tandem CO Line
Connection
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Tenant Service
2
2
2
4
4
4
Tie Line Transfer Recall
N/A
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
T1 Interface
N/A
N/A
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Toll Restriction
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
6
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
Feature Availability
Table 3
Strata DK System Feature Availability (continued)
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Toll Restriction Override
Codes
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Toll Restr. Speed Dial
Override
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Transfer Privacy
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
TTY Local Terminal
Interface
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Upload/Download
Programming
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Voice Mail Integration
In Band
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Voice Mail Integration
(SMDI)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Voice or Tone Signaling
Selectable
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Feature
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Table 4
Strata DK LCD Feature Availability
Feature
DK14
DK40I
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Alphanumeric Personal Messages
10
10
10
10
10
10
Alphanumeric System Messages
40
40
40
40
40
40
ANI/DNIS Display
N/A
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Auto Callback Number Display
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
BLF Indication
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Busy Station Messaging
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Duration Display
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call FWD Source/Destination
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Called Station Messaging
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Caller ID Display
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Calling Station Messaging
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Calling/Called Number
Intercom/DN
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Clock/Calendar Display
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
CO Line ID Incoming/Outgoing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Dial Input Verification
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Feature Activation Display
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Group Station Messaging
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Intercom/DN User Name Display
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Remote/Group Station Messaging
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
7
System Overview
Feature Availability
Table 4
Strata DK LCD Feature Availability (continued)
Feature
Speed Dial Directory Dialing
DK14
DK40I
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Speed Dial Directory Name Scroll
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Timed Reminders
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
Alert Signal Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Auto Busy Redial (ABR)
Opt
Opt
Std
Std
Std
Std
Auto Callback Intercom
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Table 5
Strata DK Station Feature Availability
Feature
Auto Dial Inside (DSS) Buttons
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Auto Dial Outside Buttons
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Automatic Hold
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Auto Off-Hook Line Selection
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Background Music (BGM) with
Station Control
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Busy Override Tone
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-All Calls (CFAC)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-Busy (CFB)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-Busy/No Answer
(CFBNA)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-No Answer (CFNA)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-External/Remote
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward-Fixed (CFF)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Forward Override
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Park
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Park Orbits
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Pickup-Directed Station
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Pickup-Holding/Parked
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Pickup-Ringing CO Line
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Pickup-Ringing CO Tenant
Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
2 Groups
4 Groups
4 Groups
Call Pickup-Station Group
20 Groups
20 Groups
20 Groups
20 Groups
20 Groups
20 Groups
Call Transfer Immediate
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Transfer with Announcement
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Call Transfer with Camp-on
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Continuous DTMF Signal Time
(DKT2000)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
8
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
Feature Availability
Table 5
Strata DK Station Feature Availability (continued)
Feature
Distinctive Station Ringing
DK14
DK40i
DK424
RCTUA
DK424
RCTUBA/BB
DK424
RCTUC/D
DK424
RCTUE/F
3 Tones
3 Tones
3 Tones
3 Tones
3 Tones
3 Tones
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Do Not Disturb Override
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
DP/DTMF Mode Change (Tone
Button)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Exclusive Hold
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Executive Override (Break-in)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Flash Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Handset CW/Camp-on Tone On/Off
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Handset Volume Control (DKT)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Handsfree Answerback on Internal
Calls
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Headset Compatible
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Hearing-Aid Compatible
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Line in Use (I-Use)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Line on Hold (I-Hold)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Microphone Control Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Microphone Sensitivity Control
(DKT)
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
Handset
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
Speaker
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
On-hook Dialing
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Pooled CO Line Buttons
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Privacy Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Privacy Override
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Privacy Release Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Private CO Lines
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Release Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Release/Answer Button
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Repeat Last Number Dialed
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Ringing Line Preference
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Saved Number Redial
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Speakerphone
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Station Speed Dial Numbers
40
40
40
40
40
40
Two Color LEDs – DKT
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
User Programmable Feature
Buttons
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
9
System Overview
System Administration Tools
System Administration Tools
Important and time-saving installation and support tools are available for use with Strata DK
systems. Installation and support is easier and more efficient for both Toshiba dealers and end
users. These PC software programs are easy to use with a menu-driven format and help screens.
DKQuote
DKQuote is an automated Strata DK system configuration software package that makes it easy for
you to determine which system components you need for configuration of a Strata DK system. Use
it for original installation or add-ons.
DKQuote is like an on-line worksheet that serves as a checklist that even tells you in which slot to
install circuit cards. You can insert your own prices that are password protected. It is great for:
♦
Sales representatives preparing a bid using Strata DK14, DK40i, or DK424 systems.
♦
Operations personnel ordering equipment.
♦
Technicians doing installation planning.
This software package runs on your 486 or faster IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95.
DKAdmin
DKAdmin, a Strata DK14, DK40i, DK424 system programming and administration software
package, provides all the functions of DKBackup, plus it easily and efficiently enables you to do
off-line system programming from an IBM-compatible Pentium® PC with DOS 6.2 or above.
With DKAdmin you can:
♦
Query the Strata DK system for all or specific programming functions.
♦
Display or change all information for a single station, such as Toll Restriction Class, Auto
Busy Redial (ABR), Busy Override, telephone LCD names, and Speed Dial.
Note
Queries and changes can be done by selecting from a program table, feature table, or
station ID/range/user name table.
♦
Change programming for a range of stations for the same function or for specific individual
stations.
♦
Save the complete Strata DK configuration programming information in a disk file on a PC the
same way as DKBackup. This saves customer data such as Speed Dial, numbering plan,
ringing assignments, station options, and LCD messages.
♦
Save certain programming changes as templates for later use with the transfer data function.
This is valuable in re-creating a specific customer’s saved data for reloading, using file upload
capabilities. This also enables you to build a library of standard types of installations for use in
new installations minimizing programming effort.
DKAdmin requires the DKAdmin (red) copy-protection key and is not compatible with the
DKBackup (green) copy-protection key.
Using the backup function built into DKAdmin, the system configuration program options and
customer data is retrieved from the processor. The options and customer data are saved in a file on
your IBM-compatible PC, which is connected to the system using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU,
TSIU (DK40i), or WSIU (DK14).
10
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
System Administration Tools
DKAdmin then enables you to add or change customer data (both system-wide programming and
individual-station settings) using a PC independent of the Strata DK system. Password protection
enables multiple levels of access, so some users can only edit and change selected items in the
Strata DK database, while others can change all programs and station settings.
For example, DKAdmin provides a station administration menu that enables the end user to add,
delete, or change any Strata DK feature on a user’s telephone, such as telephone flexible buttons,
Speed Dial numbers, station class of service, station user LCD names, LCD messages, and more.
Using the restore function built into DKAdmin, the new data can be restored to the Strata DK from
the PC file, changing the customer program options and customer data, locally on-site or remotely
over telephone lines and modems.
DKAdmin makes it easy to maintain and update the end-user’s system and provides an efficient
way to backup and restore their current database. The DKAdmin software is easy to use with a
menu-driven spreadsheet format and help screens.
DKBackup
DKBackup is a Strata DK software package, which enables you to retrieve system configuration
program options (Speed Dial, numbering plan, ringing assignments, and station options) from the
system processor. It also saves the data in a file on your IBM-compatible PC (386/486 or faster
with DOS 6.2 or above), which is connected to the system using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU,
TSIU (DK40i) or WSIU (DK14).
Customer data can be restored to the Strata DK by sending the data from the PC file to the new
initialized system, locally (on-site) or remotely, over telephone lines and modems. The backup
procedure can be performed for the whole customer database or selected individual parts
(programming options, System Speed Dial, Station Speed Dial, voice mail codes, user names, Call
Forward status, Message Waiting status, and Lost Call Caller ID and ANI telephone numbers).
DKBackup provides an efficient way to backup and restore the customer’s database. It also makes
an easy installation tool and is especially useful for providing software upgrades without having to
manually re-program everything.
It is easy to use because of its menu-driven spreadsheet format and help screens. The software is
available on a 3.5-inch floppy diskette operating in conjunction with the DKBackup (green) copyprotection key which plugs into your 25-pin PC printer port.
StrataControl
StrataControl is a Windows-based PC tool designed to make simple system programming changes
to Strata DK40i and DK424 digital business telephone systems easy for end users.
StrataControl enables users to download information from their Strata DK system and make
programming changes using their PC. When the changes are completed, they are uploaded and
implemented in their Strata DK system. Both direct connection and modem access are available,
so customers have the added advantage of configuring systems remotely.
StrataControl enables customers to manage and store system programming information for
multiple systems in separate files. If the customer has multiple Strata DK systems, all of the
systems can be administered from the same StrataControl application. StrataControl provides the
ability to modify programming in the following categories.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
11
System Overview
System Administration Tools
System Administration
♦
Auto Attendant
♦
Operating parameters
♦
Account Codes
♦
ACD
♦
Call Park
♦
Long distance parameters
♦
Serial output parameters
Station Administration
♦
Button assignments on telephones, add-on modules, DSS consoles, and Attendant consoles
♦
Station group options
♦
Station operating parameters
♦
Station general options
♦
Standard telephone options
Customer Data
♦
Name assignments to extensions, CO lines, page groups, pick-up groups, and hunt groups
♦
ACD functionality
♦
Data station hunting
Printing and Output
♦
Keystrips according to telephone station programming (prints on blank 2000-series DKT
keystrip stock available from Toshiba)
♦
Digital Telephone User Guide
♦
Custom Quick Reference Telephone Guide based upon station features and options assigned
within the system
♦
Extension lists
CO Line Administration
♦
CO line names
♦
Ringing assignments
Important!
12
StrataControl enables self-administration of the simpler aspects of programming
and maintenance. It does not contain and is not designed to accommodate the
complete installation and maintenance functions that the DKAdmin package
provides. StrataControl is designed for the end user and DKAdmin is designed for
the trained service technician.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
System Overview
System Administration Tools
Keyprint 2000
Keyprint 2000, a keystrip printing software package, creates and prints custom button label
keystrips for 2000-series 10 or 20-button digital telephones. It runs on a 386 or faster PC with
DOS 3.3 and above and prints on laser or 24-pin dot matrix printers.
The software supports hundreds of different printers from lasers to dot matrix. It prints three
keystrips per sheet on the DKT 2000-series blank keystrip stock for output to small or large groups
of custom keystrips. It is easy to use with a menu driven format. You can display, change, and store
keystrip layouts to create a database of many keystrip varieties.
Keyprint 2000 is available on a copy-protected 3.5-inch floppy disk.
Strata AirLink Wireless Manager
The Strata AirLink™ Wireless Telephone System includes the Strata AirLink Manager
administration software that configures the wireless system and handset features on the controller.
The software runs diagnostics and enables the System Administrator to check Base Station status
and remove or restore service to the Base Stations. It also reports alarm conditions and provides
traffic statistics on Base Station channel usage throughout the system.
Available on 3.5-inch floppy disks, the software application runs under Microsoft Windows on an
IBM-compatible Personal Computer (PC). It is easy to use with a menu-driven format.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
13
System Overview
System Administration Tools
14
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
2
Features
System Features
This section describes the system features for the Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424. The features
apply to all these systems, except where noted.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
15
Features
System Features
Account Codes
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Account Codes are 4~15 digits in length and are often used for cost allocation. The codes are
printed on a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printout with other call details, so that the
customer can identify all calls associated with a specific account code.
Forced Account Codes can be required on selected CO lines, which forces the assigned stations to
enter those account codes. Stations without the Forced Account Code feature can voluntarily enter
account codes on any incoming or outgoing call over any CO line. While account codes can also
be entered on incoming calls, the entry cannot be forced on these calls.
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems can have up to 300 Verifiable Account Codes which
can be forced or voluntary. DK424 systems with RCTUE/F processors can have up to 500
Verifiable Account Codes.
Stations and CO lines can have one of four possible account code features:
♦
Forced Account Codes
♦
Voluntary Account Codes
♦
Forced Verifiable Account Codes
♦
Voluntary Verifiable Account Codes
If Verifiable Account Codes are forced, the Strata DK system verifies the code entered by the user
before it authorizes the call.
Verifiable Account Codes can be set up in two ways:
♦
All digits in the code can be verified. With this method, 300 (or 500 with RCTUE/F) specific
account codes can be verified. For example, if a 4-digit code is used, the system can verify 300
specific 4-digit numbers. If a 9-digit code is used, the system can verify 300 specific 9-digit
numbers.
♦
The first “portion” of the code can be verified. This enables 300 specific verifiable “prefixes,”
which can then enable thousands of “partially” Verifiable Account Codes. For example, with a
5-digit code, there could be 300 verifiable 3-digit prefixes:
100 _ _, which verifies 10000, 10001, 10002, ... 10099 (100 codes)
101 _ _, which verifies 10100, 10101, 10102, ... 10199 (100 codes)
102 _ _, which verifies 10200, 10201, 10202, ... 10299 (100 codes)
•
•
•
299 _ _, which verifies 29900, 29901, 29902, ... 29999 (100 codes)
Each of the 300 verifiable prefixes partially verifies 100 codes, for a total of 30,000 partially
verifiable codes. This is an important capability to ensure valid accounts are being used while
allowing freedom to use sub-accounts for specific allocation of the call.
16
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
A Verifiable Account Code can have a toll restriction class of service. When an account code is
entered at a station, the system checks the toll restriction class of service associated with that
account code, and then determines if the call is authorized.
The Account Code button can be programmed on an electronic or digital telephone to facilitate
voluntary account code entry during conversations without interrupting the talk path. It can also be
used to enter Verified Account Codes to enable normally restricted stations to dial long distance
calls.
Note
The 911 emergency number and two other optional customer-designed numbers (up to
four digits long) can be assigned to bypass Forced Verified Account Code requirements.
Benefits
Account Codes control costs and ensure accurate billing to departments, clients, projects, or
individual employees. The advantage of using Account Codes for this purpose is that they register
on SMDR for tracking and reporting.
Forced and verified account codes can also be used in conjunction with Toll Restriction. Used this
way, they function as override codes or as traveling class of service codes.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
17
Features
System Features
Alarm Sensor
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
PIOU and PIOUS interface units are
optional on the DK40i/DK424
DDCB, Door Phone Control Box, can be
added to the DK14
The Alarm Sensor is configured with a customer-supplied alarm. When the sensor detects that the
alarm relay is activated, it causes all telephones to sound an alert tone. Any station programmed
with the Alarm button (alarm reset) can reset the alarm on a Strata DK system.
Benefits
Conveniently controlled with an electronic telephone, so that you can have an alarm indication
wherever telephones are located. The source of the alarm is controlled from the device creating the
alarm indication.
18
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Alternate Answer Point
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Alternate Answer Point enables you to answer transferred CO line calls from any station that
shares the CO Line button appearance or secondary DN for the destination station.
Benefits
Ideal for employees who have high mobility and promotes efficiency and better service to callers.
It can also minimize the distraction caused by unanswered ringing phones.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
19
Features
System Features
Amplified Conference
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK40i/DK424
Unavailable on DK14
One or more customer-provided automatic gain, switched, two-way line amplifiers can be
connected to proprietary station ports in the system. The amplifiers are automatically activated
whenever a user conferences two CO lines together. Up to two amplifiers can be connected on the
DK40i and up to four amplifiers on DK424 systems.
With Strata DK systems using Amplified Conference, there is negligible loss through the system,
and the amplifier compensates for loss in volume over the public network. Any customer-supplied,
two-way line amplifier that is FCC registered with Automatic Gain Control (AGC) should be
compatible. The Reliance Electric model VFR 5050 has been successfully used.
The amplifier increases signal strength between any two outside CO lines. If Tandem,
Call-Forward External, or Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO line connections are provided
in the system, the CO line-to-CO line connection is amplified.
Amplified connections are available on a first-come, first-served basis. On Strata DK systems,
amplified conference is available to a standard telephone as well as digital or electronic
telephones.
Each amplifier requires two EKT station ports, and reduces the station capacity by two. The two
ports supporting the amplifier must be designated ports on a PEKU card. One PEKU supports one
external amplifier.
Benefits
Enables the external parties of a conference call to hear each other. Conference calls are shorter
and more efficient, since time is not wasted repeating inaudible parts of the conversation. Shorter
calls are cheaper calls. When conferees can hear clearly, they get accurate information.
20
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Auto Attendant
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
QKYS (DK14), KKYS (DK40i), and
RKYS1~4 (DK424) PCBs
Not supported by Tie, DID, DNIS, or ANI
lines for any applications including ACD
Standard station ports for announcers
DTMF receivers for simultaneous answering
Ground and loop start lines
Requirements
The built-in Auto Attendant feature acts as a round-the-clock attendant that automatically directs
incoming calls to stations. Calls can be answered simultaneously depending upon the number of
DTMF tone receivers are installed in the system (maximum of 3 in DK14, 5 in DK40i, and 24 in
DK424).
Callers who dial into assigned Auto Attendant lines receive a menu of dialing prompts, such as,
“Dial 5 for Sales or dial 6 for Technical Support.” When the caller dials the digit, the call routes to
a DN, ACD group, or Distributed Hunt group (assigned in system programming).
An unlimited number of CO lines can be programmed for immediate answer or delayed ring, such
as 12 or 24 seconds, at selected stations. Auto Attendant also enables access to outgoing lines by
using DISA, which should be security protected with Account Codes and/or a DISA security code.
CO lines that are assigned as Auto Attendant lines, in any of the system’s three time of day modes
(Day, Day 2, Night), can be assigned to ring stations or a night bell when the system is switched to
another mode. This enables calls to be manually answered until the Attendant requests the Auto
Attendant to answer all new calls.
Customer-provided digital announcement devices and optional QRCU3 (DK14), K5RCU (DK40i)
or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver PCBs are required. Multiple callers can be connected to one
digital announcer simultaneously as follows:
♦
DK14 enables up to three caller connections
♦
DK40i enables up to five caller connections
♦
DK424 enables up to 24 caller connections
One DTMF receiver is needed for each caller.
The Auto Attendant can be programmed to answer on a delayed ring basis, which can be used for
overflow and secondary answering purposes. This enables callers to hear Music-on-Hold (MOH)
or Ring Back Tone (program option) after dialing a selection.
The system can have a primary announcement only, or a primary and secondary announcement.
The primary announcement is the initial greeting played to the caller usually providing dialing
instructions. The secondary announcement is automatically played if the selected station is not
available.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
21
Features
System Features
From one to four primary announcers can be configured on a DK40i or DK424 system and one or
two on a DK14 system. Light or normal incoming call traffic and/or short announcements can be
handled by one or two announcers, while up to four can satisfy the demands of heavy traffic
applications and/or long announcements.
The DK424 can have one to four primary announcers and zero to four secondary announcers. The
DK40i can have a maximum of four announcers, and for the DK14, two announcers are maximum.
Each announcement is stored on a customer-supplied digital announcer connected to a standard
telephone station port.
Callers who are directed to a station that is busy or does not answer are routed to:
♦
One secondary announcement which could inform the caller that the destination is unavailable
and repeat the menu.
♦
The original announcement to hear the greeting and menu repeated.
♦
Ring designated alternate stations.
Unanswered calls ring the final destination station until either:
♦
A disconnect signal is received from the CO
...or, the call is disconnected by an optional Strata DK call timer
...or, the call is call forwarded.
If using loop start CO lines, reliable automatic release from hold must be available from the CO.
Ground start lines are preferred, because of better disconnect supervision. With T1, ground-start
lines must be provided.
Benefits
Extremely flexible with a single-level dialing menu and can have as many as 10 selections, each of
which can direct calls to specific stations, hunt groups, or ACD Groups (DK424 only). If the caller
knows the extension number wanted, quick and direct access is achieved. With Auto Attendant,
customers and employers are provided an option to specify how their calls are handled.
Twenty-four hour coverage means no need to worry about lunch and break coverage and provides
after-hours coverage. Also, overflow call coverage during peak traffic periods are handled
efficiently without requiring additional Attendants to answer calls.
Auto Attendant can process a larger volume of calls more quickly and efficiently than a live
Attendant. This provides incoming callers better overall service.
Three modes of ringing (Day, Day 2, Night) can be assigned for flexible answering by the built-in
Auto Attendant or the Attendant.
22
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Automatic Hold Recall
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
When a station user puts a call on hold, the call automatically rings back to that station after a
programmable period of time. Hold recall time is normally set at 32 seconds, but can be
programmed from 11 to 160 seconds.
Benefits
Ensures that station users pick up calls that have been put on hold in a timely manner. Courteous
customer service dictates acknowledging the caller periodically and informing them about delays.
This feature can help a company project a professional, efficient, and courteous image.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
23
Features
System Features
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
System Availability
Unavailable on DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i with K5RCU and
DK424 with RRCS
ANI displays the telephone number of the calling party on the LCD of a ringing telephone,
Attendant Console display, and/or sends it to an application computer or voice mail. The
information is displayed on direct incoming, transferred, and call-forwarded calls. The ANI
information continues with the call as many times as the active call is forwarded or transferred
within the system.
The system supports ANI on analog or digital (T1) DID and Tie
lines and provides helpful call identification information to
answering parties. A typical ANI display example is shown at the
right.
3026
CN:7145833700
LINE
3 RINGING
ANI is usually associated with “1-800” type calls offered by
various long distance carriers (except AT&T) through T1
facilities. However, the Strata DK also provides ANI information
received over analog DID and Tie line circuits. Either Sprint or
MCI ANI format is supported.
ANI data is routed to DNs, Distributed Hunt Groups, ACD groups, voice mail devices, and
external network numbers through external-call routing. ANI data on answered calls can be
displayed on SMDR reports. ANI numbers can be routed to different destinations during Day, Day
2, or Night mode.
ANI digits can be received independently or simultaneously with Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS) called number digits. When received with DNIS digits, calls can be routed to
unique destinations for each DNIS number (see Table 6 on Page 25). When ANI is received
without DNIS, all ANI calls ring the same selected destination.
Important!
ANI is unavailable on Strata DK14 systems.
Abandoned Call Numbers
ANI data is stored in system memory for calls that ring, but are abandoned before being answered
so users see the telephone number of who called, even if the caller did not leave a message. LCD
telephone and Attendant Console users can display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” ANI
numbers.
The DK424 system stores up to 2,000 ANI abandoned calls with
the RCTUE/F processor, up to 1000 on RCTUC/D, up to 400 on
RCTUBA/BB, and up to 200 on RCTUA. DK14 and DK40i can
store up to 200 ANI abandoned call numbers. Individual stations
can be programmed to store from 0 to 100 of the total ANI
abandoned calls in increments of 10. A typical ANI abandoned call
display is shown at the right.
24
3027
08/02
17:52
CN:7145836798
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Table 6
ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS Routing Destinations
Routing Destination
Individual Primary/Secondary/Phantom Directory
Number
ANI Line
Calls
Caller ID
Line
Calls
DNIS
Line
Calls1,2
Tie & DID
Line Calls2
Ground2/
Loop Start
Line Calls
X
X
X
X
X
CO Line or pooled line buttons
X
2
X
Individual Distributed Hunt (DH) Group
X
X
X
X
X
Individual Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Groups
X
X
X
X
X
Remote Maintenance/Administration (M&A)
Modem
X
X
X
X
X
System external Page (Tie lines, private network
lines only)
X
System night bell or night ringing over external
Page
X
Intercept destination (station console
announcement) applies to DID line types only
X
External telephone network numbers
X
Voice mail box/Auto Attendant device
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1. DNIS calls can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits.
2. Not supported by DK14.
Computer Applications
For computer applications, ANI digits are sent to an individual PC connected using an Integrated
PC Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). It enables pop-up screens on the PC that provide information
regarding the calling/called party before answering and during the call.
Benefits
Provides instant information about the person calling to the station user and expedites call
handling by shortening the length of the telephone call. Most of the information that the caller
would have to provide is already available to the call taker.
Abandoned call information is available so station users know the telephone number and time/date
of the last call, even if the caller hung up without leaving a message. This provides better service to
callers and is a big productivity boost to call takers.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
25
Features
System Features
Automatic Release From Hold
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
If an outside caller on hold hangs up, the system automatically disconnects the call and frees the
line for other calls. This feature applies to DISA, DNIS and/or ANI external routed calls, Auto
Attendant, and voice mail calls, as well as regular voice calls.
Automatic Release is available on a line-by-line basis, while on hold only or at all times, and
operates only with COs that provide a disconnect (calling party control) signal.
This feature is designed to work with loop start CO lines and is not available on T1 lines.
Benefits
Provides full use of all CO lines at all times. A CO line is not tied up if a station user puts the line
on hold and the caller hangs up before the station user returns to the call.
This is very useful for disconnect supervision in voice mail and built-in Auto Attendant
applications, but availability and reliability of the signaling from the CO must be confirmed.
26
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Background Music (BGM) Interface
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
A BGM/Music-on-Hold (MOH) RCA jack is built into the common control unit on DK14, DK40i,
and DK424 systems and connects a customer-supplied music source to the system. The music
source or sources is flexible, providing one music source for telephone and external speakers or a
separate source for each.
When BGM is broadcast over digital or electronic telephone speakers, no optional hardware is
required. The customer-supplied music source for both background music on telephone speakers
and MOH connects directly to the common control unit.
To connect BGM (separate music source) over telephone speakers, a station port should be
assigned. The required interfaces cards are:
♦
DK14 – QSTU
♦
DK40i – KSTU, RSTU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU
♦
DK424 – RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU
When a music source is connected and this feature is activated, a station user can access BGM
through the speaker of a digital or electronic telephone. The music is turned on and off at the user’s
option using the BGM button or a dial access code. The user can also control the volume.
On DK40i and DK424 systems, up to three separate music sources can be connected to the system
at the same time. One source can broadcast BGM over digital or electronic telephone speakers, the
second broadcasts over external speakers, and the third provides music or a recording for MOH.
DK14 systems can support two separate music sources, one for MOH, and the other shared by
DKT and external speakers.
When the source input for BGM over external speakers is unamplified, a DK40i or DK424 system
can use the built-in, three-watt amplifier of an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PEPU). Amplified
music output requires the PIOU or PEPU, or the music input source must be connected through an
external amplifier.
If an external paging system is installed, music can also be broadcast through the external paging
speakers, providing background music throughout the facility. Music on both the external speaker
and the telephones is muted when a paging announcement is made or when night ringing occurs.
Note
There is an optional secondary interface.
Benefits
Provides music that is conducive to the work environment and enable employees to listen without
the conflict that can accompany the use of radios or tape recorders.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
27
Features
System Features
Caller Identification (ID)
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Caller ID/ground or loop start CO line PCBs
DK14 – WSIU PCB
DK40i – TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs
DK424 – RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs
On the DK14 system, the WSIU PCB provides an RS-232 interface to a customer-provided Caller
ID interface device (TC-1041). CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross connected to the TC1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box. The TC-1041 is available from TEL-CONTROL, Inc.,
P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087, (205) 881-4000.
On the DK40i, the TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs provides four Caller ID circuits each. The
TCIU2 is used for base cabinet lines and the RCIU2/RCIS is used for expansion cabinet lines to
provide up to eight Caller ID interface circuits. A TCIU2/RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available
for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
On the DK424, the RCIU2 provides four Caller ID circuits when installed at the factory; however,
an RCIS piggyback PCB can be installed on the RCIU2 to provide four more Caller ID circuits, for
a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. An RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available
for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
The telephone number or name of the calling party can be displayed on the LCD of a ringing
telephone, Attendant Console display, and/or sent to an application computer or voice mail. The
information is displayed on direct, incoming, transferred, and forwarded calls. The Caller ID
information continues with the call as many times as the active call is forwarded or transferred
within the system.
A maximum of 10 telephone number digits can be displayed or sent to a computer, and a
maximum of 16 characters for the name. A typical Caller ID display with soft keys off is shown
below:
3028
CN:7145833700
JAKE
LINE
LINE
MODE
3 RINGING
PA G E
SCROLL
MODE
JENSEN
3 RINGING
PA G E
SCROLL
If both the name and number of the caller are sent by the COs, the name, rather than number,
appears on the top line of the LCD display. The name and number do not appear together on the
same LCD display. However, while the call is ringing, the user can press the Page button to toggle
the top line display from name to number and back. This enables the station user to see both the
name and number of the caller while the telephone is ringing. If the Caller ID feature is being used
in conjunction with a CTI application, both the name and number are sent to the TAPI application
computer.
28
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Caller ID, on ground or loop start lines, provides similar capabilities as ANI. However, Caller ID
in addition to the telephone number, can also provide the name of the caller, (if provided by the
local CO). Caller ID is a feature offered by local COs on ground or loop start lines, whereas, ANI
is delivered by long distance providers on digital (T1) or analog DID and Tie lines.
Note
Caller ID is not available on analog DID, Tie, or digital T1 lines.
Caller ID data is routed to DNs, Distributed Hunt groups, ACD groups (DK424 only), voice mail
devices, and external network numbers through External Call Forward for private lines only.
Caller ID data on answered calls can be displayed on SMDR reports and routed to different
destinations during Day, Day 2, or Night mode.
Abandoned Call Numbers
Caller ID data is stored in system memory for calls that ring, but are abandoned before being
answered. This gives the user the name (if provided by the local CO) and telephone number of
caller, even if the caller did not leave a message. LCD telephone and Attendant Console users can
display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” numbers.
The DK424 system stores up to 2,000 abandoned calls with the RCTUE/F processor, up to 1000
on RCTUC/D, up to 400 on RCTUBA/BB, and up to 200 on RCTUA3. DK14 and DK40i can
store up to 200 abandoned call numbers. Individual stations can be programmed to store from 0 to
100 of the total abandoned calls in increments of 10. A typical abandoned call display is shown
below:
3029
JAKE
JENSEN
08/02
17:38
7145833700
7145833700
08/02
17:52
2138794321
Computer Applications
For computer applications, Caller ID digits are sent to an individual PC using an Integrated PC
Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). On DK424 ACD applications, the digits can also be sent to ACD
agents using a LAN computer with system open architecture if it has the Serial Interface Unit
(RSIU). It enables pop-up screens on the PC that provide information regarding the calling/called
party before answering and during the call. System open architecture requires Release 3.2 or
higher DK424 software.
Benefits
Provides instant information about the calling person. It expedites call handling by shortening the
length of the phone call. Most of the information that the caller has to provide is already available
to the call taker. Even abandoned call information is available, so station users know the phone
number, even if the caller hung up without leaving a message. This provides better service to
callers and is a big productivity boost to call takers.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
29
Features
System Features
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Any Strata DK system can be installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. It can function as part of
the Centrex or PBX system while providing its users with the Strata DK features and digital
feature telephones.
To further enhance Strata DK compatibility with Centrex and PBX, access codes for features in the
host system can be programmed as if they were system Speed Dial numbers. These codes can then
be assigned to the Speed Dial button, also known as station Automatic Dialing buttons, providing
one-button access to the CO, Centrex or PBX feature. Each CO/Centrex/PBX feature access code
can have up to 20 digits, including pauses and flashes.
When a Strata DK system is installed behind a PBX, some or all of the CO/PBX line buttons
function like PBX extensions. When such a PBX line button is accessed, the station user receives
PBX dial tone, not CO dial tone. To access a CO line on the PBX, the user must dial an access
code. For example, “9” might be dialed to get a local CO line; Tie lines to other company locations
might be accessed by “72” or “73.”
A Strata DK system can be programmed to recognize these PBX access codes or disregard them
on identified lines when it inspects dialed numbers for toll restriction purposes or performs other
features such as Last Number Redial. This enables the system to continue to provide its features,
even when calls are ultimately going out from the PBX.
Benefits
Increased cost savings to the customer because the economical Strata DK systems can be used in
satellite locations. Users can take advantage of the Centrex and/or PBX features, the PBX
trunking, and the PBX networking capabilities.
Strata DK systems can also be used within a PBX environment to serve a community of interest
which needs the functionality of electronic telephone sets that may not be provided by the PBX.
Also, CO/Centrex/PBX feature buttons give users easy, one-button access to features that would
otherwise require more complicated access procedures. Since users do not have to look up feature
access codes, this saves time. Time wasting dialing errors can also be eliminated through the use of
feature buttons.
30
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Centrex Ringing Repeat
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Strata DK systems can be programmed to reproduce Centrex or PBX ringing patterns, enabling the
user to differentiate between station or CO line calls and various callback features on the Centrex
or PBX line.
Benefits
Enables the user to hear the same on/off ringing patterns that are heard for special calling and
callback features on CO, Centrex, or PBX lines. Users do not have to learn new ringing cadences
and can easily differentiate between station or CO line calls or various callback features on the
Centrex or PBX line.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
31
Features
System Features
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
CTI combines the capabilities of the Strata DK digital business telephone system with custom
functionality provided by computer applications. This is provided through digital telephone
integrated PC interface. The PC must be running Microsoft Windows software.
Digital Telephone Integrated PC Interface
Toshiba 2000-series digital telephone can be connected to a PC, enabling routine simultaneous
voice and data switching applications and more robust CTI applications. The connection is made
with an RS-232 cable from a communication port on a PC to an RS-232 port on the digital
telephone.
The RS-232 port is provided by equipping the digital telephone with an integrated Personal
Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). This is an optional unit that replaces the normal telephone
base.
Data switching applications enable users to make data calls to printers, PCs, and other data
devices. Users can also make voice calls using PC directory dialing software without the need of a
modem or an extra outgoing line. The system can also be programmed with one to four security
groups and can restrict calls between groups. It can also support modem pooling and printer
sharing.
For CTI applications, digital telephones can be connected to a computer with application software
using the TAPI to provide customized functionality. Any TAPI enabled PC software is compatible
with Strata DK systems. The most common use of this application is a database look up and
pop-up screens that contain calling party information. Caller ID, ANI, DNIS, and call-processing
information is passed from the digital telephone to the application computer, providing
information necessary for the look-up and pop-up screens.
StrataLink
The Strata DK can interface with computer applications that conform to Windows TAPI format.
The Toshiba StrataLink Telephone Service Provider Interface (TSPI) software enables the Strata
DK to communicate with TAPI applications. It is bundled with the RPCI-DI on a 3.5 inch, IBMcompatible, floppy disk.
StrataLink software greatly enhances the use of the basic TAPI interface. It enables you to
customize the call-control functions of your PC application with many value-added capabilities,
such as:
♦
Selecting how the PC application responds to the next call event.
StrataLink accepts call events from the telephone, applies call handling rules and conditions,
and causes resulting actions to take place in the PC application. You choose the rules and
conditions to customize how your application works.
♦
32
Handling multiple telephone calls
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Most TAPI compatible applications only respond to a ringing line for Caller ID database look
up and screen display so only one call is handled at a time. StrataLink enables the application
to respond to multiple calls and events that capture calls and when reconnecting to a held call.
You can delay the screen display while on another call or for a programmed amount of time.
♦
♦
Handling multiple PC applications from the same telephone. Incoming calls can activate
actions in different applications depending upon the type of call. For example, you can:
♦
Generate a “customer database” application display of callers on your regular DNs
♦
Use “help desk” application software generated from ACD calls
♦
Beep your pager with Caller ID when you are away from your desk
♦
Assign different applications to work on specific buttons on your telephone, or on all
buttons
Enhancing outbound calling
StrataLink provides for outbound telephone calling and call control from the PC application.
♦
Setting up, testing, and monitoring are easy
StrataLink provides tools for testing the interface, debugging or monitoring the call events,
and setting up. Simply select from predefined tested applications and the proper interface is
automatically assigned.
Figure 1 is an example of the TAPI interface that connects the digital telephone to the PC in a
desktop integration application example. This is used when the database information resides in the
individual PC.
Strata DK
Figure 1
PC and Digital Telephone TAPI Interface Connection
Figure 2 is an example of the TAPI interface that connects the digital telephone to the PC and the
PC to the LAN server in a LAN application. This is used when the database information resides in
the server.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
33
Features
System Features
Physical Connection Between
Client PC and Telephone
LAN Server
Strata DK
LAN Backbone
Telephone Connection
Figure 2
CTI Interface Connection
Benefits
Provides custom functionality for business telephone systems by combining the two technologies.
Users gain functionality that cannot be provided by the telephone or the computer by themselves.
Simultaneous voice and data transmission over a single-wire pair eliminates additional wiring
requirements and minimizes port usage on the system. For example, modem pooling and printer
sharing enables multiple users to maximize efficient usage of expensive peripheral devices.
PC keyboard dialing of data or voice calls increases user efficiency. Auto dialing by name from
directories stored in PCs equipped with inexpensive desk organizer-type software (modem not
required) is an example. Data security groups control who is authorized to make outside data calls,
which can get expensive if linked to databases which charge for access.
34
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Conferencing
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Conferencing enables other people to join your conversation. These additional people can be
inside or outside the DK system. Any digital or standard telephone can set up conferencing with
other digital or standard telephones. The following combinations are available:
♦
One or two stations and two outside lines
♦
Two or three stations and one outside line
♦
Four stations on one internal DN line
♦
Voice mail plus one station and two other internal or outside line parties (DK424 only)
Note
Amplified conference is available on DK40i and DK424 systems, but unavailable on the
DK14.
System-wide programming enables or disables Conferencing. The number of simultaneous
conferences are:
System
Four-party
Three-party
DK14
2
2
DK40i
3
4
DK424 RCTUA
3
4
DK424 RCTUBA/BB
7
10
DK424 RCTUC/D
7
10
DK424 RCTUE/F
14
20
On DK40i and DK424 systems, the CO line conference can be amplified with a customer-supplied
two-way amplifier to improve the negligible loss encountered through the system over the public
network (see “Amplified Conference” for details).
The basic application of this feature enables a station user to call voice mail during a conference
call and play messages to all parties in the conference. The DTMF tones can be sent from any
DK424 station in the conference.
Benefits
Provides a convenience to business, because everyone participating in the conference gets the
same information at the same time reducing confusion and saving time.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
35
Features
System Features
Credit Card Calling (“0+” Dialing)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Callers can make “0+” telephone credit card calls from selected toll restricted stations. Calls are
billed to the credit card instead of the Strata DK CO line. The “0+” credit card calling feature can
be selectively assigned to stations and CO lines.
If a toll restricted station has the credit card calling feature, the Strata DK system requires the user
to enter a certain number (programmable) of digits after dialing “0” on a CO line that has the
feature. If the caller does not enter that number of digits within 20 seconds after dialing “0”, the
call is dropped.
If the system has LCR, a station that has the feature can place a “0+” credit card call on any CO
line accessed by LCR.
Benefits
Provides the convenience of “0+” telephone credit card calling without compromising toll
restriction.
36
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Delayed Ringing
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
A ringing delay of 12 or 24 seconds can be programmed for each CO line that rings at a given
station. For example, an incoming CO line can be programmed to ring at one station (or a group of
stations) immediately when the call comes in, and at a second station (or group of stations) 12 or
24 seconds later. It can be applied to ringing assignments for Day 1, Day 2, and Night ringing
modes. See “Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)” for more information.
The Auto Attendant can be programmed to answer CO lines, either 12 or 24 seconds after stations
have been ringing. In this case, the telephones that initially ring, stop ringing when the Auto
Attendant answers.
For multiple DNs, the same capability as above exists for ground or loop start CO lines. For
internal, DID or Tie line calls, a different delayed ringing controlled by different system programs
is available. This means that secondary DNs can ring delayed after the PDN or PhDN. Or, the SDN
can ring first, followed by delayed ringing of 12 or 24 seconds at the PDN or PhDN.
Benefits
Improves call handling and call coverage by providing one or more alternate answering positions
for any incoming CO line or DN appearances. Calls have a greater chance of being answered
promptly.
Because of the delay in ringing, employees at alternate answering stations are not disturbed by
ringing while they wait to see if the called station answers. If the line rings at their station, they
know they should answer it. Delayed ringing on multiple DNs is perfect for “Boss/Secretary” call
coverage.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
37
Features
System Features
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14
Standard for dial pulse DNIS
Optional on DK40i/DK424 with DTMF DNIS
Requirements
Typically requires DTMF receivers
DNIS identifies the called number and displays it on the LCDs of ringing telephones. The DK424
compares the received digits (DNIS tag) to a program table that determines how to route the call
and what display to provide. A 16-character alpha/numeric identifier is displayed on the ringing
telephone’s LCD or Attendant Console display.
G I NZU KN I FE S AL E
L I N E 3 R I NG I NG
0960
DNIS digits can also be sent to an application computer. DNIS
names are stored within the Strata DK as defined by the user and
programmed into Strata DK system programming. The names
display on direct, incoming, transferred, and call forwarded
calls. This enables calls to be answered appropriately by type of
call. A DNIS display is shown below:
Figure 3 shows a sample overview of the call flow provided by the Strata DK DNIS capability.
DNIS is supported on digital T1 or analog DID and Tie lines. DNIS is typically used with “1-800”
type of calls using long distance carriers over T1, but can also be provided over analog DID and
Tie line circuits.
It is important to note that the Strata DK DNIS feature can treat all incoming local DID and Tie
line calls the same. It can treat them as incoming DNIS long distance 1-800 calls for the purpose of
routing these calls through the DNIS tables in the Strata DK. This is what makes DNIS such a
flexible feature.
DNIS enables multiple numbers to ring into the same line or line group, providing optimum trunk
usage as well as helpful called number/name identification information. This provides much more
efficient usage of lines than the traditional usage of 800 numbers. Traditionally, each 800 number
was assigned to its own line group, often resulting in a large number of under-used lines. The
Strata DK DNIS capability solves this problem by using each DNIS line on an as-needed basis for
different 800 number calls.
DNIS data is routed to DNs that can have multiple appearances, Distributed Hunt groups, ACD
groups (DK424 only), and external network numbers through external call routing. DNIS digits
can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI digits.
Each DNIS number can have its own voice mail ID code and can be routed to different
destinations during Day/Day2/Night mode.
The DK424 supports 500, 350, 200 DNIS numbers and 300, 200, 100 telephone network numbers
for the RCTUE/F, RCTUC/D, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUA, respectively. The DK40i supports 200.
38
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
v
Day 1
Example
Caller dials the
telephone number.
Normal
Routing
Incoming
Number
Day 1
Destination
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
201
202
225
310
350
555
420
430
502
271
LCD Display
Sales Dept
Service Dept
Credit Dept
Production Dept
Documentation
Tech. Support
Marketing
Administration
Engineering
National Accts
800-556-1212
The telephone company
CO receives and
passes on the
full number.
CO
800-556-1212
The local CO sends
the last four digits
to the Strata DK.
CO
1212
1212
Strata DK
The Strata DK compares
received digits with the
programmed DNIS table to
determine routing and LCD
display.
Destination can be:
• ACD group number (DK424 only)
• Distributed Hunt group number
• Station Directory Number
• Attendant Console
• Voice Mail or Auto Attendant port*
• External telephone network number
* Stand-alone Auto Attendant, not Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant.
Routing to
Other Offices Still Open
Incoming
Number
Day 2
Destination
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
801-1209
801-1210
225
802-1212
350
803-1214
420
430
502
802-1218
Night
Example
3033
Figure 3
Day 2
Example
LCD Display
Sales Dept
Service Dept
Credit Dept
Production Dept
Documentation
Tech. Support
Marketing
Administration
Engineering
National Accts
Routing to
Outside Answering Service
Incoming
Number
Night
LCD Display
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
1-714-555-2222
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
Company Name
DNIS Examples
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
39
Features
System Features
External Telephone Network Numbers
All DNIS/DID/Tie numbers that ring into the Strata DK can be routed externally to any outside
telephone number. Depending on the application, the caller DNIS name may be passed to the
destination Strata DK when routed over the user’s end-to-end telephone network.
Voice Mail
If assigned in the system database, incoming calls for each unique DNIS/DID/Tie number can be
directly routed or call forwarded to a designated voice mailbox. This enables callers of each DNIS/
DID/Tie number to receive immediate, personal custom greetings. This feature is available using
in-band integration, but not available using SMDI.
Benefits
Enables the easy answering of calls appropriate to the type of call with the helpful call
identification information. For example, this is very helpful for answering services, executive
suites, or multiple product line sales applications. Also, optimum trunk usage saves money by
providing the same level of service with fewer “1-800” type lines.
40
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
System Availability
Unavailable on DK14
Optional on DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Typicall requires DTMF tone receivers
DID enables incoming calls to ring a specific DN, or any number of stations which share a
common DN, without going through the answering position. Calls over a single DID line can reach
any one of a number of stations, ACD groups, or Distributed Hunt groups, depending upon the last
four digits of the telephone number dialed. DID lines can use DNIS programs to provide DID with
all DNIS features.
Each DID line has a single office code and a block of extension numbers that can individually ring
stations as assigned in system programming. DID lines can directly access the remote maintenance
modem, but not the Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant.
DID lines can optionally provide automatic camp-on busy when callers dial a busy station on
incoming DID calls. This feature provides a camp-on tone and distinctive LED flash at the busy
station.
If a second DID call is received at a busy station that has only one PDN button, the station user
hears muted camp-on tone, and the second call camps-on (assuming camp-on has been turned on).
If camp-on is off, the second caller hears busy tone unless forwarded to another station.
If a second DID call is received at a busy station that has more than one primary PDN button, the
station user has the option of hearing muted camp-on tone and the second call camp-on, or the
second call rings continuously on the other PDN button. This enables the station user to answer
multiple calls to their DID number, including transferred calls. Two appearances of the PDN are
recommended for this operation. Up to four PDN appearances may be used for some applications.
Outgoing calls can be made on two-way DID lines. However, ABR is not supported for those twoway lines. DID lines can be either DTMF or dial pulse signaling. Also note that a secondary
protector is required for each DID circuit.
DID calls call forward externally if the station has Call-Forward External activated.
DID lines can be provided through analog circuits on the TDDU and RDDU interface or through
digital circuits on the T1/DS-1 RDTU interface. An optional DTMF tone receiver (K5RCU or
RRCS) is typically required for DID line DTMF operation.
Benefits
Provides efficient, direct calling to individual stations without going through the answer position
and reduces the load on call answering positions. It also gives “private line” service to many
individuals at a lower cost.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
41
Features
System Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DTMF tone receivers
Loop and ground start CO lines can be
DISA programmed, but not DID and Tie
lines
By calling in on a specific telephone number assigned to DISA, callers are connected directly to
the Strata DK system and can dial internal stations or outgoing CO lines without going through the
Attendant.
The caller dials the CO line number for DISA and hears two rings. Then a tone sounds for nine
seconds, during which the caller dials a station number or the access code for a specific outgoing
CO line or line group (“9” for LCR is not enabled). If the station or CO line is busy, the caller can
dial another station or CO line. If no station number or CO line access code is dialed and the ninesecond interval elapses, the call is transferred to a pre-assigned ringing arrangement (Day, Day2,
or Night).
An optional DISA security code (1~15 digits) can be programmed and is highly recommended in
all DISA applications. When the security code is programmed, the caller must enter it in order to
make outgoing DISA calls on CO lines. The security code is not required to dial internal stations.
Certain digital telephones selected in programming can revise the DISA security code.
A caller can also be required to enter a forced/verified account code (1~15 digits), along with the
DISA security code, to access to an outgoing CO line through the system. This can be used as a
secondary level of access security.
Strata DK systems can provide a DISA class of service to CO lines, which enables Toll Restriction
to be applied to DISA CO line calls. For example, outgoing CO line calls could be restricted to
local calls only when accessed through DISA. Any number of CO lines can be programmed with
the DISA feature. CO lines can be programmed as normal lines during daytime operation and
DISA lines at night.
The DISA feature can be accessed from the Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant by dialing “*”
during the Auto Attendant greeting. Whenever using the DK built-in Auto Attendant, the system
DISA security code should be used to prevent unauthorized calls through (into and out of) the
Strata DK system.
Benefits
Saves money because employees can use the company’s calling network even when they are not in
the office. Saves time because employees can call directly into the desired station without waiting
for the Attendant to answer. Reduces the Attendant’s incoming call load and enhances service.
Before and after hours, family members and others can use DISA to directly dial an employee’s
station, improving the chances that the employee receives the call.
42
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Distinctive CO Line/Internal Ringing
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/ DK424
Incoming CO lines ring with a different ring cadence than do internal intercom/DN calls. Users
can easily distinguish the type of call, even when the telephone is not in view. This feature works
with digital, electronic, or standard telephones.
Benefits
Conveniently identifies the type of call ringing the station. The station user can answer with an
appropriate greeting.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
43
Features
System Features
Door Lock Control
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DDCB PCB
DK40i/DK424 can use PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU
The Door Lock Control feature enables any telephone programmed with the Door Unlock button
to unlock a door. Pressing the button activates the electronic door lock, and the lock opens for three
to six seconds as specified in programming. The electronic door lock mechanism must be supplied
by the customer. The number of locks each system supports is:
♦
DK14 – up to two locks
♦
DK40i – up to three locks
♦
DK424 – up to four locks with the RCTUA; all other processors support up to five locks
Benefits
Provides a great convenience by eliminating the need for extra equipment to remotely control the
lock, or the need to physically get up and go to the door to open it.
44
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Door Phone
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 that
require DDCB PCB
The optional door phone/monitor station is an external/remote two-way speaker box which has a
direct voice link to a station. A door phone is frequently mounted near a building entrance and
associated with a customer-provided door lock to help screen visitors. Pressing the button on a
door phone sends a distinctive ringing only to idle digital or electronic stations which have been
programmed to receive ringing from that door phone.
If all stations are busy, a muted ring is sent to the lowest numbered station programmed to ring.
When a station answers, it is automatically connected to the door phone. Door phones can be
programmed to ring over external page when the system is in Night mode.
A station can dial an individual door phone/monitor station and either converse with someone at
the door phone, or simply monitor conversation or sound at the door phone. No warning tone is
heard at the door phone/monitor station when it is called by a station.
Door phones are supported by the door phone/lock control box (DDCB) external module. One
control box supports up to three door phones. The DDCB requires one DKT station circuit on a
PDKU, RDSU, KCDU, or QCDU.
Door phones can be assigned to ring PDNs and/or PhDNs. The number of door phones is each
system supports is:
♦
DK14 – up to six door phones
♦
DK40i – up to nine door phones
♦
DK424 – up to nine door phones with RCTUA, and up to twelve door phones with all other
processors
Benefits
Increases building security and employee safety, especially after hours. It can also provide a “hot
line” calling link between an office and such facilities as a warehouse or laboratory.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
45
Features
System Features
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Signals generated by pressing the dial pad buttons of a digital telephone are neither DTMF nor
rotary dial signals. The system can be programmed to translate these station signals to either
DTMF or rotary dial signals as required by the serving CO.
Each line is programmed individually for DTMF or rotary dial signaling. If a CO line is rotary, a
telephone or Attendant Console user can send DTMF tones as required, by pressing the Tone Dial
Select button (flexible program option).
The system can be programmed to enable or prevent DTMF tones from being returned to digital
telephones when a user dials on outside lines or sends DTMF digits to a voice mail device.
Benefits
Provides easy accommodation of both older, rotary CO and the newer touch-tone COs. In both
cases, the station user can still have the convenience and aesthetic appeal of a push-button phone.
46
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
DTMF Signal Time Setting
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
For Strata DK systems, the Speed Dial and voice mail integration DTMF signal time can be set
independently at 80 or 160 ms in system programming for CO line dialing and for voice mail auto
dial digits. The standard setting for CO line dialing is 80 ms. The standard setting for voice mail
digits is 160 ms.
See also the station feature, “Continuous DTMF Signal Time.”
Benefits
Provides flexibility in meeting both the DTMF requirements of the serving CO and those of a
voice mail device. As a result, a customer can have faster connection time to the public network
and still accommodate voice mail systems.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
47
Features
System Features
E911 Enhanced Operation
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14/DK40i/DK424 - adjunct equipment
DK424 - RMCU/RMCS PCB
Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems support Enhanced 911 (E911) emergency services. This
feature uses special Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks to include the
Caller’s Emergency Service Identification (CESID) in the 911 call. The local carrier delivers the
CESID to the Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) which uses it to determine the exact
location (building, floor, office number, etc.) from which the call is originating.
Notes
●
●
Each station in the Strata DK may be programmed with a unique CESID. In some
jurisdictions, the CESID must be a valid directory number that the PSAP can call back if
disconnected. In many cases, this may require Direct Inward Dialing (DID).
In order for the E911 feature to be effective, 911 calls and 9+911 calls must be dialed from a
digital telephone DN or from a single line telephone. 911 calls originated from the CO Line
button or the Pooled Line button bypass the adjunct equipment and go directly to the CO
exactly as dialed.
Enhanced 911 is distinguished from conventional 911 by providing more precise information
about the location from which the 911 call originates. A conventional 911 call is identified to the
PSAP by the listed directory number of the organization providing the multi-line telephone
systems. Emergency service workers cannot determine the precise location of the caller with
conventional 911 and this results in services being misdirected, time wasted, potentially and lives
lost. Enhanced 911 provides a unique CESID for each telephone using it to identify the location of
the caller within a large, multi-floor building, multiple buildings within a campus type
environment, or from an off-premise station that is terminated at a different address than the main
telephone system.
The CESID is delivered to the PSAP by the local carrier. The PSAP then uses the CESID to
interrogate an Automatic Location Identifier (ALI) database that returns precise location
information. Once translated, this information becomes associated with the emergency call and
can be shared with responding agencies such as police, ambulance, fire, etc.
Note
In some jurisdictions, the business owner is responsible for maintaining accurate
information in the ALI database. Since Automatic Set Relocation allows telephones to be
relocated without the business owners knowledge, you may wish to turn Automatic Set
Relocation off.
For complete information on E911, please see the National Emergency Number Association’s
home page at http://www.nena.org. The “911 Tutorial” at that address is particularly helpful.
48
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Strata DK14 and DK40i systems support the E911 feature through a standard telephone port to an
external, third party system. The third-party E911 adjunct system provides translation and
signaling of the correct CESID location information to the 911 PSAP.
The Strata DK424 system supports the E911 enhanced locator service through either external
adjunct equipment or the CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCS). The RMCS is a special CO line
card installed in a card slot. A system will support up to four trunks. Excess calls will route as
standard 911 calls over local trunks.
The CAMA card solution provides internal notification. When a 911 call is connected to the
PSAP, the Strata DK will ring designated stations and attendant consoles and present CESID
information in the displays. When a notified station answers the call, a three-way conference is
established between it, the calling party and the PSAP. The SMDR port generates two call records:
one at the beginning of the call and one at its termination.
Note
The FCC is in the process of defining national standards for E911 compatibility, but there
is no official due date. At present both legal and technical requirements vary significantly
by state and readers are advised to contact local emergency service providers and
telephone companies for detailed requirements.
DK14 and DK40i Operation
Strata DK14 and DK40i systems support E911 operation by forwarding 911 calls and 9+911 calls
to designated standard ports to interface with external, third-party, translation equipment. The
systems provide up to two standard telephone ports for this purpose. The external interface
connects a standard telephone port to a CAMA trunk and provides multi-frequency (MF) signaling
and translates the DN from the Strata DK to CESID.
The interface between the third-party adjunct equipment and the E911 tandem CO must use
special CAMA trunks. These specialized trunks are ordered through the special ordering desk of
your local phone company.
DK424 Operation
In addition to the external solution, the Strata DK424 system supports the E911 service through the
CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RMCS), a special CO line installed in a card slot. The
CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU) supports two CAMA Trunk Subassemblies (RCMS) that
support two CAMA trunks each. Software in the DK424 performs the CESID translation and
signaling.
Adjunct Equipment Suppliers
Two companies have been identified that supply the E911 adjunct translation systems -Proctor and
Associates, Redmond, WA (800) 824-9719; and Telident, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (800) 536-4911.
Information regarding the E911 adjunct interface equipment can be found in the Strata DK
Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Benefits
Enables the Strata DK to conform to most regulatory environments. The agency responding to the
911 call gets location information that makes it easier for them to find the right location within the
facility. This provides faster emergency service to those needing it.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
49
Features
System Features
External Amplified Speaker
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
HESB and HHEU or PIOU/PEPU (paging)
The External Amplified Speaker (HESB) is a six-inch, three-watt speaker with a three-watt
amplifier built into a wooden speaker box. It can be used to:
♦
Amplify the ringing on a digital or electronic telephone.
♦
Provide a paging amplifier/speaker.
♦
Create an amplified talk-back speaker arrangement in an area where a telephone is not needed.
The HESB is installed as a speaker and connected to a door phone unit that is used as the talkback microphone.
The number of HESBs that can be installed per system depends on the function of the HESB. Any
number of HESBs can provide loud ringing bells for electronic or digital telephones. Only one
HESB can be installed if it is used as a paging or an amplified talk-back speaker.
Note
Digital or electronic telephones, an HHEU2 interface, and an HESC-65A cable are
required for each phone that has a loud ringing bell. A 2000-series digital telephone that
has been upgraded with a data interface unit can be upgraded with the HHEU2 options but
older telephone models cannot.
On DK40i and DK424 systems, the PIOU or PEPU Option Interface Unit is required when an
HESB is used as a paging/amplifier speaker or an amplified talk-back speaker.
Benefits
Provides several options to make a communications system more efficient. A loud ringing bell can
improve call handling in noisy areas where non-amplified ringing on a phone may not be heard.
A paging speaker ensures that paging announcements can be clearly heard throughout an area. In
an area where a DKT is not needed, a talk-back speaker provides a cost-effective communications
solution.
50
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Flexible Button Assignment
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
On both 10-button and 20-button telephones, one button is usually assigned to the Intercom/PDN
function. In some cases, the Automatic Off-hook Selection feature is programmed to select the
Intercom line, eliminating the need for an Intercom/DN button.
The other buttons can be assigned to a CO/PBX line or to certain features. Some possible
assignments are:
♦
CO/PBX Line Button – If the telephone is being used in conjunction with a DSS console, all
buttons could be used as CO/PBX buttons.
♦
Pooled Line Button – Enable a group of CO lines to appear under one button. Up to four
Pooled Line buttons per CO line group can be assigned at each telephone. See “Pooled CO
Lines” for more information.
Table 7 lists the features that can be assigned to flexible buttons.
Table 7
Assignable Features
Feature Name
Account Codes
Alarm Reset
Alert Signal
All Call Voice Page
Alphanumeric Messaging
Automatic Busy Redial
Automatic Callback (Internal Calls)
Background Music (BGM) Interface
Call Forward – All Calls
Call Forward – Busy
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Call Forward – External
Call Forward – Fixed
Call Forward – No Answer
Call Park
Call Park LCD Display
Call Park/Page
Call Pickup (Directed)
Call Pickup (Group)
Call Pickup 1~4 (Tenant 1~4)
Data Release
Caller Identification (ID)/ANI
Data
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Directory Numbers
(PhDN, PDN, SDN)
Locked Automatic Dialing
Door Unlock 1~5
DTMF/Rotary Signal Selector
(Tone Key)
LCD Message
Flash
Handset OCA
Lost Call Auto Dial
Modem
Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)
(Tenant 1~4)
Night Transfer Lock
Pause (1.5, 3, or 10 Seconds)
Pooled Line Group 1~16
Privacy
Privacy Release
Release
Released Answer
Redial Last Number
Saved Number Redial
Speed Dial Select
Speed Dial Pause and Long Pause
Station Speed Dial Codes
Tone (DTMF/Rotary Signal
Selector)
Message Waiting for PhDNs
Microphone Cutoff
There are several standard keystrip patterns that can be programmed to make button assignments
easy. Buttons on individual stations can then be changed from the standard keystrip pattern
selected for that station. Strata DK systems have four keystrip patterns from which to choose (A,
B, C, and D).
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
51
Features
System Features
However, on 10-button and 20-button telephones, Flexible Button Assignment enables the
programmer to define each of the buttons instead of choosing a standard keystrip pattern and then
changing individual buttons. Any button which is not programmed for a specific feature or CO line
is automatically assigned per the initialized pattern.
The use of the “Keyprint 2000” PC software package now makes custom keystrips easy to create
and print.
Benefits
Flexible Button Assignment enables each phone to be customized to the particular needs of the
station user. The system can be tailored to fit the business communication needs.
52
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering enables a station intercom or DN, including the numbers for the
Attendant stations, to be any number from one to four digits long. The intercom/DN does not have
to correspond to the fixed station location number in the Key Service Unit (KSU).
The maximum number of available unique station DNs (PDNs plus PhDNs) are listed below:
♦
DK14 - up to 20 unique station DNs are allowed
♦
DK40i - up to 56 unique station DNs are allowed
♦
DK424 - up to 672 unique station DNs are allowed
Single-digit DNs, such as “0”, can be assigned to Attendant Consoles or Attendant telephones.
Benefits
Enables a consistent numbering plan for and facilitate the efficient use of a business’
communications system when the system includes several different types of telephone systems.
Branch offices which have Strata DK systems can have the same numbering plan as larger offices
using PBXs.
In the case where a system is being used behind Centrex, intercom numbers/DN can match
Centrex numbers.
If a Strata DK system is replacing a system that had a three- or four-digit numbering plan, the same
plan can be used with the new system, eliminating the need for new directories and new extension
numbers.
Finally, if the Strata DK system is being used with a voice mail system that has three- or four-digit
mailbox numbers, the extension numbers can match the mailbox numbers.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
53
Features
System Features
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Each incoming CO/PBX line that appears on a given station can be programmed to either ring or
not ring at that station. Each CO/PBX line can be programmed to ring at any number of electronic/
digital telephones. Thus, the number of ringing electronic/digital telephones per CO line is limited
only by system size. In the DK424, a maximum of 120 phones can ring at one time.
Each CO line can be programmed to ring the Auto Attendant, night bell, DISA, remote
maintenance modem or any station DN in the system. A different ringing assignment can be
created for each of three ringing modes – Day, Day2 or Night. Also, stations assigned to ring can
do so with any of the following timing designations.
♦
Immediate
Stations assigned Immediate timing ring as soon as the line rings into the system.
♦
Delay 1
If stations with Immediate timing have not answered within 12 seconds (3 rings), stations
assigned Delay 1 timing also begin ringing. Immediate Ring telephones continue to ring when
Delay 1 Ring telephones ring.
♦
Delay 2
If the above stations have not answered within 24 seconds (6 rings), stations assigned Delay 2
timing also begin ringing. Immediate and Delay 1 Ring telephones continue to ring when
Delay 2 Ring telephones ring.
A related feature, Night Transfer, enables programming of up to three different CO line ringing
patterns (Day, Day 2, and Night). The ringing pattern can be controlled by any station programmed
with a Night Transfer button. In tenant service, there are two Night Transfer buttons on DK14 and
DK40i systems and four on the DK424.
If a DK system is being used in tenant service, each tenant can separately define and control three
ringing patterns using the Night Transfer1~4 buttons.
Benefits
Provides the flexibility to define CO ringing arrangements to fit the needs of the business. Calls
can get to their destination quickly. CO/PBX lines can ring directly to a station or group of stations
in a specific department, without going through a central Attendant. This reduces the Attendant
call load and enables better service to callers. Flexible Line Ringing Assignment also enables the
use of private lines in the system, and is used for tenant service.
54
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Flexible Slot Assignment
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Standard on DK424
Available on DK40i (expansion cabinet only)
The flexible slot architecture on DK424 systems enables almost any combination of CO line and
station ports. Slots in the KSU can be assigned as station, CO line, or Option Interface slots in a
variety of custom configurations. All stations, CO lines, and optional printed circuit boards are the
same size and use the same connector to mount into the backplane of the base or expansion Key
Service Unit cabinet.
Any printed circuit board can be installed in any slot, with the exceptions of the RCTU common
control unit, which goes in designated processor slots, and the PDKU or PEKU which must be
installed in slot 11 if RSIU is not used. If RSIU is used, RSIU must be installed in slot 11, in this
case a PDKU or PEKU must be installed in slot 12 of the DK424 to enable system programming
and system administration functions.
Benefits
Increases the variety of line/station combinations, so a customer can have a system that is sized
and tailored to meet their specific needs.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
55
Features
System Features
Ground Start Lines
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Analog - one RGLU for groups of four lines
Digital - T1 Interface (RDTU)
Ground start lines provide better trunk supervision for disconnect signaling than loop start lines.
This is particularly valuable in voice mail, Auto Attendant, and ACD applications. It also greatly
reduces the possible collision of incoming and outgoing pooled line groups calls.
Individual circuits on the RGLU ground/loop start interface unit or RDTU T1 interface unit can be
configured individually for loop start or ground start, and for DTMF or dial pulse signaling, thus
maximizing performance and configuration flexibility on a line-by-line basis.
Benefits
Provides flexibility in choosing the best type of lines for the customer’s application and assists in
gaining the performance characteristics they require.
56
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Hotline Service (Emergency Ringdown)
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Standard on Strata DK40i/424 (only works
with SLTs, not DKTs)
Analog single-line telephones can be programmed so that when the user goes off-hook, they
automatically ring a designated extension without dialing. The receiving station or Attendant
console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station.
This feature is very useful for hotel/motel applications, in which lobby or public area telephones
either do not have dial access, or for convenience, automatically call the front desk.
This feature is also very useful for healthcare applications. If an analog single-line station is left
off-hook and fails to complete the dialing of a valid number within a programmable time period,
continuous ringing occurs at a designated extension.
Benefits
Provides convenience and service to hotel/motel guests calling from lobby or public area
telephones. In healthcare applications, emergency ringdown operation assists callers who may not
be able to complete the call by dialing.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
57
Features
System Features
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424 (Release
4.1 and higher)
BRI is the smaller capacity ISDN interface, providing two simultaneous voice or data connections.
BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64 kbps bearer channels and one
16 kpbs data (control) channel.
The two B-channels can also be combined for data transmission at speeds up to 128 kbps. The Dchannel carries call setup control data and can also be used as a third connection for packet data
transmission when using an external NT-1.
ISDN BRI services are designed mostly for end-user station interfaces. The system can connect
group IV faxs, PCs, computer terminals or ports, LAN bridges and routers, video conferencing
terminals, or other devices that can benefit from an all digital transmission link.
The DK40i and DK424 system also supports BRI interface from the public network as CO line
service. The station-side connection supports multi-point multiple device connection to the same
BRI circuit. Applications that are supported include:
♦
Video conferencing
♦
Remote access servers
♦
Faster Internet access
♦
High-speed data connections to the public ISDN network, as well as typical voice and fax
connections
♦
Calling Number ID services
♦
DID
Calling Number ID services are provided through the D-channel function of ISDN’s out-of-band
signaling format. The ISDN link sends the Caller ID for the service originating the call. This
number can be the listed DN, DID number, or a private line number used for billing, as well as
identification to the called location. Caller ID blocking and screening are available options.
Incoming calls are identified by Caller ID and the information is used in the DK424 like ANI.
DNIS information is also provided over ISDN lines.
The Strata 40i supports the BRI interface by installing the Basic Rate Interface Unit S/T (TBSU) in
the base cabinet. The TBSU provides two BRI S/T (four wire) interfaces that can be independently
used for network- or station-side connections.
The following BRI S/T Interface cards are supported by DK424 Release 4.1 and higher systems.
The DK40i also supports these interfaces in the expansion cabinet:
♦
58
Basic Rate S/T Interface Unit (RBSU) provides two BRI S/T (four-wire) interfaces that can be
used for network- or station-side connections. It has connectors for a two-port add-on
subassembly.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
♦
Basic Rate S/T Interface Subassembly (RBSS) attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional
BRI S/T interfaces that can be used for station-side connections only.
The combination of the RBSU and the RBSS subassembly can provide four BRI interfaces in one
card slot.
Note
Network connections using BRI S/T interface require a customer-supplied external NT-1
device.
The following BRI U Interface cards are supported by DK424 Release 4.2 and higher systems:
♦
Basic Rate U Interface Unit (RBUU) provides two BRI U (two-wire) interfaces that can be
used for network- or station-side connections. The RBUU has connectors for a two-port addon subassembly.
♦
Basic Rate U Interface Subassembly (RBUS) attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional
BRI U interfaces that can be used for station-side connections only.
The combination of the RBUU and the RBUS subassembly can provide four BRI interfaces in one
card slot.
ISDN Applications
ISDN features can be employed in many useful applications.
♦
Calling Number Services: The Signaling System 7 (SS7) communications network supports
ISDN PRI trunks across various CO switching systems by providing end-to-end digital
connectivity. In a calling number service application, for example, this extends calling number
information across the entire Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) by passing this
information across the various CO switching system nodes. Calling number information is
very important in CTI applications.
♦
High Speed Data: Performance improvement (speed and accuracy) and connectivity is
becoming a major factor in ISDN data-related applications. For example, a computer database
interface works well on ISDN lines for large capacity file transfer, high resolution graphics
transfer, online transaction processing, and information retrieval applications. ISDN provides
better performance for these applications which require faster call setup and network response
times than older, more restrictive analog networks can provide. ISDN also provides higher
data accuracy than today’s analog network.
♦
Video Conferencing: Color video transmission requires greater bandwidth and flexibility for
video conferencing and related applications. Video conferencing systems integrate cameras,
displays, CODECs, and control units. The CODEC can set up various transmission rates
between 64 kbps and 1.5 Mbps, as required.
♦
Video Telephones: Video phones can transmit voice and image simultaneously with ISDN.
Transmission of still images at high speeds is easy, as well as color moving picture
communication among several parties. This integrates a telephone, a video camera with an
image sensor, and a small color LCD display.
♦
Multi-device Connection: Up to eight devices can share one ISDN BRI line using station-side
connections. For example, one line can accommodate two phones and multiple PCs or fax
machines. The station interface is limited to two DNs. With conventional analog service, two
lines are required to transmit data and talk on the phone at the same time, unless a Data
Interface Unit (DIU) is used. The customer saves money by sharing CO line resources and is
provided the benefits of higher speed.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
59
Features
System Features
♦
Multiple LAN Link: Linking multiple LANs together, using ISDN, is very efficient at the 64
kbps high-speed rates, and data transmission over the digital network provides extremely highdata accuracy. This would replace the typical LAN bridge and modems in use today, which are
much slower and provide less data accuracy via the analog network. The DK40i and DK424
support BR1 station-side connection of access router devices used in these applications.
♦
High Speed Fax: G4 Facsimile offers high-speed and high-image quality. G4 Fax machines do
not have to be isolated within a stand-alone system. Many G4 Fax machines can also
communicate with G3 Fax machines, because the connection with existing networks is
handled by the ISDN side.
♦
Telecommuting: The idea of employees working at home is a much more effective and
practical option with ISDN services. The employees have access to office technology
necessary to make them work almost as effectively at home as in the office.
♦
Resource Sharing: Local network functions, such as printer sharing and modem sharing, are
supported by connecting these devices through terminal adapters. Users can share equipment
regardless of location. It also eliminates the need for dedicated connections, since all network
resources are available on a dial-up basis.
♦
ISDN BRI through Centrex: This is offered by many local exchange carriers, who offer both
Centrex and ISDN lines. Blending the calling features of Centrex with BRI provides many
customized capabilities. Examples are Caller ID, and the ability to set up data calls between
parties using the 64 kbps B-channel without the need for lower speed modems.
♦
Carrier Gateway: This is the general “catch all” category that connects anything to anything
over the PSTN. Using ISDN for this purpose provides speed, accuracy, and connectivity
advantages for applications like Internet connection, e-mail, Telex, Voice Mail, and Fax
forwarding.
Benefits
Faster call setup times make ISDN call connections faster, because a separate modem-type of
communication with the public network is used. Calls using analog connections or T1 digital
connections can take several seconds longer before the call connection is made, because they send
DTMF tones and wait for audible tones in return.
Immediate Caller ID is provided on ISDN calls, because Caller ID is transmitted with each call
setup message. This makes Caller ID information immediate rather than waiting for this
information to be sent after starting the ringing process as with analog lines.
Higher speed digital data connection is possible on a BRI connection to the ISDN network.
DID-type functionality enables direct incoming calls to be routed and ring at designated
telephones according to the number dialed. This provides DID functionality over ISDN lines
without the additional expense of purchasing a block of numbers from the telephone company and
subscribing to DID service.
60
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14/DK40i and
DK424 using RCTUA processor
Optional on Strata DK424 using RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F processors
PRI is the larger capacity ISDN interface, providing 23 simultaneous voice or data connections.
PRI uses the 23B+D transmission format which is defined as 23 64 kbps bearer channels and one
64 kbps data (control) channel, with total bandwidth of 1.536 Mbps.
ISDN PRI is designed as the bulk trunk interface to the ISDN network. PRI connects the DK424
telephone system to an intra- or inter-LATA communication provider. PRI can be used to send and
receive voice and data.
PRI can save money by enabling the multiple use of the channels on the PRI link for a variety of
services on demand, such as DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. This capability to support multiple
services and dynamically allocate channel use as needed is known as the call-by-call feature and is
described in more detail below. PRI lines also support the Calling Number ID Services also
described below.
ISDN PRI is supported in the DK424 system by using the Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU).
The RPTU is a 24-channel PRI card providing 1 data (control) channel and 23 bearer channels. All
B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be individually
configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie line, etc. service operation. Network connection
using PRI interface requires a customer supplied external Channel Service Unit (CSU).
The DK424 provides the following ISDN PRI features:
♦
Call-by-Call Service Selection permits the grouping of individual PRI B-channels to be shared
among various types of services specified by the customer, instead of having to dedicate each
channel to a particular type of service. For example, when using standard (POTS), DID, Tie,
FX, WATS, and 800, the line circuits (individual or groups) of B-channels of a PRI circuit can
be designated to these various services dynamically on a call-by-call basis.
B-channels can be dynamically allocated among services on a demand basis, depending on
varying requirements for outgoing and incoming calls. This could also be used for voice or
data on demand. This dynamic allocation of service can reduce the number of circuits required
to access various services, especially if different services have peak busy periods at different
times of the day.
Release 4.2 enables a minimum and maximum number of B-channels to be used for each
service on this common set of B-channels in system programming. Each of these values can be
set for three time periods during the day. With these values, calls can be rejected if they exceed
the maximum number subscribed for that service or they can ensure that a minimum number
of channels remain available for incoming calls. Thus, the system can be used to provide an
optimum service to meet the objectives of the business.
♦
Non-facility Associated Signaling increases traffic handling on PRI lines. A single 64 kbps Dchannel on one PRI line can be used to handle the signaling for two PRI lines on the DK424
system, instead of the usual signaling that requires one 64 kbps D-channel for each PRI line.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
61
Features
System Features
This is very important when using the Call-by-call feature to enable trunk groups larger than
the 23 B-channels available on one PRI line. This extends the number of call-by-call Bchannels to 47 (2 x 24 -1) and extends the number of B-channels on the second (non-signaling)
PRI line from 23 to 24. This provides better performance and cost savings in high volume
ISDN PRI applications.
♦
Calling Number Services are provided through the D-channel function of ISDN’s out-of-band
signaling format. The ISDN link sends the Caller ID for the service originating the call. This
number can be the listed directory number, DID number, or a private line number used for
billing, as well as identification to the called location. Caller ID blocking and screening are
available options. Incoming calls receive the Caller ID from the caller and is used in DK424
like ANI. DNIS information is also provided over ISDN lines.
Calling Number Services can be divided into four different types:
♦
Number Provisioning for outgoing calls is controlled by subscription parameters with your
telco provider. The choice is for the number to be necessary or not. The number sent is
based on the call originator and the call type. The originator can be a tandem call, a station
(with or without DID), or a station with a designated number. The type of call refers to
whether it is direct or redirected (call forwarded).
For a tandem call, the Calling Party Number digits received are the digits that are sent. For
a direct station call, the default number assigned to the selected service and which is
programmed into the Strata DK as the Listed Directory Number are the number that is
sent. In this case, the system can send a fixed number (assigned in the system) or it can use
the DID programming to determine he number to be sent.
♦
Number Screening is a feature of the public network. This is normally performed by the
network to ensure the call being placed has a valid billing number for the call. In systems
with a flexible Calling Number Provisioning, the network can perform the screening of the
call to ensure the number provided is valid for billing or reject the call, rather than
completing the call and billing it to the default Listed Directory Number.
♦
Number Privacy enables the caller to prevent the public network from delivering the
Calling Number to the called party on a per-call basis. Service subscribers can request
from the public network that the number be presented or not as a default. Subscribers can
also select the ability to change or not change the default settings. If a public telco service
enables changes to be made, then a user can enter change a code to the setting for that call
after selecting a trunk group.
♦
Number Delivery sends the calling number with the call setup message to indicate who is
calling, if that number is not blocked. When the Strata DK receives this number, it is
handled the same way that ANI information from T1 trunks is handled. i.e., The number
displays on the called telephone’s LCD, or it can be used by TAPI interfaces, or recorded
in SMDR data records, etc.
Note
Name Delivery is not currently supported due to the lack of a common specification for
the public ISDN network.
ISDN Applications
♦
62
Calling Number Services: The Signaling System 7 (SS7) communications backbone network
supports ISDN PRI trunks across various COs. ISDN depends upon SS7 out-of-band Dchannel signaling control to provide end-to-end digital connectivity. In a calling number
service application, for example, this extends calling number information across the entire
PSTN by passing this information across the various CO nodes. Calling number information is
very important in Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) applications.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
♦
High Speed Data: Performance improvement (speed and accuracy) and connectivity is
becoming a major factor in ISDN data related applications. For example, computer database
interface works well on ISDN lines for large capacity file transfer, high resolution graphics
transfer, online transaction processing, and information retrieval applications. ISDN provides
better performance for these applications which require faster call setup and network response
times than older, more restrictive analog networks can provide. ISDN also provides higher
data accuracy than today’s analog network.
♦
Video Conferencing: Color video transmission requires greater bandwidth and flexibility for
video conferencing and related applications. Video conferencing systems integrate cameras,
displays, CODEC, and control unit. The CODEC can set up various transmission rates
between 64 kbps and 1.5 Mbps, as required.
♦
High Speed Fax: G4 Facsimile via ISDN offers high speed and high image quality. G4 Fax
machines do not have to be isolated within a stand-alone system. Many G4 Fax machines can
also communicate with G3 Fax machines because the connection with existing networks is
handled by the ISDN side.
♦
Telecommuting: The idea of employees working at home is a much more effective and
practical option with ISDN services. ISDN can provide employees working at home access to
office technology necessary to make them work almost as effectively at home as in the office.
♦
PRI Static Integrated Network Access: Designed to eliminate the cost of maintaining separate
access lines for private-line services and switched services. The traffic over the two types of
access lines can be combined over the same access line.
♦
Resource Sharing: ISDN lines can support local network functions such as printer sharing and
modem sharing by connecting these devices through terminal adapters. This enables users to
share equipment regardless of location. It also eliminates the need for dedicated connections,
since all network resources are available on a dial-up basis.
♦
Carrier Gateway: This is the general “catch all” category that would be used to connect
anything to anything over the public network. Using ISDN for this purpose provides speed,
accuracy, and connectivity advantages for applications like Internet connection, e-mail, Telex,
Voice Mail, and Fax forwarding.
Benefits
Enables faster call setup times because a separate modem-type communication with the public
network is used. Calls using analog connections or T1 digital connections can take several seconds
longer before the connection is made because of DTMF tones.
Provides immediate Caller ID because it is transmitted with each call setup message. This makes
Caller ID information immediate rather than waiting for this information to be sent after starting
the ringing process as with analog lines.
Enables shared use of lines for voice, data, fax, and video on each channel for multiple purposes
based upon the setup request. Lines can be used for many services without the need for modems or
other devices, saving you money in monthly service charges.
Provides higher speed digital data connections for higher data accuracy. ISDN provides better
performance for applications that require faster call setup and network response times than older,
more restrictive analog networks can provide.
Enables DID-type functionality for direct incoming calls to route and ring at designated telephones
according to the number dialed. This provides DID functionality over ISDN lines without the
additional expense of purchasing a block of numbers from the telephone company and subscribing
to DID service.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
63
Features
System Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
LCR enables automatic routing of each outgoing call over the least costly trunk, CO line, or
common carrier. A station user simply dials the access code (9) and the telephone number. The
system can also choose a specific route for long distance or local calls when enabled. Up to three
schedules can be set up, enabling different routes selected at different times of the day. Up to five
special codes (ones that should never be blocked, such as 911) can be exempt from LCR. Table 8
lists the LCR capacities for each Strata system.
Table 8
DK424
LCR Capacities
LCR
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
LCR route plans
8
8
8
8
16
16
Area Code/Office Code
(AC/OC) exception
tables
8
8
8
8
16
16
Time schedules
3
3
3
3
3
3
Station classes
4
4
4
4
8
8
Route definition tables
4
4
4
4
6
6
Modify digit tables
6
6
6
6
12
12
An optional warning tone can be heard, if programmed, when the system has selected the most
expensive route. The user can then wait until a less expensive line becomes available.
LCR is compatible with ABR and line-to-line connections. LCR and Toll Restriction features have
the following additional capabilities:
♦
“Assume 9” – enables the input of four-digit Centrex numbers and be routed locally, even if
the number conflicts with restricted long distance area codes.
♦
Special area codes that:
♦
Enable input without the “1” prefix, so calls are unrestricted and routed the same as local
seven-digit numbers.
♦
Can be stored in a table (up to six special area codes) for areas not using standard North
American Numbering Plan dialing.
♦
Special codes (begin or end with * or #) – overrides Toll Restriction so the call is routed
locally in normal or Centrex environments. It can be used for Caller ID per-call blocking.
♦
Universal 976 number blocking. Four other office codes can be stored in a table to provide
universal blocking.
Benefits
LCR reduces the costs of long distance calling by ensuring that each call is placed over the least
costly route available to that user at that time. Placing a call is simpler for station users, since they
do not have to decide which line to use, or remember how to access specific lines.
64
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Line Call Pickup Groups
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
With the CO Line Call Pickup Group feature, up to two CO Line Call Pickup Groups can be
programmed on DK14 and DK40i systems and up to four groups on DK424. Ringing CO lines in
the first CO line group can be picked up with an access code or with the Directed Pickup1 button,
if it appears on the telephone. Ringing CO lines in the second CO line group can be picked up with
an access code or with the Directed Pickup2 button, if it appears on the telephone.
As an option, all CO lines could be put into one group. A ringing CO line could then be picked up
with an access code or with the Directed Pickup button.
On Strata DK systems with tenant service, the CO lines for tenant 1 could be put into one CO line
group, and the CO lines for tenant 2 could be put into another CO line group. Then, tenant 1
station users can use the Directed Pickup1 button and tenant 2 station users can use the Directed
Pickup2 button to pick up the CO lines assigned to them.
Benefits
Enables convenient and efficient call handling for CO line calls. Station users do not have to
determine which CO line is ringing in order to answer it, nor does the ringing CO line have to
appear on their telephone in order for them to pick it up.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
65
Features
System Features
Line Groups
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Also known as Trunk Groups, this feature enables the CO lines on any Strata system to be assigned
to CO line groups. Station users can access the CO line groups by dialing a specific CO line group
access code. This enables a customer to group various types of CO lines together for convenient
access.
For example, a customer might want to put Tie lines in one CO line group and WATS lines in
another. Users would then access the CO line group that was appropriate for the type of call being
placed. If all lines in that CO line group were busy, the user could queue for the CO line group.
If the system is programmed for Least Cost Routing (LCR), station users do not need to select a
specific CO line group. DK14 systems recognizes up to four CO line groups. DK40i and DK424
systems with RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB processor can be programmed for up to eight CO line
groups. DK424 systems with an RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F processor can be programmed for up to
16 CO line groups.
CO line groups are also the pooled line groups that can be assigned to buttons on a DKT. Pooled
Line Group 1 is CO Line Group 1, Pooled Line Group 2 is CO Line Group 2, and so on. Up to four
Pooled Line Group buttons for the same CO line group can be assigned to a station to facilitate
handling several calls on that CO line group at that station. See “Pooled CO Lines” for more
information.
Benefits
Enables queuing, single-line telephone access to CO lines, Pooled lines, CO line Call Pickup
Groups, and Tenant Service. They are also used to define LCR schemes.
66
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Line Queuing
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
This feature is also known as trunk queuing. When all lines are in use, this provides a means to
“stack” station users in a waiting queue for an available outgoing CO line. The Automatic
Callback feature notifies the station user when a line becomes available.
A DKT or a standard single-line station can queue up for a busy outgoing CO line or CO line
group. When the desired line is available, the system calls the station back, and the station can
proceed with the call.
Users save time since they do not have to keep checking to see if the line they want is free. Once
they have queued for the line, they can return to their work, knowing that the system calls them as
soon as the line is available.
Benefits
If LCR is installed, Line Queuing provides a convenience to users who are restricted to certain call
routes.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
67
Features
System Features
Live System Programming
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Programming can be performed on a Strata DK system without taking the system out of service.
The system can be put into programming mode, and data can be entered.
During the programming, the station executing commands is the only station that loses normal
functioning. Service is not interrupted to any other station.
Live system programming can be done locally or remotely using a DKAdmin PC, if the system is
equipped for remote administration/maintenance. When the system is programmed from a remote
or local terminal, all stations remain functional.
Benefits
Eliminates any disruption to telephone service during the business day caused by programming
adds, moves or changes. In addition, it helps control costs by eliminating the need to do these
changes after hours at overtime rates.
68
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Memory Protection
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
The system memory has its own battery backup to protect the system’s and customer’s
programmed data in the event of a power failure. The battery system is capable of retaining
information for up to six years. In the event of a short-term or long-term power failure, data
integrity is maintained. This means that the system programming (e.g., system parameters, toll
restriction tables, station classes of service, LCR programming, ringing assignments, message and
Speed Dial memory, etc.) is not lost.
Benefits
In the event of a power failure, the system data is completely reinstated upon restoration of power.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
69
Features
System Features
Message Waiting
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Standard on DK40i and DK424 with SLTs
and RSTU2 PCB
Unavailable on DK14 with SLTs
The Message Waiting feature enables any station and most voice mail devices to set a Message
Waiting LED at any digital/electronic station which has a Message Waiting (MSG) button. On
Strata DK systems with digital telephones, there is a fixed MSG button.
The Message Waiting indication can be turned on by the calling station; or, if the station has been
forwarded to voice mail, the message waiting indication is activated once the calling station leaves
a message in voice mail. The station user can retrieve the message simply by pressing the Message
button associated with the LED.
The Message Waiting feature on DK40i or DK424 systems also applies to standard telephones
with a message waiting lamp. However, unlike the digital telephone station user who can retrieve
messages by pressing a button, the standard telephone user is notified by an activated message
waiting lamp on the telephone. The standard station user can enter an access code to retrieve the
messages. A standard telephone with message waiting lamp must be connected to an RSTU2
station card in the DK40i or DK424. Message Waiting features on DK14 systems do not apply to
standard telephones.
Up to four message waiting indicators can be set on any given station. However, the fourth
indicator is always reserved for a message from the message center. This means that a maximum
of three other stations can activate Message Waiting on a station at any one time.
The extension number of the station that sent the message is displayed on an LCD telephone. The
total number of station numbers that can be displayed depends on the length of the station
numbers. Up to eight LCD characters can be used for all of the station numbers. Thus, if station
numbers are two digits long, up to four station numbers can be displayed. All station numbers can
be displayed using the Scroll button.
Any station or voice mail system can be designated as a message center. There can be only one
designated message center in the system, even if tenant service is installed.
If a voice mail system is assigned as the message center, the voice mail system can set message
waiting at a station when a message arrives in that station’s mailbox. It can also dial a code to
cancel the Message Waiting LED on a station, once the station user has picked up the message.
When the voice mail system leaves a message waiting indication on an LCD telephone, a “V” is
displayed next to the voice mail port extension number to indicate that the message is from the
voice mail system.
When LCD messaging is used to send a silent message to the LCD telephones, an “M” is displayed
next to the station DN.
70
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Benefits
People sometimes forget to check for messages, or do so infrequently, especially if they are not
located near the Attendant Console. They may not be aware that they have messages, and
important messages or requests for timely callbacks can go unattended for several hours. The
Message Waiting feature alerts the station user to waiting messages, thereby making the
communication system more efficient and providing better service to customers and other callers.
Standard telephone applications are more feasible with Call Waiting lamp activation, especially in
voice mail and hotel/motel applications. This can be important to a DK40i or DK424 customer
who wants to reuse a substantial number of existing standard single-line telephones.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
71
Features
System Features
Multiple Directory Numbers (DNs)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Multiple DNs provide the
ultimate in call coverage
flexibility. Station DNs can
appear on multiple telephones,
and individual telephones can
have multiple appearances of
their own station DNs (shown in
Figure 4). All DNs can originate
and answer calls.
A DN button can also release an
existing call and originate
another call with one press of the
DN button. Press the DN button
you are using to automatically
release the existing call. This
gives you a dial tone enabling
you to make another call.
Phantom Directory
Numbers [PhDNs]
504
508
501
Secondary Directory
Numbers [SDNs] of
Station 211
Calls to Station 211 can
be originated or
answered by Station 210
by pressing the 211-1 or
211-2 button.
Station 210's
Primary Directory
Numbers [PDNs]
Figure 4
500
501
MW/5001
500
211-2
210-3
211-1
210-2
210-3
210-1
210-2
211-2
210-1
211-1
Station 210
Station 211
0934
Multiple DNs
There are three DN types (maximums by system are given in Table 9):
♦
Primary Directory Number (PDN) – each telephone has a unique PDN and can have up to four
button appearances of its own PDN.
♦
Secondary Directory Number (SDN) – when the PDN of a station appears on another station,
it becomes an SDN on the other station. The PDN of one telephone can appear as a SDN on all
other digital telephones and ring on all other digital telephones (except the DK424 with a
maximum of 120 telephones). Incoming and outgoing calls can occur on each PDN or SDN.
Each telephone can be assigned with up to four of the same SDN buttons. The maximum
number PDN plus SDN buttons on each telephone is 16.
♦
Phantom Directory Number (PhDN) – the system also provides PhDNs that can be dedicated
to a station or group of stations (usually in the same area or department). Each PhDN number
can only appear once on a given telephone, but each telephone can have up to eight different
PhDN buttons. A PhDN can also appear on all digital telephones on the system and can ring on
all other digital telephones (except DK424 with a maximum of 120 telephones).
PhDNs are assigned to designated telephone owners in system programming with the following
telephone privileges:
72
♦
Set Call Forward and Mail Box destination
♦
Receive Message Waiting (MW) indication for up to four PhDNs on individual PhDN/MW
button LEDs
♦
Receive OCA when the called
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Each PhDN can have a dedicated Message Waiting PhDN/MW button for message notification for
the person or department associated with the PhDN. Up to four PhDN/MW buttons can be
programmed into each telephone.
PhDNs (the 500-series extension numbers on the keystrip in this example) are usually associated
with a function such as an “800” number for a technical support group. A specific PDN is usually
associated with a person.
Incoming calls come into a PDN from the top down. For example, incoming calls to Station 210
rings first at the top 210 line; the second call rings at the 210 line below it; and the third call rings
at the bottom 210 line. Auto preference for DNs are from the bottom PDN up. A station PDN
shows busy on Busy Lamp Field when the station is off-hook on any DN, CO line or Tie line.
PhDNs do not display Busy Lamp indication.
Table 9
Type of
Number
Maximum Multiple DNs
DK424
Digital
Telephone
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
PDNs
4 (same DNs)
10
28
32
80
240
336
SDNs
151
102
282
322
802
2402
3362
PhDNs
8 (different DNs)
10
28
32
80
240
336
20
20
56
64
160
480
672
Total DNs
1. Total of 16 combinations of PDN and [SDN] per telephone.
2. PDNs and SDNs are the same number.
Benefits
Multiple DNs provide the ultimate in call coverage flexibility. They are convenient and provide an
easy way to answer each other’s calls or general calls to a departmental group. This is both a
common requirement in most large installations and has many useful applications in smaller
organizations as well.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
73
Features
System Features
Multiple FCC Registration
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
DK14 and DK40i systems can be configured as either key or hybrid with separate FCC registration
numbers for each type. DK424 systems can be configured as a key, hybrid, or PBX, with separate
FCC registration numbers for each type. The appropriate configuration for an individual system
depends on how it functions.
If the system is configured for only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a
key telephone system. If the system is configured for automatic selection of outgoing lines such as
dial access, Least Cost Routing, and pooled line buttons, the system may have to be registered as a
hybrid or PBX telephone system.
In addition, certain features (DID, Tie lines, and off-premises stations) can also require hybrid or
PBX telephone system registration in some areas.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with FCC regulations regardless of how the system is configured.
74
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Multiple Simultaneous Handsfree Intercom Paths
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with EKTs and DKTs
The intercom paths on the Strata DK systems are designed to carry handsfree conversations on all
intercom calls at the same time. The digital technology of the DK systems provides completely
non-blocking intercom paths and enables unlimited, simultaneous, and handsfree intercom calls.
Benefits
Non-blocking, digital technology enables any station to make a handsfree intercom call at any
time.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
75
Features
System Features
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
A MOH/Background Music (BGM) RCA jack is built into the common control unit on DK14,
DK40i, and DK424 systems. The jack connects a customer-supplied music source for MOH,
BGM, or both.
The MOH interface connects the system to a customer-supplied music source. CO lines placed on
hold are connected to the music source. BGM can share a music source used for MOH or have a
separate source.
If a DK40i and DK424 system is configured with a tape recorder that plays a pre-recorded
message to holding parties, the Option Interface Unit (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) is suggested.
These units have a relay that can be programmed to control a tape player every time a CO line is
placed on hold. The tape recorder does not run continuously. When the relay activates, the tape
plays. When the line goes off hold, the tape stops. DK14 does not support the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU card.
The MOH volume can be adjusted using system controls.
Benefits
Customers can realize a cost benefit with this feature, as they do not have to purchase a separate
interface card for MOH (the customer provides the music source). MOH is not simply for
entertaining callers while they are on hold. It also assures the caller that he or she is still connected
to the system. The customer can substitute a promotional tape for a music source, enabling the
customer to advertise to callers on hold.
The separate music sources available on Strata DK enables callers on hold to hear special music
and/or advertising messages while station users hear and external speakers play different music.
Some firms like to select a particular type of music to reinforce an image they are trying to create.
76
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Night Ringing Answer Code
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
The Night Ringing Answer Code enables any station to answer an incoming call that rings when
the system is in Night mode. The user dials a code to answer the call.
When a DK system is used in tenant service, each tenant can have a separate Call Pickup button
which connects the user to the ringing call.
Benefits
Enables answering a call after hours when it rings over the external page, a night bell, or through
selected telephones. Family members, other employees, and even customers can reach employees
after hours. This affords peace of mind to the employees and their families.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
77
Features
System Features
Night Ringing Over External Page
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
An option can be selected through system programming to have incoming CO line calls and door
phones ring over external paging when the system is in Night mode. Night ringing over the
external page can be assigned on a CO line-by-CO line basis.
Door phone ringing can also be programmed to sound over an external speaker. The call can be
picked up by any telephone.
If a system is used for Tenant Service, the lines assigned to Tenant 1~4 can be programmed to ring
over the external paging system. Lines for Tenants 1~4 ring according to the Night mode that is
programmed for them.
Benefits
If a customer has an external paging system that gives sufficient coverage to the work area, there is
no need to purchase additional equipment for night ringing. CO line calls after hours ring over the
existing paging system, assuring those people working after hours that they will receive important
calls.
Because ringing can be programmed on a line-by-line basis, lines which do not require attention
after hours need not ring over page. This minimizes disturbance to those working after hours.
78
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zone
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424 with PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU
Unavailable on DK14 (Zone Paging)
If zone paging has been installed, incoming CO line calls can be programmed to ring over selected
page zones using customer-supplied paging equipment. The CO lines can be placed into two
groups, and each group can be assigned to night ring over different PIOU paging zones.
Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be assigned to night ring over
the selected zones.
Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be assigned to night ring over
the selected zones:
♦
DK40i – two tenant groups
♦
DK424 – two tenant groups with RCTUA; all other processors support four tenant groups
Benefits
Enables night calls to ring over external paging and differentiate between two groups of calls.
People working after hours are not bothered by calls that are not directed to their area.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
79
Features
System Features
Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Also known as Night Service, all Strata systems can be programmed for up to three alternate CO
line ringing arrangements. They are Day, Day2, and Night.
Day mode is for normal system operation during business hours. DAY2 mode is often used for a
ringing arrangement to handle calls when the Attendant is at lunch or on a break. For example,
incoming calls could be sent to a secretary or Auto Attendant that has been designated as the
backup Attendant. Night mode is used after hours and on weekends.
For each of the three modes, each CO line can be assigned to ring at any station in the system
including off-premises stations. For example, the CO lines could be assigned to ring a voice mail
port, or could ring any number of stations. For a given CO line, the ringing arrangements for each
of the three modes can be entirely different. The Delayed Ringing feature can also be applied
individually to all three modes.
If a CO line is programmed to ring at only one telephone in a particular ringing arrangement, a CO
line call to that telephone forwards if the telephone is in the Call Forward mode. If the telephone is
in a station hunt group, the call hunts.
Night Ringing can also go to external page. It can also go to a night bell and/or to an answering
machine. The PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU option interface unit is required for night ringing over
external page on a DK40i or DK424 system.
Benefits
Efficient handling of calls by several pre-programmed ringing arrangements. The customer can
easily switch among the arrangements to handle calls at different times of day.
80
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Non-blocking Dialing
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
On Strata DK systems, Non-blocking Dialing means that all outside CO and internal DN lines can
be in use simultaneously, and any station can be connected to any other station on an intercom call.
Since there is no set number of intercom paths, no one would be blocked from making a call if a
CO line is free.
The only potential blocking a Strata user could experience is with single-line telephones. Blocking
could occur if an insufficient number of DTMF receiver circuits are installed or in an extremely
high traffic situation.
Benefits
Enables buying a system that is the correct size for a business, because the system capacity is fully
used at all times. The customer does not have to buy extra capacity in order to ensure that calls are
never be blocked during busy hours. This non-blocking digital technology enables station users to
make calls whenever they need to.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
81
Features
System Features
Off-premises Station (OPS)
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 with
standard station ports and DTMF receivers
An OPS is a standard 2500-type (DTMF/tone) or 500-type (rotary) single-line set located off-site
from where the system is installed. It normally requires a special line from the CO. Secondary
protectors must be installed on OPS lines. Each Strata system can support the following offpremise stations.
♦
DK14 – up to two OPS
♦
DK40i – up to a total of 20 OPS
♦
DK424:
♦
RCTUA – up to 24 standard single-line telephones
♦
RCTUBA/BB – up to 72 standard single-line telephones
♦
RCTUC/D – up to 232 standard single-line telephones
♦
RCTUE/F – up to 328 standard single-line telephones
Standard, single-line sets have access to many of the same features as digital stations, although the
access method is different. Since the standard phone does not have feature buttons, access codes
are used to activate features.
The system can be programmed to enable standard single line sets to access an outside line by
dialing a CO line access code (often “9”). CO lines can be selectively included in, or excluded
from, the “dial 9” group.
As a programmable option, CO line groups can be defined. The standard single line set can access
a CO line group by dialing the CO line group access code. This option is useful when the set is
only enabled access to a certain group of CO lines. Individual CO lines can be selected by a
standard single line set by dialing “7” plus the CO line number.
A 48-volt interface is available (R48S) to extend the loop length or match the network interface.
Benefits
Enables installation of stations beyond the 1000-foot limitation of the DKT. It also enables the less
expensive standard telephones to be used at satellite locations and to have access to many system
features. It can eliminate the cost of installing a separate phone system.
Customers can use the less expensive standard single line telephones on-premises for employees
who do not need the full complement of features afforded by the digital telephone.
82
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Outgoing Call Restriction
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Through programming, stations can be selectively restricted from making outgoing calls on any, or
all CO/PBX lines. However, a station that is restricted from making outgoing calls may still
receive calls on those lines.
Because Outgoing Call Restriction is applied on a CO line-by-CO line basis, each employee’s
phone can be programmed so that the employee can only access those CO lines necessary to do his
or her job. For example, if a set of WATS lines was installed in the system for the use of a special
sales group, employees who are not in the sales group can be restricted from accessing those
WATS lines.
Benefits
Provides potential cost and productivity benefits, because employees who do not need to make
outgoing calls as part of their job, are restricted. In addition, if it is an employee’s job to answer
incoming calls, this feature ensures that the employee do not tie up those lines with outgoing calls.
More efficient service can then be given to the incoming callers.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
83
Features
System Features
Paging - All Call Voice Page
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
All Call Voice Page enables a station user to make a voice announcement through the speakers of
all telephones which are not in use or otherwise blocked from receiving an all call page (maximum
120 on DK424). The user presses the All Call Page button or dials an access code and makes the
announcement through the station handset. Stations that are busy on-hook or off-hook do not
receive the page, even if equipped with Off-hook Call Announce.
The system can be programmed to include external paging in the All Call Voice Page. Through
programming, stations can also be excluded from receiving such page announcements.
Benefits
Enables paging of all employees simultaneously without the need for an external paging system.
All Call Voice Page provides this capability without the expense of an external paging system.
Even if an external paging system is installed, the All Call Voice Page feature can still be very
useful. People sometimes “tune out” external paging. Paging through the phone with this feature
gets attention.
Some employees may not be located within range of the external paging system. This feature can
bring a paging announcement directly to their desktop.
Certain applications may not be appropriate for external paging where the paging activity might
distract or disturb the clientele. In these cases, paging through the telephones provides an excellent
solution.
84
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Paging - External Page Interface
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i
Optional on Strata DK424 with PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU
On DK14 and DK40i systems, there is a 600-ohm output which can be connected to a customerprovided external amplifier and compatible talk-back speaker.
On DK424 systems, an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PEPU) can be installed to provide an
internal three-watt amplifier and an external page interface. The PIOU can support zone paging
with up to four zones. The PEPU can support just one zone. An optional two-way 600-ohm voice
path is available on the PIOU, PEPU, or PIOUS for use with a customer-supplied talk back
speaker/amplifier.
The PIOU or PEPU provides a relay contact to mute background music over external page when a
voice page is in progress.
Benefits
Provides instant access to employees who do not have phones or who are away from their desks,
and saves time locating them.
All Strata DK systems connect easily to an external paging system.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
85
Features
System Features
Paging - External Zone Paging
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14
Optional on Strata D40i/DK424 with PIOU
The DK40i can support as many as four and the DK424 can support up to eight External Page
Zones. Station users can access one, four, or eight zones simultaneously by dialing a brief access
code.
The PIOU Option Interface Unit and customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers are required to
support external zone paging. DK424 systems require two PIOU units to support eight Page
Zones.
Benefits
Conveniently pages a specific area without distracting employees who do not need to hear the
announcement.
86
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Paging - Group Paging
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Any number of digital/electronic telephones can be divided into paging groups and one station can
be in up to four. A unique access code is assigned to each paging group, that enables voice paging
exclusively to that group. Any station user can make an announcement to just one or all of these
groups (All Call Page) that is sent to the speaker of all idle telephones in the page group. The DK
systems support:
♦
DK14 – up to five paging groups
♦
DK40i – up to five paging groups
♦
DK424 (RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F – up to nine paging groups in systems
♦
DK424 (RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB) – up to five paging groups
Notes
●
●
The Cordless DKT-2004-CT or standard telephone is not compatible with paging.
If one group is being paged, the Group Paging feature is not available to any other group until
the first group page is completed.
Benefit
Enhances office efficiency by providing a quick way to contact a group of people without
disrupting other workers who do not need to hear the message. When all groups are paged,
everyone can hear the announcement simultaneously.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
87
Features
System Features
Pooled CO Lines
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
A “CO line group” and a “CO line pool” are the same except a pool of CO lines can appear under
one CO line button on a telephone. CO lines can be pooled in categories. For example, all WATS
lines of the same type can be in one pool, all regular CO lines in another, and all Tie lines to the
same destination in a third. Pooled and single-appearing line buttons are designed for use with
loop- and ground-start lines, not DID, Tie, DNIS, or ANI lines.
The number of CO line groups available on Strata DK systems are as follows:
♦
DK14 – 4
♦
DK40i – 8
♦
DK424 with RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB – 8
♦
DK424 with RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F – 16
Each CO line pooled group can appear on up to four Pooled Line Grp (group) buttons on a digital
telephone. This enables the user to process several calls in that CO line group at the same time. If a
station user regularly processes more than one call at a time, Toshiba recommends that the station
be assigned more than one Pooled Line Grp button.
It is also recommended to separate incoming and outgoing CO lines into separate groups. This
prevents the accidental pickup of incoming calls when making outgoing calls.
Benefits
Provides the use of less expensive 10-button telephones instead of 20-button telephones for access
to the same number of CO lines.
The Pooled Line Grp button also offers “hybrid” type system operation, even while configured for
“key” operation. This also enables the Strata DK to compete more cost effectively against hybrids.
88
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Power Failure Transfer
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i
Optional on DK424 with DPFT
Power Failure Transfer automatically switches CO lines directly to a standard single-line
telephone and provides emergency service if commercial AC power fails. When AC power is
restored, the system automatically switches back, and the standard power failure transfer telephone
becomes inoperative again.
The DK14 and DK40i have one power failure transfer port as standard equipment. The DK424
required one port (DPFT) and transfers up to eight CO lines to dedicated, customer-provided
single-line telephones.
The DPFT requires one port on an RSTU or RDSU, and only one DPFT can be supported per
RSTU or RDSU. The DPFT 24V control connects only to an RSTU or RDSU. Multiple DPFTs can
be attached depending upon the number of power failure transfer CO line circuits required.
During a power failure, the following connections are made:
♦
DK14 – one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone.
♦
DK40i – one CO line in the base KSU in connected directly to the PF phone. Up to eight more
can be added in the expansion cabinet using a DPFT and RSTU.
♦
DK424 – multiple CO lines can be switched. If AC power is lost, the PF telephone is
automatically and directly connected to the first CO line.
Benefits
Enables making and receiving calls without interruption of service.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
89
Features
System Features
Privacy/Non-privacy Option
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
The system can be programmed as private or non-private. When the system is in the private mode,
a station user who makes a call on a CO line or intercom has exclusive use of that line. Other
stations cannot enter the line by pressing the Line button. When the system is in the non-private
mode, other stations can enter the conversation by pressing the CO Line button.
This feature applies to CO line buttons only and does not apply to DNs. Outside CO lines can be
private or non-private on a station-by-station basis. Private lines prohibit users from pressing a
common CO line button and accessing a line that is already in use, whereas users can do so on
non-private lines.
Private line users can change the mode by pressing the Privacy Release button enabling as many as
three stations (total) on a line. Non-private users can block access to their lines by pressing the
Privacy button.
Benefits
Greater flexibility because the system can be customized to meet the business’ needs.
90
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Relay Service
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
(one relay)
Optional on DK424 with PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU (two relays)
The standard relay can be programmed for one of three options:
♦
External Page: A page over external speakers mutes Background Music (BGM) that is being
broadcast over the same speakers.
♦
Night Relay: An answering machine or a night bell (or chime) are activated when a call rings
in during Night mode.
♦
Hold Relay: A Music-on-Hold source turns on when a call is placed on hold, and goes off
when the caller is taken off hold. With the relay installed, the music source does not have to
play continuously.
On DK40i or DK424 systems, two relays are provided using a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU option
card. In addition to External Page, Night Relay, or Hold Relay, these optional relays can also be
programmed for Door Lock Control, which opens a customer-supplied door lock for three or six
seconds when a designated button is pressed on selected telephones. See “Door Lock Control” for
more information.
If a system has BGM on an external paging system, the external page relay makes it possible to
suppress the BGM when a voice announcement is made over the paging system. Voice
announcements can be heard clearly without interference from the BGM.
Benefits
Increases options for handling calls when the system is in night service. The customer can choose
the best arrangement that meets the needs of their business.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
91
Features
System Features
Remote Administration/Maintenance
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14 - QSMU and external modem
DK40i - PIOU or PIOUS and IMDU modem;
or RSSU and external modem
DK424 - PIOU or PIOUS and IMDU
modem; or RSSU and external modem; or
RSIU with RMDS or external modem
Remote Administration/Maintenance enables administrative and diagnostic software programs to
be run “live,” without interruption of normal system operation from a remote location. The IMDU
modem can operate at 300 or 1200 baud full duplex. DK424 can use the RSIU card with the
RMDS modem at up to 2400 baud or an external modem at up to 9600 bps.
The Remote Administration module requires two programmable security codes for access to all
programs (Level 1) or station class of service programs only (Level 2). There are six operating
modes:
♦
Programming mode – all programs
♦
Data dump mode – all programs
♦
Test CO lines/stations
♦
LCD messaging – edit and set completely new messages for any DKT (system and personal
messages)
♦
Speed dial edit/change
♦
DKAdmin for backup/restore and program administration (see DKAdmin description in
System Overview section for details)
In order for the Remote Administration module to work, one CO/Centrex/PBX line must be
connected to the system. However, this line does not have to be dedicated to the module. If the CO
line is dedicated it can be programmed to ring the module directly during any ringing mode (Day,
Day 2, or Night).
If automatic connection is not programmed, connection between a CO line and the module is
accomplished using the Call Transfer feature. Remote administration/maintenance can also be
accessed through Auto Attendant, Direct Inward System Access (DISA), and/or DID lines.
Benefits
Reduced service costs because routine service and administrative procedures can be done from the
service company’s office. Service time is also reduced.
92
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Reserve Power Battery Backup Interface
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
On the DK14, an optional battery backup unit is available for the system power supply. The
backup unit (HPFB-6) includes the battery pack and built-in charger and mounts externally. Either
one or two HPFB-6s can be connected. If other types of batteries are used with DK14, they are not
charged by the DK14 power supply.
Customer-supplied 12-volt batteries can be connected to the DK40i or DK424 systems as a power
failure backup system. Batteries are connected to the system’s standard power supply by an
optional connector cable. The DK40i and DK424 power supplies provide a built-in battery
charger. Gel-cell maintenance free batteries are recommended.
In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches to battery power without
interruption. All functions of the Strata system continue to operate for several hours after a loss of
normal electrical power. The exact time period depends on the type and size of batteries used,
system capacity, and traffic (see the Strata DK General Description for details). No calls are
disconnected during the switch to battery power.
During normal power conditions, the batteries are kept fully charged by the system power supply.
Benefits
Ensures that telephone service is not interrupted by a power failure.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
93
Features
System Features
Speed Dial (SD)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Also known as automatic dialing or one-button dialing, this feature enables the customer to assign
dialing codes to telephone numbers that are frequently called. Each system SD number can have
up to 20 digits. Two or more speed numbers can also be “chained” during one call to accommodate
numbers that have more than 20 digits. Pauses and flashes can be programmed into the number.
Both system and station SD numbers are available.
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers are available to all station users. A designated station,
Attendant console, or DKAdmin PC can assign the SD numbers.
The maximum number of available SD numbers is:
♦
DK14 – up to 40
♦
DK40i – up to 40
♦
DK424
♦
RCTUA processor – up to 40
♦
RCTUBA/BB processor – up to 100
♦
RCTUC/D processor – up to 100
♦
RCTUE/F processor – up to 800
Access to the SD numbers can be assigned on a station-by-station basis, and some stations can be
restricted. If a station user is restricted from using the SD numbers, that user is automatically
restricted from having station speed numbers. The SD numbers can also be programmed to
override toll restriction.
If the system is installed behind a Centrex or a PBX, the SD locations can also be used for storage
of Centrex/PBX feature access codes. Those codes can then be assigned to appear as automatic
dialing buttons on phones that need them. In this way, Centrex or PBX feature codes can be
programmed for one-button access.
SSD codes 90~99 can be pre-defined and incorporated into any other SD code to dial up to 20
digits (37 digits chained) using one code. For example, an Other Common Carrier (OCC) access
number could be programmed as SD code 90. Then, SD code 90 could be used as part of the
telephone number for another SD code by entering *90 as the first three digits in the telephone
number for that SD code.
Station SD enables the station user to have a private automatic dialing list. Each station can have
up to 40 station SD numbers. The numbers in this list can be changed by the station user at will.
Station SD can be enabled or denied on a station-by-station basis.
The station user assigns a two-digit code to each of the telephone numbers, and programs a
number for each code. The user can then “speed dial” the number by using the code, instead of
having to dial the number manually. If the station has buttons assigned as SD buttons, one speed
dial number can be programmed for each SD. Numbers not assigned to SD must be accessed with
a SD code.
94
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
If SSD codes 60~90 or 600~699 have been pre-defined, they can be incorporated into a station SD
code to dial up to 37 digits automatically using one code. For example, an OCC access number
could be programmed as system SD code 90. Then, system SD code 90 could be used as part of the
telephone number for a station SD code by entering *90 as the first three digits in the telephone
number for that station SD code.
If the user has a 20-button LCD telephone with the SD memo feature, a 12-character name can be
programmed for each of the 40 personal SD numbers. The LCD user can then scroll through the
“memo pad” of names and numbers. When the desired name and number appears on the LCD, the
user can press a CO line to automatically dial the number.
Benefits
Looking up telephone numbers can be time consuming. Errors can be made in dialing which also
waste time and can be costly. By using automatic dialing for numbers that are frequently called,
those time-wasters are eliminated.
Sometimes certain employees need to make business toll calls. However, it may also be desirable
to toll restrict those employees, yet enable them to dial specific business toll calls using system
speed dial numbers. This eliminates the possibility of telephone abuse and can reduce costs.
Station Speed Dial enables the Strata DK system to be customized. Station users can us personal
Speed Dial for telephone numbers they need which are not on a System Speed Dial list.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
95
Features
System Features
Station Hunting
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
There are three types of station hunting:
♦
Serial Hunting (SH) – routing of calls to the next station in a hunt group
♦
Distributed Hunting (DH) – routing of calls to the next hunt group
Serial Hunting
When a called station is busy, the call is routed to the next station in the hunt group. If that station
is busy, the call is routed to the next station in the hunt group and so on. If a station has Call
Forward set, the call that is hunting is forwarded and leaves the hunt group. Hunt group routing is
assigned in the system programming database.
Assignment is flexible, so any station may hunt to any other station. Many stations may be linked
together in the same chain. The hunt group may be as big as all the stations in the system, or as
small as two stations.
SH can be used with PhDNs, PDNs, or a combination of these. In the case of tone ringing to
multiple appearing PDNs, hunting takes place only if none of the multiple appearances of that DN
are idle. If the call is Voice Announce, then hunting occurs if that PDN’s station is off-hook on any
DN or CO line. A ground or loop start call hunts from a PDN or PhDN only if it has been assigned
to ring exclusively at the owner station of that DN.
Data-call serial hunting is different from voice-call serial hunting. Data-call group assignment is
independent from voice-call hunt groups, but the same hunt group size characteristics as above
also apply to data-call hunting.
Distributed Hunting
When a call is directed to a DH group, the systems hunts for the next available idle station in
rotation order and then sends the call there. Calls are more evenly distributed than with SH. If a
station has DND set, hunting skips to the next idle station.
A maximum of 16 DH groups are provided. Each group has its own unique DN which is like a
pilot number. Up to 32 stations can be in any one group, and distribution can be in any rotation
desired. A station can be a member of more than one group. If such is the case, the lower group
number has priority. For example, a call in group seven’s queue would first ring to station 201 even
if another call had been in group eight’s queue and had been waiting longer for station 201.
Calls can be routed to DH groups from Caller ID/DNIS/ANI lines, Tie lines, loop or ground start
lines, stations transferring calls, internal direct calls, DISA calls and calls routed through built-in
or external Auto Attendant. Calls forwarded from stations, or overflow calls from ACD groups can
also be routed to a particular DH group (except for Call Forward Fixed).
DH group member telephones should be equipped with Pooled Line buttons if ground/loop start
lines ring directly to DH groups. The routed CO line flashes only on the called members Pooled
Line button.
96
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
DH member telephones should be equipped with PDNs, not CO Line or Pooled Line buttons for
DID and Tie lines that directly ring to a DH Group. This is to avoid two buttons flashing on the
telephone when it is called.
PhDNs cannot be assigned as members of DH groups.
ACD Overflow to DH Group (DK424 only)
ACD calls can overflow to DH groups if there is an idle agent in the DH group, but remain in the
ACD queue at overflow time if all DH group members are busy.
ACD Agent Ring-No-Answer to DH Group (DK424 only)
ACD calls can route to a DH group during an agent ring-no-answer condition if there is an idle
agent in the DH group. If all DH group members are busy when an agent ring-no-answer call
attempts to route to the DH group, the ACD call routes to the ACD CO line normal ringing
assignments.
However, once a call enters a DH group, it cannot be forwarded or serial hunted out of that group.
This is to avoid falsely routing calls to personal voice mail boxes. Calls cannot be routed to DH
groups by SH. Also, calls overflowing from an Attendant Console position or DID intercept calls
cannot be routed to a DH group.
Calls are distributed to a station’s PDN in the case of internal, DID, or Tie line calls. In the case of
ground or loop start lines, Pooled Line buttons can be established on a station for separate
identification of DH calls. In this case, both the Pooled Line LED and a common PhDN LED
flashes. When answered, the call is resident on the Pooled Line button. Individual PhDNs cannot
receive DH calls.
If no stations in a DH group are idle, new calls routed to that group are placed in a queue waiting a
station to become idle. A maximum of 10 calls can be in each group’s queue. Callers in queue hear
ringback tone until a DH member becomes idle and the call is answered. The 11th caller trying to
enter the queue receives busy tone.
Benefits
Enhances call handling by providing better service to customers and outside callers, because they
usually reach someone on the first try who can help them. It can also boost productivity for
internal callers, since they do not have to hang up and redial another DN if the first party does not
answer.
DH is very popular in voice mail applications with all voice mail ports in a DH group. This
provides very efficient use and availability of voice mail ports.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
97
Features
System Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14 - WSIU
DK40i - TSIU in base; PIOUS or PIOU in
expansion
DK424 - PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU
SMDR prints call records of both incoming and outgoing calls or outgoing calls only. Strata DK
systems can also print a call record of outgoing toll calls only. Calls of less than one or ten seconds
(programmable option) are not recorded. The basic SMDR printout includes:
♦
Time and duration of the call
♦
Time to answer the call
♦
Stations to which the call was transferred
♦
Type of call – all calls, outgoing only, and toll
♦
Station number that made the call
♦
DN of the destination
♦
Account codes (if the system has been programmed to include)
♦
ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS/DID/Tie numbers/names (if the system has been programmed to
include)
If present, the names take the place of the system Account Codes. A sample of the SMDR output
for outgoing calls is shown in Figure 5.
SMDR is supported in each system as follows:
♦
DK14 – requires the WSIU, equipped with an RS-232C connector for attachment to a
customer-provided printer or recording device. Data output speed can be set at 300 or 1200
bps.
♦
DK40i – requires the TSIU, PIOU or PIOUS, equipped with an ASCII RS-232, 6-wire
modular connector, compatible with most call accounting devices.
♦
DK424 – requires the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU, equipped with an ASCII RS-232 6-wire
modular connector and compatible with most call accounting devices.
The DK40i and DK424 also require a PPTC connector that converts a 6-wire, modular connection
to a 25-pin connection (DB-25) and is available from Toshiba.
98
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
1
10
11/06/97
001
*
20
30
40
60
00:00;22
001 MODM
08:15
00:00;18
00;00
003
200D
08:16
00:00;28
00;08
003
DISA
08:16
00:00;15
001
DISA
08:17
00:00;25
003
MSS
08:18
00:00;12
003
205
08:19
00:00;22
003
202
08:19
00:00;16
205
80
90
100
110
120
DISA Call to IMDU
Outgoing DISA Access by Incoming DISA 01
Incoming DISA and Access CO 03 Outgoing
205 Answers DISA Call 12 Seconds After DK Dial Tone
00;06
First Digit (varies)
Last Digit (always this column)
500
08:20
00:00;34
1234567890123456789
003 C 200
200
08:22
00:00;22
7145933700
08:23
00:00;40
7145833700
F
G
First Digit
Last Digit
1234567894563210
1993021977
K
L
093772981
2890
205
4567897
123456987
sw
004 D 200
002
70
MM/DD/ YY, Every Fifty Call Records and at Midnight
08:14
205
50
A B C D E
H
I
J
M
A
= Non-ISDN call established, then network disconnects. A = ISDN call established, then DK disconnects.
+ = ISDN call established, then network disconnects. S = Start of E911 call. E = End of E911 call.4
Field Number 1
B
CO Line Number (001~144).
Field Number (2~4)3
C
C = Caller ID Call; D = ANI or DNIS Call.
Field Number 5
D
[PDN] of the Station (1~4 digits)2 making/answering a call.
Field Number (7~10)3
E
Primary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/answered the call (1~4 digits). Blank if call
is made from a CO line button.
Field Number (12-15)3
F
Time of Day (HH:MM:SS).1
Field Number (17-21)3
(HH:MM:SS).1
Field Number (23-30)3
G
Call Duration
H
CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS).
Field Number (32-36)3
I
Station to which the CO line was transferred (1~4 digits).
Field Number (38-41)3
Telephone Number
Incoming (1~20 digits)
Field Number (43-63)3
DNIS/ANI Format:
ANI (10 digits), DNIS (2~5 digits), Caller ID Number or ID Code
7145833730 3846
♦
J
5
♦
Outgoing Number (1~20 digits)
♦
E911 Station ID (Prg 12)
ANI
DNIS
Field Number (43~52)
K
DNIS NAME5 (0~16 characters); Caller ID Name5 (0~16 characters), or Account Code6 (4~15 digits); LCD
User Name on E911 Calls
Field Number (65~80)3
L
Outgoing Subaddress on ISDN call.
Field Number (82~101)
M
Incoming Subaddress on ISDN call.
Field Number (103~122)
1.
Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 1 or 10 secs (set by Program 60-2) to generate a call record printout.
2.
“MSS”: designates a DISA or CF–External CO call to an unanswered station or answered after 1 or 10 secs (threshold) per
Program 60-2. The call registers as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time. DISA calls always register 5~6
seconds ring before answer duration time.
3.
Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes.
4.
A “*” in the first column indicates a disconnected call by the CO Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic Release signal. Loop
start CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled before the CPC is dropped.
5.
Answered calls ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data transmits using the SMDR port. Abandoned calls data is not transmitted, but can
be stored in station memory. See Program *51 and *52.
6.
See Program 60-1.
7.
Strata DK sends a Carriage Return (CR) and Line Feed (LF) ASCII symbol after each line of data.
General Notes
The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit.
Special dial printout: Tone = “T”, Long pause = “L”, Flash = “F”, Pause = “P”
“DISA”: designates a DISA or CF–External call through the system via CO-to-CO connection.
“MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem.
Figure 5
SMDR Output - Incoming Calls
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
99
Features
System Features
Benefits
Save costs because telephone abuse can be pinpointed and corrected and telephone bills are
properly allocated back to the departments that made the calls.
Further, since account codes are included in the SMDR printout, lawyers, accountants, and others
who provide hourly professional services can accurately bill clients for telephone time.
SMDR can also help increase productivity for employees such as telemarketers who must learn to
spend the optimal amount of time on each call.
100
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Station Relocation
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
There are two types of Station Relocation – moving the physical location of the telephone, or using
dial codes to relocate telephone set features without physically moving its location. When Station
Relocation is activated, a telephone can automatically maintain its particular characteristics
(personal speed dial, flexible keys, feature set, and all DNs) when it is relocated from one modular
jack to another.
A vacant jack of the same circuit type (DKT, EKT, and SLT) must be available whenever
relocating a station. You can swap or remove an existing telephone to provide a vacant jack. Only
one telephone can be relocated at a time. Station Relocation is available system-wide and can be
turned off and on only by the System Administrator’s station.
Note
This feature does not work when stations are relocated from a PDKU to a KCDU in the
DK40i.
Benefits
Makes moving telephones quick and easy. Just unplug the telephone from one jack and plug it into
another. Saves the expense of having a third party re-program the system to reflect these changes.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
101
Features
System Features
System Programming Through Station
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Any Strata DK system can be programmed using a 20-button digital LCD telephone in the system.
On DK424 systems, programming is done from the digital telephone connected to PDKU port 005.
On DK14 and DK40i systems, programming can be done using any station port.
During programming, the station executing the commands is the only station that loses normal
functioning. Service to all other stations remains normal.
Benefits
Enables simple moves and changes without purchasing additional terminal equipment. All
programming can be done with a digital LCD telephone.
102
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
Features
System Features
Tandem CO Line Connection (Trunk-to-Trunk)
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Two CO line appearances for the DKT, or
call set up on a DN
Also known as Trunk-to-Trunk Connection, this feature connects a user to two CO lines in a
conference. A DKT that sets up a Tandem CO line connectino must have two CO line appearances
or the connection must be set up on a DN. After connection, the user can drop out of the
conversation leaving the two outside parties in an unsupervised conference. The CO lines remain
connected until one of the parties hangs up. Each CO line in the system can be enabled or denied
the Tandem CO Line Connection feature. Each system supports:
♦
DK14 – two connections
♦
DK40i – four connections (maximum)
♦
DK424 – ten connections (maximum)
Amplified Conference
If the amplified conference option is installed and the amplifier is available, the Tandem CO Line
Connection is automatically amplified. A trunk-to-trunk connection (up to 10 at one time) is
established on each DNIS external network call.
Drop Out
On DK424 Release 3.2 and later versions, Tandem CO Line Connection – With Drop Out enables
standard telephones and Voice Mail/Auto Attendant ports to set up a conference with two CO lines
and then drop out of the conference leaving the two CO lines connected.
The station that sets up the two-line connection can reconnect to the tandem connection by dialing
a pickup code. If more than one tandem connection is set up by a station, the pickup code
reconnects that station to the tandem connection that has the lowest CO line number as a priority.
Prior to Release 3.2 software, standard telephones could set up two-line conferences, but they
could not drop out of the connection. The pickup code function applies only to the station that sets
up the tandem connection. A station cannot pick up a tandem connection which was set up by
another station.
Automatic Release from Hold
For loop start lines, Strata systems have an Automatic Release from Hold capability that provides
automatic disconnect. It recognizes the disconnect signal from the CO. If the CO does not provide
the disconnect signal (most do), the trunk-to-trunk conference must be monitored and released by
the station user who set it up. For ground start, DID or Tie lines handling the incoming trunk,
automatic release is accomplished from disconnect supervision.
Strata DK Feature Description
5/99
103
">